You are on page 1of 564

Manual No: M517-E383

Revision: T

Digital Radiography System


DAR-8000f
Installation Manual

This manual is for the use of specialist service


personnel. It has no relevance to the daily
operation of the Digital Radiography.
This precaution and prohibitions seen through the manual are classified as follows:

States a direct danger that may cause death or serious


injury if it is not avoided.

States an indirect or potential danger that may cause death


or serious injury if it is not avoided.

States a danger that may cause slight or medium injury or


may cause damage in equipment or fire if it is not avoided.

States the information that helps to use the system


correctly.

M517-E383T
Revision Record
Revision Date Content
A - Create first edition.
B 2006.08 Add section 5.1.3 "Setting UPS of PCU".
Add a Table in section 1.
Add a Table of "the marketing situation of the option" in
section 13.
Add Appendix C-2 "Confirming the Version of FPD" and
Appendix C-3 "Confirming the Version of Hardware of
DAR-8000f".
Add a Table in Appendix D.
C 2007.01 In section 4.8.5
Change the connector to COM3 for the serial cable
connected to PCU.
In section 5.1.1 Add NOTE.
In section 5.1.2.7 Add the procedure of Xcat restart, and
NOTE.
In section 5.1.3 Add NOTE.
In section 5.2.3
Change the connector to COM3 for the serial cable
connected to PCU.
In section 7.2.13 a) Add procedures of 4) to 6).
In section 9.6 Delete the description about auto copy to
CD/DVD.
Add the section 13.
D 2007.03 Delete parts related to DICOM Query/Retrieve.
Add Appendix G and Appendix H.
E 2008.06 Add Appendix B-10 to B-15 and B-17 to B-21.
Add G11-S (LCD monitor manufactured by NANAO).
Add the item of the PCU error.
Correct Appendix H.
F 2008.12 In section 4.5.5.1
Add selection of the connector for the 37. IBS CABLE
according to the number of BNC connectors.
In section 4.9.1
Add the connection method of the 39. GRID CONT CABLE
with sheath processing.
G 2009.03 In section 1
Correct Revisions, and add the system identifier.
Add section 1.2 "Related Documents".
Add section 5.1.4 "Updating PCU".
Add section 5.2.5 "Updating DAR-8000".
Add section 5.2.6 "Setting DCOM IP Address and
Fluoroscopy Mode".
In section 5.3 Add NOTE.
Add section 5.5 "Setting Software of UD150B-40".
Add section 5.6 "Setting ZS-100 S/W".
In section 6.3.1 Correct "Button 3" in Table 6-1.
In section 6.3.1 (h) Correct Mode 3 and 4.
In section 7.2.2 and 7.2.3 Change settings.
Add section 7.7 "Checking APR Settings".

M517-E383T
In section 9.3, Add confirmation method.
In Appendix B-1 Add options in the menu.
In Appendix B-7 Change Restore procedure.
In Appendix B-16 Change setting procedure.
In Appendix B-19 Add option.
In Appendix B-20 Change setting procedure.
In Appendix B-21 Change setting procedure.
Add Appendix B-22 "Blanking Pulse Fluoroscopy".
Add Appendix B-23 "Air Calibration".
Add Appendix B-24 "Tomosynthesis".
In Appendix C-2 Change FPD version window.
In Appendix D Change Tables.
In Appendix F Change Title.
In Appendix F-1 Change to "ATI Graphics Board".
In Appendix H Change Tables.
In Appendix H-1 Change Tables.
In Appendix H-3 Change Tables.
H 2009.08 In section 1 Correct Revisions.
In section 7.2.3 Add and Change NOTE.
In section 11 Add configuration files to be backed up.
I - -
J - -
K 2010.10 In section 1 Correct Revisions.
Add section 4.4.1.5 "SMD19102 CS (LCD monitor
manufactured by NANAO)".
In section 6.3.1 Add "Scale Display" to (c) "Set system
option parameter" and Change value for Grid Moving Time
(msec).
Add section 7.2.15 "POST-SURE OPTION (502-27759)".
In section 8 Delete some user names.
In section 9.4 Add checking items.
In Appendix B-1 Delete some Execution user from Table 1
and Change Figure 11 and Add 3-8 in Table 4.
In Appendix B-22 Change and Add modes in Blanking
Pulse Fluoroscopy.
Add Appendix B-25 “POST SURE".
In Appendix D Change value for Grid Moving Time (msec).
In Appendix G Add Note.
Add Appendix J "Countermeasure for FPD Error".
L 2011.01 In section 4.2 Change cable name of (40) and cable length
of (34-e).
In section 5.1.3.2 Change setting value.
In Appendix A Add the case of Windows XP.
In Appendix B-1/Appendix B-3 Delete some users.
In Appendix B-19 Change the procedure.

M517-E383T
M 2011.06 Add descriptions on "S-type FPD (for China)" and "S-type
FPD (for All Countries Except China)" in the sections of 2, 3,
4.
In section 1 Correct Revisions.
In section 2.1.1 Change some components.
In section 4.5.4.4 Change Figure 4-42.
In section 4.11.2 Change Figure 4-120.
Add 5.1.2.1.
Add NOTE in section 5.1.2.5.
In section 5.1.3.2 Change setting value.
Add section 5.2.7
Add NOTE in section 5.5.2.3
In section 6.3.1(h) Change Grid Moving Time.
In section 6.3.1(h) Change note below table.
In section 7.2 Add descriptions.
In Appendix B Change screen and add NOTE.
In Appendix D Change Mode 3 and Mode 4.
In Appendix G Add Note.
N 2011.07 In section 5.1.3.2 Change procedure.
O - -
P 2013.11 In section 5.2.5 Add Note.
In section 5.2.6.2 Add Table “PCU Mode (SURE(Std))”
In section 5.5.2.2 Add SURE(Std) in the table.
In Appendix D Change Mode 3 and Mode 4.
In Appendix B-22 Change procedure 9).
In section 6.3.1 (g) Add Note about Mag4 FOV size[inch] of in
the settings of FOV size Parameter

Amendment of the following in accordance with the change to


UPS made by OMRON from UPS made by APC.
In section 1 Correct Revisions.
Add Note about UPS.
In section 4.2.2 Add the cable in the case of UPS made by
OMRON.
In section 4.2.3 Add the cable in the case of UPS made by
OMRON.
In section 4.6.1 Add Note about UPS.
In section 4.6.5.1 Divide Connection of UPS into UPS made
by APC and UPS made by OMRON.
In section 4.7.5.1 Divide Connection of UPS into UPS made
by APC and UPS made by OMRON.
In section 4.7.4.3 Divide Connection of UPS into UPS made
by APC and UPS made by OMRON.
In section 4.12 Step(4) Add position of Power Switch of UPS
made by OMRON.
In section 5.1.3.1 Add Note about UPS made by OMRON.
In section 5.1.3.2 Divide Connection of UPS into UPS made
by APC and UPS made by OMRON.
R 2015.02 In section 4.2.2 Delete RS-232C cable in the case of UPS
made by OMRON.
In section 4.2.3 Delete RS-232C cable in the case of UPS
made by OMRON.
In section 4.5.4 Modify UPS cable connectings.

M517-E383T
In section 4.6.1 Add PCU4 picture.
In section 4.6.5 Change UPS model and delete UPS
additional board and RS232C cable.
In section 4.6.6 Add connectings of PCU4.
In section 4.7.1 Add PCU4 picture.
In section 4.7.4 Change UPS model and delete UPS
additional board and RS232C cable.
In section 4.7.5 Add connectings of PCU4.
Add section 4.13.
In section 5.1.2 Add temp log file path of PCU4.
In section 5.1.3 Change UPS model and add description of
not requiring PCU4 power failure setting.
T 2016.11 In section 4.2 Add comment of RX150.
In section 4.4.1 Add 4.4.16 RX150 SC.
In Appendix H Add DAR-8000 PC model.

M517-E383T
Table of Contents
1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................1

1.1 TOOLS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION ................................................................................. 3


1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS ....................................................................................................... 4
1.3 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................... 5
1.4 STORAGE / TRANSPORT REQUIREMENTS............................................................................. 7
2 CARRYING ...........................................................................................................................9
2.1 DAR-8000F COMPONENTS ................................................................................................. 9
2.1.1 Original Type FPD ........................................................................................................ 9
2.1.2 S-type FPD (for All Countries Except China) ........................................................... 10
2.1.3 S-type FPD (for China) ............................................................................................... 11
2.2 DIMENSION AND WEIGHT OF UNIT ................................................................................... 13
2.2.1 Original type FPD ....................................................................................................... 13
2.2.2 S-type FPD (for All Countries Except China) ........................................................... 14
2.2.3 S-type FPD (for China) ............................................................................................... 15
2.3 CARRYING ......................................................................................................................... 16
3 INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................17
3.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................. 20
3.2 INSTALL EACH CABINET .................................................................................................... 22
4 WIRING ..............................................................................................................................25
4.1 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS AT WIRING ................................................................................ 25
4.2 CONNECTING CABLE......................................................................................................... 26
4.2.1 Original Type FPD ...................................................................................................... 27
4.2.2 S-type FPD (for All Countries Except China) ........................................................... 39
4.2.3 S-type FPD (for China) ............................................................................................... 51
4.3 WIRING TO DAR-8000 POWER TRANSFORMER ................................................................. 64
4.3.1 Connecting Secondary Cable ...................................................................................... 64
4.3.2 Connecting Primary Cable ......................................................................................... 68
4.4 WIRING MONITOR ............................................................................................................. 69
4.4.1 How to connect the Monitor ....................................................................................... 69
4.4.2 Connecting Monitor in Control Room ........................................................................ 75
4.4.3 Connecting In-room Monitor (OPTION) .................................................................... 76
4.4.4 Installing the LCD on the LCD Stand (LCD monitor manufactured by Siemens) 78
4.4.5 Attaching Nameplate .................................................................................................. 80
4.5 WIRING ORIGINAL TYPE FPD ........................................................................................... 81
4.5.1 FPD System (Original Type FPD) ............................................................................. 81
4.5.2 Connecting FPD .......................................................................................................... 84
4.5.3 Connecting in Sub Cabinet ......................................................................................... 87
4.5.4 Connecting in PSU RACK 2 ....................................................................................... 91
4.5.5 Connecting PCU ........................................................................................................ 106
4.6 WIRING S-TYPE FPD (FOR ALL COUNTRIES EXCEPT CHINA) ......................................... 111
4.6.1 FPD System (S-type FPD for All Countries Except China) ................................... 111
4.6.2 Connecting FPD ........................................................................................................ 116
4.6.3 Connecting FPD Cooling Unit, Box ......................................................................... 119
4.6.4 Connecting in FPD Sub Cabinet .............................................................................. 121
4.6.5 Connecting in PSU RACK 4 ..................................................................................... 124
4.6.6 Connecting PCU ........................................................................................................ 134
4.7 WIRING S-TYPE FPD (FOR CHINA) ................................................................................. 139
4.7.1 FPD System (S-type FPD for China) ....................................................................... 139
4.7.2 Connecting FPD ........................................................................................................ 142
4.7.3 Connecting in Sub Cabinet ....................................................................................... 145

M517-E383T
4.7.4 Connecting in PSU RACK 2 ..................................................................................... 150
4.7.5 Connecting PCU ........................................................................................................ 164
4.8 WIRING DAR-8000 CONTROL CABINET .......................................................................... 169
4.8.1 Removing Rear Panel................................................................................................ 169
4.8.2 Connecting Earth Cable ........................................................................................... 172
4.8.3 Connecting CCD OUTSIDE CABLE ........................................................................ 173
4.8.4 Connecting Video Cable (Option) ............................................................................. 174
4.8.5 Connecting Serial Cable ........................................................................................... 176
4.8.6 Connecting KVM Cable, USB Memory and LAN Cable ......................................... 177
4.8.7 Connecting Scan Converter Cable (Option) ............................................................ 180
4.8.8 Mounting Rear Panel ................................................................................................ 182
4.8.9 Connecting PC Switch .............................................................................................. 183
4.8.10 Connecting Monitor............................................................................................... 185
4.8.11 Connecting Mouse / Keyboard Cable ................................................................... 190
4.8.12 Connecting Power Cable ....................................................................................... 191
4.9 CONNECTION UD150B-40 AND ZS-100I ........................................................................ 192
4.9.1 Connecting GRID Control Cable .............................................................................. 192
4.9.2 Connecting Cable for Auto Calibration Cable ......................................................... 194
4.9.3 Connecting the Injector Cable .................................................................................. 195
4.9.4 Connecting the Dosimeter ........................................................................................ 196
4.10 WIRING INTERCOM ......................................................................................................... 197
4.11 CONNECTING FPD AND WATER-COOLING HOSE ............................................................ 198
4.11.1 Adjusting FPD Cooling Unit ................................................................................ 199
4.11.2 Connecting FPD and Water Cooling Hose........................................................... 200
4.12 CONFIRMATION ............................................................................................................... 203
4.13 INVERTING THE UPS POLARITY (FOR COMBINATION OF BN-220T AND PCU3) .............. 204
4.14 CONNECTING SIDE STATION (OPTION) ........................................................................... 210
4.14.1 Connecting for Type 1 ........................................................................................... 210
4.14.2 Connecting for Type 2 ........................................................................................... 210
4.14.3 Connecting for Type 3 ........................................................................................... 211
5 SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................ 213
5.1 STARTUP DAR-8000F SYSTEM AND SETTINGS (1) .......................................................... 213
5.1.1 Startup PCU .............................................................................................................. 213
5.1.2 Setting Xcat (software for PCU control) and Temperature Monitor (software for
monitoring temperature) ...................................................................................................... 214
5.1.3 Setting UPS of PCU .................................................................................................. 241
5.1.4 Updating PCU ........................................................................................................... 255
5.2 STARTUP DAR-8000F SYSTEM AND SETTINGS (2) .......................................................... 256
5.2.1 Startup DAR-8000f Control Cabinet........................................................................ 256
5.2.2 Setting Display Resolution ....................................................................................... 257
5.2.3 Confirmation for Serial Port Setting ....................................................................... 264
5.2.4 Setting UPS ............................................................................................................... 269
5.2.5 Updating DAR-8000 .................................................................................................. 277
5.2.6 Setting DCOM IP Address and Fluoroscopy Mode ................................................. 278
5.2.7 Omitting Offset Calibration ..................................................................................... 280
5.3 UPDATE THE FIRMWARE OF SGIM ................................................................................. 283
5.4 PCU ERROR DISPLAY ..................................................................................................... 284
5.5 SETTING SOFTWARE OF UD150B-40 .............................................................................. 287
5.5.1 Upgrading S/W .......................................................................................................... 287
5.5.2 Uploading Settings .................................................................................................... 289
5.5.3 Checking Settings ..................................................................................................... 295
5.6 SETTING ZS-100 S/W ...................................................................................................... 296
5.6.1 Upgrading Software .................................................................................................. 296
6 STARTING SERVICE APPLICATION ............................................................................ 297
6.1 STARTING SERVICE APPLICATION ................................................................................... 300
6.2 SETTING ON "UTILITIES" SCREEN ................................................................................... 303

M517-E383T
6.2.1 Setting on "Network Connections" Window ............................................................ 304
6.3 SETTING ON "CONFIG" SCREEN ...................................................................................... 307
6.3.1 Setting System Configuration .................................................................................. 308
6.3.2 Setting Communication with X-ray high-voltage generator Control Cabinet ...... 328
6.3.3 Setting DICOM CD/DVD Export ............................................................................. 335
6.3.4 Setting Destination of DICOM Print ....................................................................... 341
6.3.5 Setting Patient Information Entry Item ................................................................. 349
6.4 SET DICOM OPTION ...................................................................................................... 352
6.4.1 Updating Site Key ..................................................................................................... 352
6.4.2 Setting DICOM Send Option.................................................................................... 353
6.4.3 Setting Destination of DICOM Worklist (MWM) ................................................... 361
6.4.4 Setting Destination of DICOM MPPS ..................................................................... 367
7 WORK FOR ADDING OPTION ....................................................................................... 373
7.1 BASIC COMPONENT......................................................................................................... 373
7.2 INSTALL OPTION ............................................................................................................. 373
7.2.1 PPWS OPTION ASSY (502-24407) .......................................................................... 373
7.2.2 TOMOGRAPHY OPTION (502-24706) .................................................................... 374
7.2.3 TOMOSYNTHESIS OPTION (502-24702) .............................................................. 375
7.2.4 REMOTE MAINTE OPTION ASSY (502-24408) ................................................... 378
7.2.5 DICOM PRINT OPTION (502-24417) ..................................................................... 378
7.2.6 DICOM STORAGE OPTION (502-24418) ............................................................... 378
7.2.7 DICOM MEDIA STORAGE OPTION (502-24419) ................................................. 378
7.2.8 DICOM MWM OPTION (502-24421)....................................................................... 379
7.2.9 DICOM MPPS OPTION (502-24422) ...................................................................... 379
7.2.10 PULSED FLUOROSCOPY OPTION (502-24424) .............................................. 380
7.2.11 SDA OPTION (502-24425) ................................................................................... 380
7.2.12 REFERENCE MONITOR OPTION (502-24445) ................................................ 381
7.2.13 DSA OPTION (502-24429) ................................................................................... 383
7.2.14 RSM-DSA OPTION (502-24430) .......................................................................... 384
7.2.15 POST-SURE OPTION (502-27759)...................................................................... 385
7.3 PUT OPTION LABEL ........................................................................................................ 386
7.4 REPLACE LABEL, SITEKEY ............................................................................................. 387
7.5 UPDATING SITEKEY........................................................................................................ 388
7.6 SETTING FOR CHANGING THE SYSTEM FROM RF TO DSA SYSTEM ................................. 389
7.6.1 Checking the System Configuration ........................................................................ 389
7.6.2 Changing the Settings for the Service Application ................................................. 389
7.6.3 Changing the Settings for the Sonialvision Console .............................................. 389
7.7 CHECKING APR SETTINGS ............................................................................................. 390
8 SETTING STANDARD OPERATION ENVIRONMENT ................................................. 391

9 CONFIRMATION ............................................................................................................. 393


9.1 CHECKING START-UP ...................................................................................................... 393
9.2 CHECKING OPERATION ................................................................................................... 394
9.3 CHECKING FLUOROSCOPY AND RADIOGRAPHY............................................................... 394
9.4 CHECKING IMAGE PROCESSING ...................................................................................... 396
9.5 CHECKING DICOM SEND OPTION ................................................................................. 397
9.6 CHECKING DICOM CD/DVD EXPORT ........................................................................... 398
9.7 CHECKING DICOM PRINT .............................................................................................. 399
9.8 CHECKING DICOM WORKLIST OPTION ......................................................................... 400
9.9 CHECKING DICOM MPPS ............................................................................................. 401
9.10 CHECKING EXIT .............................................................................................................. 402
10 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................................... 403

11 SETTING BACKUP .......................................................................................................... 405

M517-E383T
12 HOW TO CHECK THE POWER CONTROL ON PS CTRL BOARD ............................... 409
12.1 HOW TO CHECK THE POWER CONTROL .......................................................................... 409
13 OVERLAY EDIT TOOL .................................................................................................... 411

M517-E383T
1 Introduction
This document summarizes the method and the point to keep in mind in order to carry,
install, and wire DAR-8000f.
Please understand this manual enough to perform installation so that this device behaves
well and operate efficiently without trouble.

This document applies to DAR-8000 series application “Revision


04.30.04” or later.

The following table shows the corresponding version of each device.


System Revision Component Revision

DAR-8000 Ver.04.30.04 or later IX Works Ver.1.1


IAPDB Ver.02
DDM 18.588 Flashable
FPGA0 Rev. 0X0011 (Final number/character)
FPGA1 Rev. 0X0016 (Final number/character)
FPGA2 Rev. 0X000B (Final number/character)
Panel Rev.17
GIM Ver.4.40 and more
GIM Remote Ver.4.40 and more
CCU Ver.0001.0002
FPD FPGA set S/W Rev.8.20 and more
Xcat S/W Rev.1.20.522.0 and more
UD150B-40 Console Ver.2.492 and more
UD-CONT Ver.2.492 and more
ZS-100l Main Ver.2.90 and more
Console Ver.2.90 and more
CLC R50 Ver.3.30 and more
GRID Ver.2.00 and more

M517-E383T 1
Some components and component layout in DAR-8000 cabinet depend on
the shipment time, although this manual is based on the cabinet of early
DAR-8000 model. The differences between cabinets are described in
Appendix H “H/W Difference”, and all section related to the differences
has “NOTE” that informs user of it. Please perform connections and
settings applied for your DAR-8000 cabinet by referring Appendix H “H/W
Difference”.

Some parts in the installation procedure depends on the system


specifications of SONIALVISION safireII/safire17.
How to identify a system is described below.

DAR-8000f has two types of FPD. Depending on the description of these


FPDs, "Original type FPD" or "S-type FPD" is indicated as required.

DAR-8000f uses either of two types of UPS below:


(1) POWER SUPPLY, SUA2200JB (P/N:074-81311-10) (made by APC)
(2) POWER SUPPLY, BN220S (P/N:074-81330- 01) (made by OMRON)
The installation of the UPS of (2) is illustrated only for the FPD that has
been shipped before the release of the UPS of (2) since this book is
designed for installation of the new device.

System Identifier How to identify


The “SURE STATUS (NoneSURE)”
Standard System “NoneSURE” label is put on the side face of the
DAR-8000 cabinet.
The “SURE STATUS (NORMAL)” label
Normal SURE System “SURE(Std) “ is put on the side face of the DAR-8000
cabinet.
The “SURE STATUS (Bariatric)” label is
Bariatric System “BA” put on the side face of the DAR-8000
cabinet.
NOTE: The part without the identifier is installation procedures common to all the systems.

2 M517-E383T
1.1 Tools required for installation

Prepare following tools for installation.

Screwdriver (big / small)


Allen Wrench (2.0mm / 2.5mm / 3.0mm)
Cloth
Cutter knife

When getting ready for installation, please work by following section 1 to section 14.

M517-E383T 3
1.2 Related Documents

Related documents are described below.

M517-E451 Side Station Installation Manual


M501-E356 UD150B-40/L-40 Installation Manual
M517-E397 UD-DAR8000 Connection Kit Installation Manual
M517-E429 DAR-8000 Remote Maintenance Installation Manual
M517-E421 Monitor Cart Installation Manual
M506-E327 REMOTE-CONTROLLED DIAGNOSTIC TABLE ZS-100I / ZS-100IR
INSTALLATION MANUAL
M517-2167 FPD COOLING ASSY WPC-10 Installation Manual
M517-E060 DAR-8000f Operation Manual
M517-E507 Slot Radiography Option Installation Manual
M517-E505 DAR-8000f Update Release Notice
M501-E384 XTV INTERPHONE Installation Manual
M517-E435 DAR8000f Image Quality Adjustment Manual

4 M517-E383T
1.3 Installation Requirements

 Power Requirements

These are the conditions.

Unit Name Electric Power Voltage Frequency Current for


Capacity /Power
24 hours
[For Original type FPD] 3 kVA 200 / 220 / 230 / 50 / 60Hz Required
240V±10%
[For S-type FPD for China] / Single phase
current
Power Supply Unit RACK2
(PSU Rack 2)
[For S-type FPD]
Power Supply Unit RACK 4
(PSU RACK 4)
DAR-8000 Power 1.8 kVA 200 / 220 / 230 / 50 / 60Hz No-required
240V±10%
Transformer / Single phase
current

For convenience, the following abbreviated names are used in this


manual
Long Name Abbreviated Name
Power Supply Unit PSU
Panel Control Unit PCU
Flat Panel Detector FPD

Please prepare a single power supply for DAR-8000f, and it should


be a different power supply from X-ray high-voltage generator and
X-ray diagnostic table.

M517-E383T 5
 Requirements

These are the conditions.

In-room Control Room


Temperature 20°C to 27°C (68 °F to 80.6 °F) 10°C to 30°C (50 °F to 86 °F)
Relative Humidity 10% to 75% (no condensation) 20% to 70% (no condensation)

If the device is not installed or used under the environmental condition


above, FPD will be damaged.

Examination room must be equipped with exclusive air conditioner to


satisfy the environmental requirements.

 Calorific Value

These are the conditions.

Calorific Value : 1548 kcal / h (DAR-8000 control cabinet body)


: 112 kcal / h (per a single monitor)

6 M517-E383T
1.4 Storage / Transport Requirements

 Environmental Requirements

These are the conditions for storage and transport.

Flat Panel Sensor Unit Except Flat Panel Sensor Unit


Temperature 15 °C to 30 °C -10 °C to 60 °C
(59°F to 86°F) (14°F to 140°F)
Relative Humidity 15% to 75% 10% to 95%
(no condensation) (no condensation)

Condensation inside units can cause rust and corrosion. Pay rigid
attention to prevent condensation when units are stored in a place with
drastic differences in temperature and humidity such as a warehouse.
Frozen condensation may damage the internal circuits. Do not store or
transport units below the specified temperature in the table above.

M517-E383T 7
This page is intentionally left blank.

8 M517-E383T
2 Carrying
2.1 DAR-8000f Components

2.1.1 Original Type FPD


DAR-8000f (ZS-100I)

(a) DAR-8000 Control Cabinet (DAR-8000f main unit)


(b) 17-inch CRT Monitor (for the control room)
(c) PC Switch
(d) Keyboard
(e) Mouse
(f) DAR-8000 Power Transformer
(g) USB Memory
(h) PSU RACK 2
 PSU Transformer
 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
 Power Supply Control Board (PS CTRL Board)
 DC Main
(i) Sub Cabinet
 High Voltage Main Power Supply
 DC Sense Box
 FPD Cooling Unit
(j) 17inch FPD
(k) PCU
(l) Accessory *1)
(m) Cables *2)

(*1) Refer to Table 2-1 about the accessory.


(*2) Refer to Table 4-1 to Table 4-3 about the cables.

M517-E383T 9
2.1.2 S-type FPD (for All Countries Except China)
DAR-8000f (ZS-100I)

(a) DAR-8000 Control Cabinet (DAR-8000f main unit)


(b) 17-inch CRT Monitor (for the control room)
(c) PC Switch
(d) Keyboard
(e) Mouse
(f) DAR-8000 Power Transformer
(g) USB Memory
(h) PSU RACK 4
 PSU Transformer
 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
(i) Sub Cabinet
 High Voltage Main Power Supply
 Power Supply Control Board (PS CTRL Board)
 DC Main
(j) 17inchA FPD
(k) PCU
(l) FPD Cooling Unit, Box
(m) Accessory *1)
(n) Cables *2)

(*1) Refer to Table 2-1 about the accessory.


(*2) Refer to Table 4-4 to Table 4-6, about the cables.

10 M517-E383T
2.1.3 S-type FPD (for China)
DAR-8000f (ZS-100I)

a) DAR-8000 Control Cabinet (DAR-8000f main unit)


b) 17-inch CRT Monitor (for the control room)
c) PC Switch
d) Keyboard
e) Mouse
f) DAR-8000 Power Transformer
g) USB Memory
h) PSU RACK 2
 PSU Transformer
 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
 Power Supply Control Board (PS CTRL Board)
 DC Main
i) Sub Cabinet
 High Voltage Main Power Supply
 DC CONV Box
 FPD Cooling Unit
j) 17inch A FPD
k) PCU
l) Accessory *1)
m) Cables *2)

(*1) Refer to Table 2-1 about the accessory.


(*2) Refer to Table 4-7 to Table 4-9 about the cables.

After unpacking, make sure that the components contained in the


package are equivalent to those shown in the package list in the
disassembly standard document attached.
If discrepancy is detected, some components may be lacked or
excessive. Contact the product division through Shimadzu service
representative.

M517-E383T 11
P/N Name Quantity
503-65833 Plate 2
510-22000-03 ANCHOR NUT, HKD M10 2
022-60276 EYEBOLT, M16 ZN (Y) 2
037-70083-01 NAMEPLATE, EMBLEM & LOGO AN40 1~4(*1)
Table 2-1 Accessory

(*1) The number depends on the number of option monitor.

12 M517-E383T
2.2 Dimension and Weight of Unit

The dimension and weight of each unit is shown in Table below.

2.2.1 Original type FPD


Unit Name Outside Dimension Weight (kg) Remarks
(mm) [WxDxH]
DAR-8000 Control Cabinet 225 x 516 x 653 mm About 36 kg 1548kcal / h
Monitor
QB1791 420 x 410 x 460 mm About 25 kg 112kcal / h
SMM1792L 324 x 456 x 448 mm About 25 kg 130kcal / h
SMD18101 SCS 404 x 95 x 332 mm About 7 kg 47kcal / h
Without stand
SMD19102 CS 423 x 95 x 349 mm 6.5kg
(w/o Stand) (Display)
3.0kg
(Stand)
G11-S 399 x 203 x 504 mm About 8 kg
SMD19102SC(A)+STD 423 x 245 x 530 mm About 9.5 kg
RX150 SC+STD 423 x 256 x 530 mm About 8.1 kg
DAR-8000 Power 300 x 430 x 380 mm About 70 kg
Transformer
PSU RACK 2 1200 x 400 x 1750 mm About 240 kg
Sub Cabinet 600 x 340 x 1250 mm
17inch FPD 550 x 550x 80 mm About 35 kg
PCU 200 x 500x 435 mm About 15 kg
Table 2-2-1 Dimension and Weight of Unit

M517-E383T 13
2.2.2 S-type FPD (for All Countries Except China)
Unit Name Outside Dimension Weight (kg) Remarks
(mm) [WxDxH]
DAR-8000 Control Cabinet 225 x 516 x 653 mm About 36 kg 1548kcal / h
Monitor
QB1791 420 x 410 x 460 mm About 25 kg 112kcal / h
SMM1792L 324 x 456 x 448 mm About 25 kg 130kcal / h
SMD18101 SCS 404 x 95 x 332 mm About 7 kg 47kcal / h
Without stand
SMD19102 CS 423 x 95 x 349 mm 6.5kg
(w/o Stand) (Display)
3.0kg
(Stand)
G11-S 399 x 203 x 504 mm About 8 kg
SMD19102SC(A)+STD 423 x 245 x 530 mm About 9.5 kg
RX150 SC+STD 423 x 256 x 530 mm About 8.1 kg
DAR-8000 Power 300 x 430 x 380 mm About 70 kg
Transformer
PSU RACK 4 1200 x 400 x 1750 mm About 190 kg
FPD Sub Cabinet 600 x 340 x 1100 mm About 80 kg
17inchA FPD 550 x 550x 80 mm About 35 kg
PCU 200 x 500x 435 mm About 15 kg
FPD Cooling Unit, Box 520 x 310x 340 mm About 27.5 kg
Table 2-2-2 Dimension and Weight of Unit

14 M517-E383T
2.2.3 S-type FPD (for China)
Unit Name Outside Dimension Weight (kg) Remarks
(mm) [WxDxH]
DAR-8000 Control Cabinet 225 x 516 x 653 mm About 36 kg 1548kcal / h
Monitor
QB1791 420 x 410 x 460 mm About 25 kg 112kcal / h
SMM1792L 324 x 456 x 448 mm About 25 kg 130kcal / h
SMD18101 SCS 404 x 95 x 332 mm About 7 kg 47kcal / h
Without stand
SMD19102 CS 423 x 95 x 349 mm 6.5kg
(w/o Stand) (Display)
3.0kg
(Stand)
G11-S 399 x 203 x 504 mm About 8 kg
SMD19102SC(A)+STD 423 x 245 x 530 mm About 9.5 kg
RX150 SC+STD 423 x 256 x 530 mm About 8.1 kg
DAR-8000 Power 300 x 430 x 380 mm About 70 kg
Transformer
PSU RACK 2 1200 x 400 x 1750 mm About 240 kg
Sub Cabinet 600 x 340 x 1250 mm
17inch A FPD 550 x 550x 80 mm About 35 kg
PCU 200 x 500x 435 mm About 15 kg
Table 2-2-3 Dimension and Weight of Unit

M517-E383T 15
2.3 Carrying

The sample of installation is shown in Figure 3-1 to Figure 3-3, and Figure 3-7. DAR-8000
control cabinet has a caster so that it is carried in easily.

Please handle each unit with care and follow cautions below.

(1) Pressing the front panel of FPD may damage TFT. Do not press the
surface. When carrying the FPD, hold the side of the FPD.
(2) Unpack the FPD at the temperature between 20° C ~30°C
(68°F~86°F). Leave it as it is for 30 minutes before setting.
(3) Avoid impact during carrying and installation. It may damage FPD.

16 M517-E383T
3 Installation
The DAR-8000 control cabinet is fixed by the stopper attached in caster on the front side of
the lower of the control cabinet.

Side Station
Monitor

Side Station

Main Monitor

Keyboard
Mouse

Mouse
Keyboard

PC Selector

DAR-8000 PCU
Control Cabinet
Figure 3-1 Sample of Installation (Type1)

M517-E383T 17
Main Monitor

Reference
Monitor

Mouse

Keyboard
PC Selector

DAR-8000 PCU
Control Cabinet
Side Station
Figure 3-2 Sample of Installation (Type2)

18 M517-E383T
Side Station
Monitor

Side Station

Main Monitor
Reference
Monitor

Keyboard Mouse

Mouse
Keyboard

PC Selector

DAR-8000 PCU
Control Cabinet

Figure 3-3 Sample of Installation (Type3)

CAUTION
Please do not place DAR-8000 Power Transformer under X-ray operation
console. It may affect acquired image in monitor.
To decide specific installation location, please contact customer
representative with consideration of local environment.

M517-E383T 19
3.1 System Configuration

There are three type of system configuration.

<Examination Room> <Control Room>

Main Monitor Side Station


Main Monitor
*Option Monitor

Print Server PC
Selector
Power/TX Link/Rx LPT1 LPT2 COM

Side Station
(*1)

DAR-8000 PCU

Keyboard Keyboard
Mouse Mouse

Figure 3-4 Type 1

<Examination Room> <Control Room>


Main Reference
Main Reference
Monitor Monitor
Monitor Monitor
*Option *Option

PC
Print Server
Selector
Power/TX Link/Rx LPT1 LPT2 COM

Keyboard
Mouse

DAR-8000 Side Station


PCU
(*1)

Figure 3-5 Type 2


(*1)
For the connection of Side Station in the control room, refer to M517-E451 "Side Station
Installation Manual".

20 M517-E383T
<Examination Room> <Contorol Room>
Main Reference
Main Reference Side Station
Monitor Monitor
Monitor Monitor Monitor
*Option *Option

Print Server PC
Selector
Power/TX Link/Rx LPT1 LPT2 COM

Side Station
DAR-8000 PCU
(*1)

Keyboard
Mouse Keyboard
Mouse

Figure 3-6 Type 3

(*1)
For the connection of Side Station in the control room, refer to M517-E451 "Side Station
Installation Manual".

M517-E383T 21
3.2 Install each cabinet

Install each cabinet by referring Figure 3-7 and Figure 3-8.

To decrease interference of noise, wire the cables to FPD well away from
the cables to X-ray diagnostic table. Install PSU RACK 2/4 on the right side
of X-ray High Voltage Generator Control Cabinet (when viewing them from
the X-ray diagnostic table).

Space for Cables 150mm

X-ray High PSU RACK 2 (*1) ZS-100I FPD Cooling Sub Cabinet (*1)
Voltage Generator or Unit, Box (*2) or
Control Cabinet PSU RACK 4 (*2) FPD Sub Cabinet (*2)
Cables to X-ray diagnostic table
Cables to FPD

X-ray diagnostic table

(*1) For Original type FPD and S-Type FPD (for China)
(*2) S-type FPD (for All Countries Except China)

Figure 3-7 Sample of Cabinet layout (for ZS-100I)

22 M517-E383T
To prevent over-turning, fix the PSU RACK 2/4 to the wall using a pair of wall mounting plate
(accessory, 503-65833).

Anchor Nut, M10 (2 parts)


2-M10
2 - diameter 12 hole
1090 Eyebolt
(2 parts)
Wall Mounting Plate
(2 parts)
(Fix the cabinet to the wall) Wall

1830
PSU
RACK2/4

Figure 3-8 Fixing Cabinet

M517-E383T 23
This page is intentionally left blank.

24 M517-E383T
4 Wiring
4.1 General Precautions at Wiring

1) Check that breaker or power switch of each unit and distribution


board are all OFF, and then connect the power cable (usually at
the end).
2) Keep the tip and terminal area of HV Main PS connector clean.
Dirt may result in impact by high voltage, leading t o damage.
3) Keep the tip and terminal area of optical cable clean. Dirt may
affect acquisition image.
4) Please make sure that each cable is correctly connected to
connector.
5) Please connect the shielded cable to the earth on either side of
connection area.
6) Wire neatly, and please do not small roll up cable which length is
left. When small rolling, cable would become coil and might cause
errors.

M517-E383T 25
4.2 Connecting Cable

Wiring overall view of each type is shown as follows. Necessary cable is shown in Table
4-1 to Table 4-9, and cable numbers shown in these tables are used in sentence and
figure from next section.

Check figures and tables correspond to each type.

・Original type FPD Type1 : Fig.4-1, Table 4-1 (section 4.2.1)


・Original type FPD Type2 : Fig.4-2, Table 4-2 (section 4.2.1)
・Original type FPD Type3 : Fig.4-3, Table 4-3 (section 4.2.1)

・S-type FPD (for All Countries Except China) Type1 : Fig.4-4, Table 4-4
(section 4.2.2)
・S-type FPD (for All Countries Except China) Type2 : Fig.4-5, Table 4-5
(section 4.2.2)
・S-type FPD (for All Countries Except China) Type3 : Fig.4-6, Table 4-6
(section 4.2.2)

・S-type FPD (for China) Type1 : Fig.4-7, Table 4-7 (section 4.2.3)
・S-type FPD (for China) Type2 : Fig.4-8, Table 4-8 (section 4.2.3)
・S-type FPD (for China) Type3 : Fig.4-9, Table 4-9 (section 4.2.3)

Please connect wires sequentially according to "4.1 General Precautions at Wiring" and
explanation from next section. The wiring within unit is not described here because it is
already wired at installation.
Please work out the optional installation and wiring by referring to each installation manual.

In Figure 4-1 to 4-9, some cable numbers indicate more than one
cable. In Table 4-1 to 4-9, each cable of them is indicated by the
number adding alphabet after number. For example, the cable (27) in
Figure 4-1 has three cables, which are respectively indicated by (27-a),
(27-b) and (27-c) in Table 4-1.

26 M517-E383T
4.2.1 Original Type FPD

Figure 4-1 Wiring Overall View between Each Unit

M517-E383T 27
(Original type FPD Type 1)
・ (*1)
Option
・ (*2)
Refer to "M501-E356 UD150B-40/L-40 Installation Manual" and
"M517-E397 UD-DAR8000 Connection Kit Installation Manual" about
installation for X-ray high-voltage generator control cabinet.
・ (*3)
Refer to "M517-E429 DAR-8000 Remote Maintenance Installation
Manual" about installation for Remote Maintenance PC.
・ (*4)
Refer to "M517-E451 Side Station Manual" about installation for Side
Station.
・ (*5)
This is not included in DAR-8000f component.

28 M517-E383T
Cable No. P/N Name Quantity Length
(*3)

(1) 502-25082-10 AC CABLE2 CCC 1 10M


(2) 541-28173-07 GROUNDING CABLE 1 10M
(3) 502-24413-05 CABLE, Power Cont PC 1 5M
(502-24413-20) (20)(*1)
(4) 502-24415-55 CABLE, AC DAR-TR 1 5M
(502-24415-60) (20)(*1)
(5) 502-24416-01 EARTH CABLE 1 5M
(502-24416-03) (20)(*1)
(6) 015-17607-25 CORD,SJT3X#14_105_BK/ (1) 10M
WH/GNYE
(Accessory of Monitor Cart)
(7) 502-24426-02 EARTH CABLE,#10 (1) 10M
(Accessory of Monitor Cart)
(8) 071-60815-04 CORD SET,KP300C+ (1) 2M
KS16F 2SQ2.5MT
(9) 088-50528-01 CABLE ASSY, (1) 20M
(*4) 5BNC/HD15P-20
or
070-03621-02 or
CABLE,AS31-09010009
(10) 071-60815-04 CORD SET,KP300C+ 0 2M
KS16F 2SQ2.5MT
(11) 088-50528-01 CABLE ASSY, 0 20M
(*4) 5BNC/HD15P-20
or
070-03621-02 or
CABLE,AS31-09010009
(12) 088-50905-12 CABLE,KB-D315K 1 2M
or or
071-60826-01 CORD SET,KP-1601AH
+KS-31A 2.4M
(13) 088-50905-03 CABLE, KB-5BNC2K 1 2M
(*5)

(14) 088-50905-12 CABLE,KB- D315K 0 2M


or or
071-60826-01 CORD SET,KP-1601AH
+KS-31A 2.4M
(15) 088-50905-03 CABLE, KB-5BNC2K 0 2M

(16) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.8M


(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(17) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.2M
(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(18) 088-50925-02 KEYBOARD, 1 1.2M
ACK-595E-ROHS
088-50650-01 KEYBOARD, PD-KB200W/P 1 1.2M
(19) 511-78239-xx(*2) USB MOUSE WITH PS/2 1 1.2M
ADAPTER (Accessory of
DAR-8000 Cabinet)
(20) 088-50905-10 CABLE,KB-CHD1507K 0 0.75M
(21) 088-81104-15 CABLE,LD-CT/BU10 1 10M
(22) 511-78239-04 USB MEMORY WITH USB 1 1.5M
EXTENSION CABLE
(Accessory of DAR-8000
Cabinet)
Table 4-1 Cable (Original type FPD Type1) 1/2

M517-E383T 29
Cable No. P/N Name Quantity Length
(*3)

(23) 502-25082-10 AC CABLE2 CCC 1 10M


(24) 541-28173-07 GROUNDING CABLE 1 10M
(25) 511-71015 FIBER CABLE 1 40M
(26) 532-24696 HOSE ASSY,WPC-10 1 15M
(27-a) 511-71026-11 DC SENSE CABLE, 17 2 10M
(D-sub 15 pin)
(27-b) 511-71026-12 DC SENSE CABLE,17 1 10M
(Mini D-sub 15 pin)
(27-c) 511-71026-13 DC SENSE CABLE, 17 1 10M
(D-sub 25 pin)
(28) 101-28852 HV CABLE 1 10M
(29-a) 511-71025-12 DC MAIN CABLE,17 1 23M
(Crimp contact)
(29-b) 511-71025-11 DC MAIN CABLE,17 1 23M
(D-sub 37pin)
(30-a) 511-74139-02 HV PS CONTROL CABLE 1 33M
(30-b) 511-74139-03 HV PS AC CABLE 1 35M
(31-a) 532-24700-01 COOLER AC CABLE 1 11M
(31-b) 532-24701-01 EARTH CABLE,11MT 1 11M
(32) 101-28599 PS CTRL DC CABLE 1 -
(33-a) 511-74150-01 AC POWER CABLE 1 3M
(Accessory of DC MAIN PS,
17)
(33-b) 101-28928 PS CTRL AC CABLE 1 -
(33-c) 503-62055 30A CONSENT ASSY 1 -
(34-a) 511-15134 CODESET,KP300CLS16FS 1 20M
(34-c) 511-15197-15 CABLE, CA-9S MA15 1 15M
(34-d) 511-15196-15 CABLE A, 09-2A-15M-2D 1 15M
(34-e) 074-81311-15(*6) SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW1SJ 1 1.8M
(35) 502-24312 COM CABLE 1 2M
(36) 511-15030-11 CCD EXTERNAL CABLE 1 2M
(37) 502-22215-20 IBS CABLE 1 20M
(38) 502-24701-02 SGIMFS CONTROL CABLE 1 2M
(39) 502-24127-20 GRID CONT CABLE 1 20M
(40) 502-24346 Cooler Warning Cable 1 30M
(41) 502-25063 INJECTOR CABLE 1 20M
Table 4-1 Cable (Original type FPD Type1) 2/2

(*1)
For "TRANS CABLE OPTION (502-24428)"
(*2)
"-xx" stands one more cable numbers.
(*3)
"()" means option parts.
(*4)
Use this when the LCD monitor is the 18 inches LCD monitor, G11S (511-78264-01),
19 inches LCD monitor, SMD19102 SC(A)/SC(A)+STD(511-46486-11/-13), or 19inches
LCD monitor, RX150 SC+STD(572-46055-11/-13), use the cable attached to the monitor.
(*5)
When the LCD monitor is the 18 inches LCD monitor, G11S (511-78264-01), 19 inches
LCD monitor, SMD19102 SC(A)/SC(A)+STD(511-46486-11/-13), or 19inches LCD monitor,
RX150 SC+STD(572-46055-11/-13), use the cable attached to the monitor.
(*6)
The exclusive cable is included (software is not used.)

30 M517-E383T
Figure 4-2 Wiring Overall View between Each Unit
(Original type FPD Type 2)

M517-E383T 31
・ (*1)
Option
・ (*2)
Refer to "M501-E356 UD150B-40/L-40 Installation Manual" and
"M517-E397 UD-DAR8000 Connection Kit Installation Manual" about
installation for X-ray high-voltage generator control cabinet.
・ (*3)
Refer to "M517-E429 DAR-8000 Remote Maintenance Installation
Manual" about installation for Remote Maintenance PC.
・ (*4)
Refer to "M517-E451 Side Station Manual" about installation for Side
Station.
・ (*5)
This is not included in DAR-8000f component.

32 M517-E383T
Cable No. P/N Name Quantity Length
(*3)

(1) 502-25082-10 AC CABLE2 CCC 1 10M


(2) 541-28173-07 GROUNDING CABLE 1 10M
(3) 502-24413-05 CABLE, Power Cont PC 1 5M
(502-24413-20) (20)(*1)
(4) 502-24415-55 CABLE, AC DAR-TR 1 5M
(502-24415-60) (20)(*1)
(5) 502-24416-01 EARTH CABLE 1 5M
(502-24416-03) (20)(*1)
(6) 015-17607-25 CORD,SJT3X#14_105_BK/ (1) 10M
WH/GNYE
(Accessory of Monitor Cart)
(7) 502-24426-02 EARTH CABLE,#10 (1) 10M
(Accessory of Monitor Cart)
(8) 071-60815-04 CORD SET,KP300C+ (1) 2M
KS16F 2SQ2.5MT
(9) 088-50528-01 CABLE ASSY,5BNC / (1) 20M
(*4) or HD15P-20
070-03621-02 or
CABLE,AS31-09010009
(10) 071-60815-04 CORD SET,KP300C+ (1) 2M
KS16F 2SQ2.5MT
(11) 088-50528-01 CABLE ASSY,5BNC / (1) 20M
(*4) or HD15P-20
070-03621-02 or
CABLE,AS31-09010009
(12) 088-50905-12 ABLE,KB-D315K 1 2M
or or
071-60826-01 CORD SET, KP-1601AH
+KS-31A 2.4M
(13) 088-50905-03 CABLE, KB-5BNC2K 1 2M
(*5)

(14) 088-50905-12 CABLE,KB- D315K or 1 2M


or CORD SET,KP-1601AH
071-60826-01 +KS-31A 2.4M
(15) 088-50905-03 CABLE,KB-5BNC2K 1 2M
(*5)

(16) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.8M


(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(17) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.2M
(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(18) 088-50925-02 KEYBOARD, 1 1.2M
ACK-595E-ROHS
088-50650-01 KEYBOARD, PD-KB200W/P 1 1.2M
(19) 511-78239-xx(*2) USB MOUSE WITH PS/2 1 1.2M
ADAPTER (Accessory of
DAR-8000 Cabinet)
(20) 088-50905-10 CABLE,KB-CHD1507K 1 0.75M
(21) 088-81104-15 CABLE,LD-CT/BU10 1 10M
(22) 511-78239-04 USB MEMORY WITH USB 1 1.5M
EXTENSION CABLE
(Accessory of DAR-8000
Cabinet)
Table 4-2 Cable (Original type FPD Type2) 1/2

M517-E383T 33
Cable No. P/N Name Quantity Length
(*3)

(23) 502-25082-10 AC CABLE2 CCC 1 10M


(24) 541-28173-07 GROUNDING CABLE 1 10M
(25) 511-71015 FIBER CABLE 1 40M
(26) 532-24696 HOSE ASSY,WPC-10 1 15M
(27-a) 511-71026-11 DC SENSE CABLE, 17 2 10M
(D-sub 15 pin)
(27-b) 511-71026-12 DC SENSE CABLE,17 1 10M
(Mini D-sub 15 pin)
(27-c) 511-71026-13 DC SENSE CABLE, 17 1 10M
(D-sub 25 pin)
(28) 101-28852 HV CABLE 1 10M
(29-a) 511-71025-12 DC MAIN CABLE,17 1 23M
(Crimp contact)
(29-b) 511-71025-11 DC MAIN CABLE,17 1 23M
(D-sub 37pin)
(30-a) 511-74139-02 HV PS CONTROL CABLE 1 33M
(30-b) 511-74139-03 HV PS AC CABLE 1 35M
(31-a) 532-24700-01 COOLER AC CABLE 1 11M
(31-b) 532-24701-01 EARTH CABLE,11MT 1 11M
(32) 101-28599 PS CTRL DC CABLE 1 -
(33-a) 511-74150-01 AC POWER CABLE 1 3M
(Accessory of DC MAIN PS,
17)
(33-b) 101-28928 PS CTRL AC CABLE 1 -
(33-c) 503-62055 30A CONSENT ASSY 1 -
(34-a) 511-15134 CODESET,KP300CLS16FS 1 20M
(34-c) 511-15197-15 CABLE, CA-9S MA15 1 15M
(34-d) 511-15196-15 CABLE A, 09-2A-15M-2D 1 15M
(34-e) 074-81311-15(*6) SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW1SJ 1 1.8M
(35) 502-24312 COM CABLE 1 2M
(36) 511-15030-11 CCD EXTERNAL CABLE 1 2M
(37) 502-22215-20 IBS CABLE 1 20M
(38) 502-24701-02 SGIMFS CONTROL CABLE 1 2M
(39) 502-24127-20 GRID CONT CABLE 1 20M
(40) 502-24346 Cooler Warning Cable 1 30M
(41) 502-25063 INJECTOR CABLE 1 20M
(42) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.8M
(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
Table 4-2 Cable (Original type FPD Type2) 2/2

(*1)
For "TRANS CABLE OPTION (502-24428)"
(*2)
"-xx" stands one more cable numbers.
(*3)
"()" means option parts
(*4)
Use this when the LCD monitor is the 18 inches LCD monitor, G11S (511-78264-01),
19 inches LCD monitor, SMD19102 SC(A)/SC(A)+STD(511-46486-11/-13), or 19inches
LCD monitor, RX150 SC+STD(572-46055-11/-13), use the cable attached to the monitor.
(*5)
When the LCD monitor is the 18 inches LCD monitor, G11S (511-78264-01), 19
inches LCD monitor, SMD19102 SC(A)/SC(A)+STD(511-46486-11/-13), or 19inches LCD
monitor, RX150 SC+STD(572-46055-11/-13), use the cable attached to the monitor.
(*6)
The exclusive cable is included (Software is not used).

34 M517-E383T
Figure 4-3 Wiring Overall View between Each Unit
(Original type FPD Type 3)

M517-E383T 35
・ (*1)
Option
・ (*2)
Refer to "M501-E356 UD150B-40/L-40 Installation Manual" and
"M517-E397 UD-DAR8000 Connection Kit Installation Manual" about
installation for X-ray high-voltage generator control cabinet.
・ (*3)
Refer to "M517-E429 DAR-8000 Remote Maintenance Installation
Manual" about installation for Remote Maintenance PC.
・ (*4)
Refer to "M517-E451 Side Station Manual" about installation for Side
Station.
・ (*5)
This is not included in DAR-8000f component.

36 M517-E383T
Cable No. P/N Name Quantity Length
(*3)

(1) 502-25082-10 AC CABLE2 CCC 1 10M


(2) 541-28173-07 GROUNDING CABLE 1 10M
(3) 502-24413-05 CABLE, Power Cont PC 1 5M
(502-24413-20) (20)(*1)
(4) 502-24415-55 CABLE, AC DAR-TR 1 5M
(502-24415-60) (20)(*1)
(5) 502-24416-01 EARTH CABLE 1 5M
(502-24416-03) (20)(*1)
(6) 015-17607-25 CORD,SJT3X#14_105_BK/ (1) 10M
WH/GNYE
(Accessory of Monitor Cart)
(7) 502-24426-02 EARTH CABLE,#10 (1) 10M
(Accessory of Monitor Cart)
(8) 071-60815-04 CORD SET,KP300C+ (1) 2M
KS16F 2SQ2.5MT
(9) 088-50528-01 CABLE ASSY,5BNC / (1) 20M
(*4) or HD15P-20
070-03621-02 or
CABLE,AS31-09010009
(10) 071-60815-04 CORD SET,KP300C+ (1) 2M
KS16F 2SQ2.5MT
(11) 088-50528-01 CABLE ASSY,5BNC / (1) 20M
(*4) or HD15P-20
070-03621-02 or
CABLE,AS31-09010009
(12) 088-50905-12 CABLE,KB-D315K 1 2M
or or
071-60826-01 CORD SET,KP-1601AH
+KS-31A 2.4M
(13) 088-50905-03 CABLE,KB-5BNC2K 1 2M
(*5)

(14) 088-50905-12 CABLE,KB-D315K 1 2M


or or
071-60826-01 CORD SET,KP-1601AH
+KS-31A 2.4M
(15) 088-50905-03 CABLE,KB-5BNC2K 1 2M
(*5)

(16) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.8M


(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(17) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.2M
(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(18) 088-50925-02 KEYBOARD, 1 1.2M
ACK-595E-ROHS
088-50650-01 KEYBOARD, PD-KB200W/P 1 1.2M
(19) 511-78239-xx(*2) USB MOUSE WITH PS/2 1 1.2M
ADAPTER (Accessory of
DAR-8000 Cabinet)
(20) 088-50905-10 CABLE,KB-CHD1507K 1 0.75M
(21) 088-81104-15 CABLE,LD-CT/BU10 1 10M
(22) 511-78239-04 USB MEMORY WITH USB 1 1.5M
EXTENSION CABLE
(Accessory of DAR-8000
Cabinet)
Table 4-3 Cable (Original type FPD Type3) 1/2

M517-E383T 37
Cable No. P/N Name Quantity Length
(*3)

(23) 502-25082-10 AC CABLE2 CCC 1 10M


(24) 541-28173-07 GROUNDING CABLE 1 10M
(25) 511-71015 FIBER CABLE 1 40M
(26) 532-24696 HOSE ASSY,WPC-10 1 15M
(27-a) 511-71026-11 DC SENSE CABLE, 17 2 10M
(D-sub 15 pin)
(27-b) 511-71026-12 DC SENSE CABLE,17 1 10M
(Mini D-sub 15 pin)
(27-c) 511-71026-13 DC SENSE CABLE, 17 1 10M
(D-sub 25 pin)
(28) 101-28852 HV CABLE 1 10M
(29-a) 511-71025-12 DC MAIN CABLE,17 1 23M
(Crimp contact)
(29-b) 511-71025-11 DC MAIN CABLE,17 1 23M
(D-sub 37pin)
(30-a) 511-74139-02 HV PS CONTROL CABLE 1 33M
(30-b) 511-74139-03 HV PS AC CABLE 1 35M
(31-a) 532-24700-01 COOLER AC CABLE 1 11M
(31-b) 532-24701-01 EARTH CABLE,11MT 1 11M
(32) 101-28599 PS CTRL DC CABLE 1 -
(33-a) 511-74150-01 AC POWER CABLE 1 3M
(Accessory of DC MAIN PS,
17)
(33-b) 101-28928 PS CTRL AC CABLE 1 -
(33-c) 503-62055 30A CONSENT ASSY 1 -
(34-a) 511-15134 CODESET,KP300CLS16FS 1 20M
(34-c) 511-15197-15 CABLE, CA-9S MA15 1 15M
(34-d) 511-15196-15 CABLE A, 09-2A-15M-2D 1 15M
(34-e) 074-81311-15(*6) SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW1SJ 1 1.8M
(35) 502-24312 COM CABLE 1 2M
(36) 511-15030-11 CCD EXTERNAL CABLE 1 2M
(37) 502-22215-20 IBS CABLE 1 20M
(38) 502-24701-02 SGIMFS CONTROL CABLE 1 2M
(39) 502-24127-20 GRID CONT CABLE 1 20M
(40) 502-24346 Cooler Warning Cable 1 30M
(41) 502-25063 INJECTOR CABLE 1 20M
Table 4-3 Cable (Original type FPD Type3) 2/2

(*1)
For "TRANS CABLE OPTION (502-24428)"
(*2)
"-xx" stands one more cable numbers.
(*3)
"()" means option parts.
(*4)
Use this when the LCD monitor is the 18 inches LCD monitor, G11S (511-78264-01),
19 inches LCD monitor, SMD19102 SC(A)/SC(A)+STD(511-46486-11/-13), or 19inches
LCD monitor, RX150 SC+STD(572-46055-11/-13), use the cable attached to the monitor.
(*5)
When the LCD monitor is the 18 inches LCD monitor, G11S (511-78264-01), 19
inches LCD monitor, SMD19102 SC(A)/SC(A)+STD(511-46486-11/-13), or 19inches LCD
monitor, RX150 SC+STD(572-46055-11/-13), use the cable attached to the monitor.
(*6)
The exclusive cable is included (Software is not used).

38 M517-E383T
4.2.2 S-type FPD (for All Countries Except China)

Distribution Board Single Phase Distribution Board Single Phase (23)


200/220/230/240V 50/60Hz 200/220/230/240V 50/60Hz
(24)

To LAN Remote
(Connection for Remote
Maintenance PC(*1)(*3)
(1) (2)
Maintenance)

17 inch
DAR-8000 (6) A FPD (47)
Monitor (44)
Power
Cart

(Connection for Remote Maintenance)


To LAN
Transformer
(7) (26) FPD Sub Cabinet
(3) (43) (40) PS CTRL
(8) HV
(4) (5) Cooling
Board Main PS
Unit

DC Power Supply
17”In-Room (46)
Monitor(*1) (45) (49)
(31)
(Main Monitor)
DAR-8000f
PSU RACK 4
(9)

PSU
UPS Transformer
DAR-8000f
Control Cabinet (34)
Injector
(*5)
(21) (35)
To LAN(on site) (37)
(36) DAR-8000f (41)
PCU
(22)
X-ray High (38)
USB Memory DAR-8000f (17) Voltage Generator
(12) (16) PC Switch Control Cabinet(*2)

(13) (39)
VTR(*5)
(18)
X-ray Diagnostic Table
Control Cabinet

(19)
17” Monitor
(Main Monitor)
Distribution Board Three Phase
200/220/230/240V 50/60Hz

Mouse
(*1)(*4)
Side Station

Keyboard X-ray high-voltage


To LAN(on site) To LAN Generator console
(Connection for
Remote Maintenance)
Foot Switch
To LAN (Connection for Remote Maintenance)

Figure 4-4 Wiring Overall View between Each Unit


(S-type FPD for All Countries Except China, Type 1)

M517-E383T 39
・ (*1)
Option. Some part of wiring is changed by the option. Please refer to
“M517-E429 (DAR-8000_RM_Installation_Manual)”
・ (*2)
Refer to "M501-E356 UD150B-40/L-40 Installation Manual" and
"M517-E397 UD-DAR8000 Connection Kit Installation Manual" about
installation for X-ray high-voltage generator control cabinet.
・ (*3)
Refer to "M517-E429 DAR-8000 Remote Maintenance Installation
Manual" about installation for Remote Maintenance PC.
・ (*4)
Refer to "M517-E451 Side Station Manual" about installation for Side
Station.
・ (*5)
This is not included in DAR-8000f component.

40 M517-E383T
Cable No. P/N Name Quantity Length
(*3)

(1) 502-25082-10 AC CABLE2 CCC 1 10M


(2) 541-28173-07 GROUNDING CABLE 1 10M
(3) 502-24413-05 CABLE, Power Cont PC 1 5M
(502-24413-20) (20)(*1)
(4) 502-24415-55 CABLE, AC DAR-TR 1 5M
(502-24415-60) (20)(*1)
(5) 502-24416-01 EARTH CABLE 1 5M
(502-24416-03) (20)(*1)
(6) 015-17607-25 CORD,SJT3X#14_105_BK/ (1) 10M
WH/GNYE
(Accessory of Monitor Cart)
(7) 502-24426-02 EARTH CABLE,#10 (1) 10M
(Accessory of Monitor Cart)
(8) 071-60815-04 CORD SET,KP300C+ (1) 2M
KS16F 2SQ2.5MT
(9) 088-50528-01 CABLE ASSY, (1) 20M
(*4) 5BNC/HD15P-20
or
070-03621-02 or
CABLE,AS31-09010009
(12) 088-50905-12 CABLE,KB-D315K 1 2M
or or
071-60826-01 CORD SET,KP-1601AH
+KS-31A 2.4M
(13) 088-50905-03 CABLE, KB-5BNC2K 1 2M
(*5)

(16) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.8M


(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(17) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.2M
(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(18) 088-50925-02 KEYBOARD, 1 1.2M
ACK-595E-ROHS
088-50650-01 KEYBOARD, PD-KB200W/P 1 1.2M
(19) 511-78239-xx(*2) USB MOUSE WITH PS/2 1 1.2M
ADAPTER (Accessory of
DAR-8000 Cabinet)
(21) 088-81104-15 CABLE,LD-CT/BU10 1 10M
(22) 511-78239-04 USB MEMORY WITH USB 1 1.5M
EXTENSION CABLE
(Accessory of DAR-8000
Cabinet)
(23) 502-25082-10 AC CABLE2 CCC 1 10M
(24) 541-28173-07 GROUNDING CABLE 1 10M
(26) 532-24696 HOSE ASSY, WPC-10 1 15M
(31-a) 532-24700-01 COOLER AC CABLE 1 11M
(31-b) 532-24701-01 EARTH CABLE, 11MT 1 11M
(34-a) 511-15134 CODESET,KP300CLS16FS 1 20M
(34-d) 511-15196-15 CABLE A, 09-2A-15M-2D 1 15M
(*6)

(34-e) 074-81311-15 SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW1SJ 1 1.8M


(*7) (*8) 1 2.2M
074-81330-52 CABLE, BUC26
(35) 502-24312 COM CABLE 1 2M
(36) 511-15030-11 CCD EXTERNAL CABLE 1 2M
(37) 502-22215-20 IBS CABLE 1 20M
Table 4-4 Cable (S-type FPD for All Countries Except China, Type 1) 1/2

M517-E383T 41
Cable No. P/N Name Quantity Length
(*3)

(38) 502-24701-02 SGIMFS CONTROL CABLE 1 2M


(39) 502-24127-20 GRID CONT CABLE 1 20M
(40) 502-24346-01 Cooler Warning Cable 1 10M
(41) 502-25063 INJECTOR CABLE 1 20M
(43) 511-70170-01 FIBER CABLE,FRAD 1 30M
(44) 502-40255 HV CABLE,K-17 1 16M
(45) 502-24426-05 EARTH CABLE, #10 1 15M
(46) 511-15197-15 CABLE A, CA-9S MA15 1 15M
(47) 502-40181-01 DC MAIN CABLE,K-17 1 16M
(48) 502-40111-01 HV PS AC CABLE 1 14M
Table 4-4 Cable (S-type FPD for All Countries Except China, Type 1) 2/2

(*1)
For "TRANS CABLE OPTION (502-24428)"
(*2)
"-xx" stands one more cable numbers.
(*3)
"()" means option parts.
(*4)
Use this when the LCD monitor is the 18 inches LCD monitor, G11S (511-78264-01),
19 inches LCD monitor, SMD19102 SC(A)/SC(A)+STD(511-46486-11/-13), or 19inches
LCD monitor, RX150 SC+STD(572-46055-11/-13), use the cable attached to the monitor.
(*5)
When the LCD monitor is the 18 inches LCD monitor, G11S (511-78264-01), 19 inches
LCD monitor, SMD19102 SC(A)/SC(A)+STD(511-46486-11/-13), or 19inches LCD monitor,
RX150 SC+STD(572-46055-11/-13), use the cable attached to the monitor.
(*6)
Use this when UPS type is SUA2200JB(made by APC) (074-81311-10).
(*7)
The exclusive cable is included (Software is not used).
(*8)
Use this when UPS type is SUA2200JB(made by APC) (074-81311-10).

42 M517-E383T
Figure 4-5 Wiring Overall View between Each Unit
(S-type FPD for All Countries Except China, Type 2)

M517-E383T 43
・ (*1)
Option. Some part of wiring is changed by the option. Please refer to
“M517-E429 (DAR-8000_RM_Installation_Manual).
・ (*2)
Refer to "M501-E356 UD150B-40/L-40 Installation Manual" and
"M517-E397 UD-DAR8000 Connection Kit Installation Manual" about
installation for X-ray high-voltage generator control cabinet.
・ (*3)
Refer to "M517-E429 DAR-8000 Remote Maintenance Installation
Manual" about installation for Remote Maintenance PC.
・ (*4)
Refer to "M517-E451 Side Station Manual" about installation for Side
Station.
・ (*5)
This is not included in DAR-8000f component.

44 M517-E383T
Cable No. P/N Name Quantity Length
(*3)

(1) 502-25082-10 AC CABLE2 CCC 1 10M


(2) 541-28173-07 GROUNDING CABLE 1 10M
(3) 502-24413-05 CABLE, Power Cont PC 1 5M
(502-24413-20) (20)(*1)
(4) 502-24415-55 CABLE, AC DAR-TR 1 5M
(502-24415-60) (20)(*1)
(5) 502-24416-01 EARTH CABLE 1 5M
(502-24416-03) (20)(*1)
(6) 015-17607-25 CORD,SJT3X#14_105_BK/ (1) 10M
WH/GNYE
(Accessory of Monitor Cart)
(7) 502-24426-02 EARTH CABLE,#10 (1) 10M
(Accessory of Monitor Cart)
(8) 071-60815-04 CORD SET,KP300C+ (1) 2M
KS16F 2SQ2.5MT
(9) 088-50528-01 CABLE ASSY,5BNC / (1) 20M
(*4) or HD15P-20
070-03621-02 or
CABLE,AS31-09010009
(10) 071-60815-04 CORD SET,KP300C+ (1) 2M
KS16F 2SQ2.5MT
(11) 088-50528-01 CABLE ASSY,5BNC / (1) 20M
(*4) or HD15P-20
070-03621-02 or
CABLE,AS31-09010009
(12) 088-50905-12 ABLE,KB-D315K 1 2M
or or
071-60826-01 CORD SET, KP-1601AH
+KS-31A 2.4M
(13) 088-50905-03 CABLE, KB-5BNC2K 1 2M
(*5)

(14) 088-50905-12 CABLE,KB- D315K or 1 2M


or CORD SET,KP-1601AH
071-60826-01 +KS-31A 2.4M
(15) 088-50905-03 CABLE,KB-5BNC2K 1 2M
(*5)

(16) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.8M


(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(17) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.2M
(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(18) 088-50925-02 KEYBOARD, 1 1.2M
ACK-595E-ROHS
088-50650-01 KEYBOARD, PD-KB200W/P 1 1.2M
(19) 511-78239-xx(*2) USB MOUSE WITH PS/2 1 1.2M
ADAPTER (Accessory of
DAR-8000 Cabinet)
(21) 088-81104-15 CABLE,LD-CT/BU10 1 10M
(22) 511-78239-04 USB MEMORY WITH USB 1 1.5M
EXTENSION CABLE
(Accessory of DAR-8000
Cabinet)
(23) 502-25082-10 AC CABLE2 CCC 1 10M
Table 4-5 Cable (S-type FPD for All Countries Except China, Type 2) 1/2

M517-E383T 45
Cable No. P/N Name Quantity Length
(*3)

(24) 541-28173-07 GROUNDING CABLE 1 10M


(26) 532-24696 HOSE ASSY, WPC-10 1 15M
(31-a) 532-24700-01 COOLER AC CABLE 1 11M
(31-b) 532-24701-01 EARTH CABLE, 11MT 1 11M
(34-a) 511-15134 CODESET,KP300CLS16FS 1 20M
(34-d) 511-15196-15 CABLE A, 09-2A-15M-2D 1 15M
(*6)

(34-e) 074-81311-15 SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW1SJ 1 1.8M


(*7) (*8) 1 2.2M
074-81330-52 CABLE, BUC26
(35) 502-24312 COM CABLE 1 2M
(36) 511-15030-11 CCD EXTERNAL CABLE 1 2M
(37) 502-22215-20 IBS CABLE 1 20M
(38) 502-24701-02 SGIMFS CONTROL CABLE 1 2M
(39) 502-24127-20 GRID CONT CABLE 1 20M
(40) 502-24346-01 Cooler Warning Cable 1 10M
(41) 502-25063 INJECTOR CABLE 1 20M
(42) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.8M
(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(43) 511-70170-01 FIBER CABLE,FRAD 1 30M
(44) 502-40255 HV CABLE,K-17 1 16M
(45) 502-24426-05 EARTH CABLE, #10 1 15M
(46) 511-15197-15 CABLE A, CA-9S MA15 1 15M
(47) 502-40181-01 DC MAIN CABLE,K-17 1 16M
(48) 502-40111-01 HV PS AC CABLE 1 14M
Table 4-5 Cable (S-type FPD for All Countries Except China, Type 2) 2/2

(*1)
For "TRANS CABLE OPTION (502-24428)"
(*2)
"-xx" stands one more cable numbers.
(*3)
"()" means option parts
(*4)
Use this when the LCD monitor is the 18 inches LCD monitor, G11S (511-78264-01),
19 inches LCD monitor, SMD19102 SC(A)/SC(A)+STD(511-46486-11/-13), or 19inches
LCD monitor, RX150 SC+STD(572-46055-11/-13), use the cable attached to the monitor.
(*5)
When the LCD monitor is the 18 inches LCD monitor, G11S (511-78264-01), 19
inches LCD monitor, SMD19102 SC(A)/SC(A)+STD(511-46486-11/-13), or 19inches LCD
monitor, RX150 SC+STD(572-46055-11/-13), use the cable attached to the monitor.
(*6)
Use this when UPS type is SUA2200JB(made by APC) (074-81311-10).
(*7)
The exclusive cable is included (Software is not used).
(*8)
Use this when UPS type is SUA2200JB(made by APC) (074-81311-10).

46 M517-E383T
Figure 4-6 Wiring Overall View between Each Unit
(S-type FPD for All Countries Except China, Type 3)

M517-E383T 47
・ (*1)
Option. Some part of wiring is changed by the option. Please refer to
“M517-E429 (DAR-8000_RM_Installation_Manual).
・ (*2)
Refer to "M501-E356 UD150B-40/L-40 Installation Manual" and
"M517-E397 UD-DAR8000 Connection Kit Installation Manual" about
installation for X-ray high-voltage generator control cabinet.
・ (*3)
Refer to "M517-E429 DAR-8000 Remote Maintenance Installation
Manual" about installation for Remote Maintenance PC.
・ (*4)
Refer to "M517-E451 Side Station Manual" about installation for Side
Station.
・ (*5)
This is not included in DAR-8000f component.

48 M517-E383T
Cable No. P/N Name Quantity( Length
*3)

(1) 502-25082-10 AC CABLE2 CCC 1 10M


(2) 541-28173-07 GROUNDING CABLE 1 10M
(3) 502-24413-05 CABLE, Power Cont PC 1 5M
(502-24413-20) (20)(*1)
(4) 502-24415-55 CABLE, AC DAR-TR 1 5M
(502-24415-60) (20)(*1)
(5) 502-24416-01 EARTH CABLE 1 5M
(502-24416-03) (20)(*1)
(6) 015-17607-25 CORD,SJT3X#14_105_BK/ (1) 10M
WH/GNYE
(Accessory of Monitor Cart)
(7) 502-24426-02 EARTH CABLE,#10 (1) 10M
(Accessory of Monitor Cart)
(8) 071-60815-04 CORD SET,KP300C+ (1) 2M
KS16F 2SQ2.5MT
(9) 088-50528-01 CABLE ASSY,5BNC / (1) 20M
(*4) or HD15P-20
070-03621-02 or
CABLE,AS31-09010009
(10) 071-60815-04 CORD SET,KP300C+ (1) 2M
KS16F 2SQ2.5MT
(11) 088-50528-01 CABLE ASSY,5BNC / (1) 20M
(*4) or HD15P-20
070-03621-02 or
CABLE,AS31-09010009
(12) 088-50905-12 CABLE,KB-D315K 1 2M
or or
071-60826-01 CORD SET,KP-1601AH
+KS-31A 2.4M
(13) 088-50905-03 CABLE,KB-5BNC2K 1 2M
(*5)

(14) 088-50905-12 CABLE,KB-D315K 1 2M


or or
071-60826-01 CORD SET,KP-1601AH
+KS-31A 2.4M
(15) 088-50905-03 CABLE,KB-5BNC2K 1 2M
(*5)

(16) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.8M


(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(17) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.2M
(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(18) 088-50925-02 KEYBOARD, 1 1.2M
ACK-595E-ROHS
088-50650-01 KEYBOARD, PD-KB200W/P 1 1.2M
(19) 511-78239-xx(*2) USB MOUSE WITH PS/2 1 1.2M
ADAPTER (Accessory of
DAR-8000 Cabinet)
(21) 088-81104-15 CABLE,LD-CT/BU10 1 10M
(22) 511-78239-04 USB MEMORY WITH USB 1 1.5M
EXTENSION CABLE
(Accessory of DAR-8000
Cabinet)
(23) 502-25082-10 AC CABLE2 CCC 1 10M
Table 4-6 Cable (S-type FPD for All Countries Except China, Type 3) 1/2

M517-E383T 49
Cable No. P/N Name Quantity( Length
*3)

(24) 541-28173-07 GROUNDING CABLE 1 10M


(26) 532-24696 HOSE ASSY, WPC-10 1 15M
(31-a) 532-24700-01 COOLER AC CABLE 1 11M
(31-b) 532-24701-01 EARTH CABLE, 11MT 1 11M
(34-a) 511-15134 CODESET,KP300CLS16FS 1 20M
(34-d) 511-15196-15 CABLE A, 09-2A-15M-2D 1 15M
(*6)

(34-e) 074-81311-15 SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW1SJ 1 1.8M


(*7) (*8) 1 2.2M
074-81330-52 CABLE, BUC26
(35) 502-24312 COM CABLE 1 2M
(36) 511-15030-11 CCD EXTERNAL CABLE 1 2M
(37) 502-22215-20 IBS CABLE 1 20M
(38) 502-24701-02 SGIMFS CONTROL CABLE 1 2M
(39) 502-24127-20 GRID CONT CABLE 1 20M
(40) 502-24346-01 Cooler Warning Cable 1 10M
(41) 502-25063 INJECTOR CABLE 1 20M
(43) 511-70170-01 FIBER CABLE,FRAD 1 30M
(44) 502-40255 HV CABLE,K-17 1 16M
(45) 502-24426-05 EARTH CABLE, #10 1 15M
(46) 511-15197-15 CABLE A, CA-9S MA15 1 15M
(47) 502-40181-01 DC MAIN CABLE,K-17 1 16M
(48) 502-40111-01 HV PS AC CABLE 1 14M
Table 4-6 Cable (S-type FPD for All Countries Except China, Type 3) 2/2

(*1)
For "TRANS CABLE OPTION (502-24428)"
(*2)
"-xx" stands one more cable numbers.
(*3)
"()" means option parts.
(*4)
Use this when the LCD monitor is the 18 inches LCD monitor, G11S (511-78264-01),
19 inches LCD monitor, SMD19102 SC(A)/SC(A)+STD(511-46486-11/-13), or 19inches
LCD monitor, RX150 SC+STD(572-46055-11/-13), use the cable attached to the monitor.
(*5)
When the LCD monitor is the 18 inches LCD monitor, G11S (511-78264-01), 19
inches LCD monitor, SMD19102 SC(A)/SC(A)+STD(511-46486-11/-13), or 19inches LCD
monitor, RX150 SC+STD(572-46055-11/-13), use the cable attached to the monitor.
(*6)
Use this when UPS type is SUA2200JB(made by APC) (074-81311-10).
(*7)
The exclusive cable is included (Software is not used).
(*8)
Use this when UPS type is SUA2200JB(made by APC) (074-81311-10).

50 M517-E383T
4.2.3 S-type FPD (for China)

Figure 4-7 Wiring Overall View between Each Unit (S- type FPD for China, Type 1)

M517-E383T 51
・ (*1) Option. Some part of wiring is changed by the option. Please refer to
“M517-E429 (DAR-8000_RM_Installation_Manual).
・ (*2) Refer to "M501-E356 UD150B-40/L-40 Installation Manual" and "M517-E397
UD-DAR8000 Connection Kit Installation Manual" about installation for X-ray
high-voltage generator control cabinet.
・ (*3) Refer to "M517-E429 DAR-8000 Remote Maintenance Installation Manual"
about installation for Remote Maintenance PC.
・ (*4) Refer to "M517-E451 Side Station Manual" about installation for Side Station.
・ (*5) This is not included in DAR-8000f component.

52 M517-E383T
Cable No. P/N Name Quantity Length
(*3)

(1) 502-25082-10 AC CABLE2 CCC 1 10M


(2) 541-28173-07 GROUNDING CABLE 1 10M
(3) 502-24413-05 CABLE, Power Cont PC 1 5M
(502-24413-20) (20)(*1)
(4) 502-24415-55 CABLE, AC DAR-TR 1 5M
(502-24415-60) (20)(*1)
(5) 502-24416-01 EARTH CABLE 1 5M
(502-24416-03) (20)(*1)
(6) 015-17607-25 CORD,SJT3X#14_105_BK/ (1) 10M
WH/GNYE
(Accessory of Monitor Cart)
(7) 502-24426-02 EARTH CABLE,#10 (1) 10M
(Accessory of Monitor Cart)
(8) 071-60815-04 CORD SET,KP300C+ (1) 2M
KS16F 2SQ2.5MT
(9) 088-50528-01 CABLE ASSY, (1) 20M
(*4) 5BNC/HD15P-20
or
070-03621-02 or
CABLE,AS31-09010009
(10) 071-60815-04 CORD SET,KP300C+ 0 2M
KS16F 2SQ2.5MT
(11) 088-50528-01 CABLE ASSY, 0 20M
(*4) 5BNC/HD15P-20
or
070-03621-02 or
CABLE,AS31-09010009
(12) 088-50905-12 CABLE,KB-D315K 1 2M
or or
071-60826-01 CORD SET,KP-1601AH
+KS-31A 2.4M
(13) 088-50905-03 CABLE, KB-5BNC2K 1 2M
(*5)

(14) 088-50905-12 CABLE,KB- D315K 0 2M


or or
071-60826-01 CORD SET,KP-1601AH
+KS-31A 2.4M
(15) 088-50905-03 CABLE, KB-5BNC2K 0 2M

(16) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.8M


(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(17) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.2M
(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(18) 088-50925-02 KEYBOARD, 1 1.2M
ACK-595E-ROHS
088-50650-01 KEYBOARD, PD-KB200W/P 1 1.2M
(19) 511-78239-xx(*2) USB MOUSE WITH PS/2 1 1.2M
ADAPTER (Accessory of
DAR-8000 Cabinet)
(20) 088-50905-10 CABLE,KB-CHD1507K 0 0.75M
(21) 088-81104-15 CABLE,LD-CT/BU10 1 10M
(22) 511-78239-04 USB MEMORY WITH USB 1 1.5M
EXTENSION CABLE
(Accessory of DAR-8000
Cabinet)
Table 4-7 Cable (S- type FPD for China, Type1) 1/2

M517-E383T 53
Cable No. P/N Name Quantity Length
(*3)

(23) 502-25082-10 AC CABLE2 CCC 1 10M


(24) 541-28173-07 GROUNDING CABLE 1 10M
(26) 532-24696 HOSE ASSY,WPC-10 1 15M
(27-b) 511-71026-12 DC SENSE CABLE,17 1 10M
(Mini D-sub 15 pin)
(27-c) 511-71026-13 DC SENSE CABLE, 17 1 10M
(D-sub 25 pin)
(29-a) 511-71025-12 DC MAIN CABLE,17 1 23M
(Crimp contact)
(29-b) 511-71025-11 DC MAIN CABLE,17 1 23M
(D-sub 37pin)
(30-a) 511-74139-02 HV PS CONTROL CABLE 1 33M
(30-b) 511-74139-03 HV PS AC CABLE 1 35M
(31-a) 532-24700-01 COOLER AC CABLE 1 11M
(31-b) 532-24701-01 EARTH CABLE,11MT 1 11M
(32) 101-28599 PS CTRL DC CABLE 1 -
(33-a) 511-74150-01 AC POWER CABLE 1 3M
(Accessory of DC MAIN PS, 17)
(33-b) 101-28928 PS CTRL AC CABLE 1 -
(33-c) 503-62055 30A CONSENT ASSY 1 -
(34-a) 511-15134 CODESET,KP300CLS16FS 1 20M
(34-c) 511-15197-15 CABLE, CA-9S MA15 1 15M
(34-d) 511-15196-15 CABLE A, 09-2A-15M-2D 1 15M
(*6)

(34-e) 074-81311-15 SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW1SJ 1 1.8M


(*7) (*8) 1 2.2M
074-81330-52 CABLE, BUC26
(35) 502-24312 COM CABLE 1 2M
(36) 511-15030-11 CCD EXTERNAL CABLE 1 2M
(37) 502-22215-20 IBS CABLE 1 20M
(38) 502-24701-02 SGIMFS CONTROL CABLE 1 2M
(39) 502-24127-20 GRID CONT CABLE 1 20M
(40) 502-24346 Cooler Warning Cable 1 30M
(41) 502-25063 INJECTOR CABLE 1 20M
(43) 511-70170-01 FIBER CABLE, FRAD 1 30M
(44) 502-40255 HV CABLE, K-17 1 16M
(49) 502-40194 DC CONV CABLE 1, 17 1 0.35M
Table 4-7 Cable (S- type FPD for China, Type1) 2/2

(*1) For "TRANS CABLE OPTION (502-24428)"


(*2) "-xx" stands one more cable numbers.
(*3) "()" means option parts.
(*4) Use this when the LCD monitor is the 18 inches LCD monitor, G11S (511-78264-01), 19 inches
LCD monitor, SMD19102 SC(A)/SC(A)+STD(511-46486-11/-13), or 19inches LCD monitor, RX150
SC+STD(572-46055-11/-13), use the cable attached to the monitor.
(*5) When the LCD monitor is the 18 inches LCD monitor, G11S (511-78264-01), 19 inches LCD
monitor, SMD19102 SC(A)/SC(A)+STD(511-46486-11/-13), or 19inches LCD monitor, RX150
SC+STD(572-46055-11/-13), use the cable attached to the monitor.
(*6)
Use this when UPS type is SUA2200JB(made by APC) (074-81311-10).
(*7)
The exclusive cable is included (Software is not used).

54 M517-E383T
(*8)
Use this when UPS type is SUA2200JB(made by APC) (074-81311-10).

Figure 4-8 Wiring Overall View between Each Unit

M517-E383T 55
(S- type FPD for China, Type2)
・ (*1)
Option. Some part of wiring is changed by the option. Please refer to
“M517-E429 (DAR-8000_RM_Installation_Manual).
・ (*2)
Refer to "M501-E356 UD150B-40/L-40 Installation Manual" and
"M517-E397 UD-DAR8000 Connection Kit Installation Manual" about
installation for X-ray high-voltage generator control cabinet.
・ (*3)
Refer to "M517-E429 DAR-8000 Remote Maintenance Installation
Manual" about installation for Remote Maintenance PC.
・ (*4)
Refer to "M517-E451 Side Station Manual" about installation for Side
Station.
・ (*5)
This is not included in DAR-8000f component.

56 M517-E383T
Cable No. P/N Name Quantity Length
(*3)

(1) 502-25082-10 AC CABLE2 CCC 1 10M


(2) 541-28173-07 GROUNDING CABLE 1 10M
(3) 502-24413-05 CABLE, Power Cont PC 1 5M
(502-24413-20) (20)(*1)
(4) 502-24415-55 CABLE, AC DAR-TR 1 5M
(502-24415-60) (20)(*1)
(5) 502-24416-01 EARTH CABLE 1 5M
(502-24416-03) (20)(*1)
(6) 015-17607-25 CORD,SJT3X#14_105_BK/ (1) 10M
WH/GNYE
(Accessory of Monitor Cart)
(7) 502-24426-02 EARTH CABLE,#10 (1) 10M
(Accessory of Monitor Cart)
(8) 071-60815-04 CORD SET,KP300C+ (1) 2M
KS16F 2SQ2.5MT
(9) 088-50528-01 CABLE ASSY,5BNC / (1) 20M
(*4) or HD15P-20
070-03621-02 or
CABLE,AS31-09010009
(10) 071-60815-04 CORD SET,KP300C+ (1) 2M
KS16F 2SQ2.5MT
(11) 088-50528-01 CABLE ASSY,5BNC / (1) 20M
(*4) or HD15P-20
070-03621-02 or
CABLE,AS31-09010009
(12) 088-50905-12 ABLE,KB-D315K 1 2M
or or
071-60826-01 CORD SET, KP-1601AH
+KS-31A 2.4M
(13) 088-50905-03 CABLE, KB-5BNC2K 1 2M
(*5)

(14) 088-50905-12 CABLE,KB- D315K or 1 2M


or CORD SET,KP-1601AH
071-60826-01 +KS-31A 2.4M
(15) 088-50905-03 CABLE,KB-5BNC2K 1 2M
(*5)

(16) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.8M


(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(17) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.2M
(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(18) 088-50925-02 KEYBOARD, 1 1.2M
ACK-595E-ROHS
088-50650-01 KEYBOARD, PD-KB200W/P 1 1.2M
(19) 511-78239-xx(*2) USB MOUSE WITH PS/2 1 1.2M
ADAPTER (Accessory of
DAR-8000 Cabinet)
(20) 088-50905-10 CABLE,KB-CHD1507K 1 0.75M
(21) 088-81104-15 CABLE,LD-CT/BU10 1 10M

M517-E383T 57
Cable No. P/N Name Quantity Length
(*3)

(22) 511-78239-04 USB MEMORY WITH USB 1 1.5M


EXTENSION CABLE
(Accessory of DAR-8000
Cabinet)
Table 4-8 Cable (S- type FPD for China, Type2) 1/2

Cable No. P/N Name Quantity Length


(*3)

(23) 502-25082-10 AC CABLE2 CCC 1 10M


(24) 541-28173-07 GROUNDING CABLE 1 10M
(26) 532-24696 HOSE ASSY,WPC-10 1 15M
(27-b) 511-71026-12 DC SENSE CABLE,17 1 10M
(Mini D-sub 15 pin)
(27-c) 511-71026-13 DC SENSE CABLE, 17 1 10M
(D-sub 25 pin)
(29-a) 511-71025-12 DC MAIN CABLE,17 1 23M
(Crimp contact)
(29-b) 511-71025-11 DC MAIN CABLE,17 1 23M
(D-sub 37pin)
(30-a) 511-74139-02 HV PS CONTROL CABLE 1 33M
(30-b) 511-74139-03 HV PS AC CABLE 1 35M
(31-a) 532-24700-01 COOLER AC CABLE 1 11M
(31-b) 532-24701-01 EARTH CABLE,11MT 1 11M
(32) 101-28599 PS CTRL DC CABLE 1 -
(33-a) 511-74150-01 AC POWER CABLE 1 3M
(Accessory of DC MAIN PS,
17)
(33-b) 101-28928 PS CTRL AC CABLE 1 -
(33-c) 503-62055 30A CONSENT ASSY 1 -
(34-a) 511-15134 CODESET,KP300CLS16FS 1 20M
(34-c) 511-15197-15 CABLE, CA-9S MA15 1 15M
(34-d) 511-15196-15 CABLE A, 09-2A-15M-2D 1 15M
(*6)

(34-e) 074-81311-15 SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW1SJ 1 1.8M


(*7) (*8) 1 2.2M
074-81330-52 CABLE, BUC26
(35) 502-24312 COM CABLE 1 2M
(36) 511-15030-11 CCD EXTERNAL CABLE 1 2M
(37) 502-22215-20 IBS CABLE 1 20M
(38) 502-24701-02 SGIMFS CONTROL CABLE 1 2M
(39) 502-24127-20 GRID CONT CABLE 1 20M
(40) 502-24346 Cooler Warning Cable 1 30M
(41) 502-25063 INJECTOR CABLE 1 20M
(42) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.8M
(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(43) 511-70170-01 FIBER CABLE, FRAD 1 30M
(44) 502-40255 HV CABLE, K-17 1 16M
(49) 502-40194 DC CONV CABLE 1, 17 1 0.35M
Table 4-8 Cable (S- type FPD for China, Type2) 2/2

(*1) For "TRANS CABLE OPTION (502-24428)"


(*2) "-xx" stands one more cable numbers.
(*3) "()" means option parts

58 M517-E383T
(*4) Use this when the LCD monitor is the 18 inches LCD monitor, G11S (511-78264-01), 19 inches
LCD monitor, SMD19102 SC(A)/SC(A)+STD(511-46486-11/-13), or 19inches LCD monitor, RX150
SC+STD(572-46055-11/-13), use the cable attached to the monitor.
(*5) When the LCD monitor is the 18 inches LCD monitor, G11S (511-78264-01), 19 inches LCD
monitor, SMD19102 SC(A)/SC(A)+STD(511-46486-11/-13), or 19inches LCD monitor, RX150
SC+STD(572-46055-11/-13), use the cable attached to the monitor.
(*6)
Use this when UPS type is SUA2200JB(made by APC) (074-81311-10).
(*7)
The exclusive cable is included (Software is not used).
(*8)
Use this when UPS type is SUA2200JB(made by APC) (074-81311-10).

M517-E383T 59
Figure 4-9 Wiring Overall View between Each Unit
(S- type FPD for China, Type3)

60 M517-E383T
・ (*1)
Option. Some part of wiring is changed by the option. Please refer to
“M517-E429 (DAR-8000_RM_Installation_Manual).
・ (*2)
Refer to "M501-E356 UD150B-40/L-40 Installation Manual" and
"M517-E397 UD-DAR8000 Connection Kit Installation Manual" about
installation for X-ray high-voltage generator control cabinet.
・ (*3)
Refer to "M517-E429 DAR-8000 Remote Maintenance Installation
Manual" about installation for Remote Maintenance PC.
・ (*4)
Refer to "M517-E451 Side Station Manual" about installation for Side
Station.
・ (*5)
This is not included in DAR-8000f component.

M517-E383T 61
Cable No. P/N Name Quantity Length
(*3)

(1) 502-25082-10 AC CABLE2 CCC 1 10M


(2) 541-28173-07 GROUNDING CABLE 1 10M
(3) 502-24413-05 CABLE, Power Cont PC 1 5M
(502-24413-20) (20)(*1)
(4) 502-24415-55 CABLE, AC DAR-TR 1 5M
(502-24415-60) (20)(*1)
(5) 502-24416-01 EARTH CABLE 1 5M
(502-24416-03) (20)(*1)
(6) 015-17607-25 CORD,SJT3X#14_105_BK/ (1) 10M
WH/GNYE
(Accessory of Monitor Cart)
(7) 502-24426-02 EARTH CABLE,#10 (1) 10M
(Accessory of Monitor Cart)
(8) 071-60815-04 CORD SET,KP300C+ (1) 2M
KS16F 2SQ2.5MT
(9) 088-50528-01 CABLE ASSY,5BNC / (1) 20M
(*4) or HD15P-20
070-03621-02 or
CABLE,AS31-09010009
(10) 071-60815-04 CORD SET,KP300C+ (1) 2M
KS16F 2SQ2.5MT
(11) 088-50528-01 CABLE ASSY,5BNC / (1) 20M
(*4) or HD15P-20
070-03621-02 or
CABLE,AS31-09010009
(12) 088-50905-12 CABLE,KB-D315K 1 2M
or or
071-60826-01 CORD SET,KP-1601AH
+KS-31A 2.4M
(13) 088-50905-03 CABLE,KB-5BNC2K 1 2M
(*5)

(14) 088-50905-12 CABLE,KB-D315K 1 2M


or or
071-60826-01 CORD SET,KP-1601AH
+KS-31A 2.4M
(15) 088-50905-03 CABLE,KB-5BNC2K 1 2M
(*5)

(16) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.8M


(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(17) 511-90311-01 KVM Cable 1 1.2M
(Accessory of PC SWITCH)
(18) 088-50925-02 KEYBOARD, 1 1.2M
ACK-595E-ROHS
088-50650-01 KEYBOARD, PD-KB200W/P 1 1.2M
(19) 511-78239-xx(*2) USB MOUSE WITH PS/2 1 1.2M
ADAPTER (Accessory of
DAR-8000 Cabinet)
(20) 088-50905-10 CABLE,KB-CHD1507K 1 0.75M
(21) 088-81104-15 CABLE,LD-CT/BU10 1 10M
(22) 511-78239-04 USB MEMORY WITH USB 1 1.5M
EXTENSION CABLE
(Accessory of DAR-8000
Cabinet)
Table 4-9 Cable (S- type FPD for China, Type3) 1/2

62 M517-E383T
Cable No. P/N Name Quantity Length
(*3)

(24) 541-28173-07 GROUNDING CABLE 1 10M


(26) 532-24696 HOSE ASSY,WPC-10 1 15M
(27-b) 511-71026-12 DC SENSE CABLE,17 1 10M
(Mini D-sub 15 pin)
(27-c) 511-71026-13 DC SENSE CABLE, 17 1 10M
(D-sub 25 pin)
(29-a) 511-71025-12 DC MAIN CABLE,17 1 23M
(Crimp contact)
(29-b) 511-71025-11 DC MAIN CABLE,17 1 23M
(D-sub 37pin)
(30-a) 511-74139-02 HV PS CONTROL CABLE 1 33M
(30-b) 511-74139-03 HV PS AC CABLE 1 35M
(31-a) 532-24700-01 COOLER AC CABLE 1 11M
(31-b) 532-24701-01 EARTH CABLE,11MT 1 11M
(32) 101-28599 PS CTRL DC CABLE 1 -
(33-a) 511-74150-01 AC POWER CABLE 1 3M
(Accessory of DC MAIN PS, 17)
(33-b) 101-28928 PS CTRL AC CABLE 1 -
(33-c) 503-62055 30A CONSENT ASSY 1 -
(34-a) 511-15134 CODESET,KP300CLS16FS 1 20M
(34-c) 511-15197-15 CABLE, CA-9S MA15 1 15M
(34-d) 511-15196-15 CABLE A, 09-2A-15M-2D 1 15M
(*6)

(34-e) 074-81311-15 SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW1SJ 1 1.8M


(*7) (*8) 1 2.2M
074-81330-52 CABLE, BUC26
(35) 502-24312 COM CABLE 1 2M
(36) 511-15030-11 CCD EXTERNAL CABLE 1 2M
(37) 502-22215-20 IBS CABLE 1 20M
(38) 502-24701-02 SGIMFS CONTROL CABLE 1 2M
(39) 502-24127-20 GRID CONT CABLE 1 20M
(40) 502-24346 Cooler Warning Cable 1 30M
(41) 502-25063 INJECTOR CABLE 1 20M
(43) 511-70170-01 FIBER CABLE, FRAD 1 30M
(44) 502-40255 HV CABLE, K-17 1 16M
(49) 502-40194 DC CONV CABLE 1, 17 1 0.35M
Table 4-9 Cable (S- type FPD for China, Type3) 2/2

(*1)
For "TRANS CABLE OPTION (502-24428)"
(*2)
"-xx" stands one more cable numbers.
(*3)
"()" means option parts.
(*4)
Use this when the LCD monitor is the 18 inches LCD monitor, G11S (511-78264-01),
19 inches LCD monitor, SMD19102 SC(A)/SC(A)+STD(511-46486-11/-13), or 19inches
LCD monitor, RX150 SC+STD(572-46055-11/-13), use the cable attached to the monitor.
(*5)
When the LCD monitor is the 18 inches LCD monitor, G11S (511-78264-01), 19
inches LCD monitor, SMD19102 SC(A)/SC(A)+STD(511-46486-11/-13), or 19inches LCD
monitor, RX150 SC+STD(572-46055-11/-13), use the cable attached to the monitor.
(*6)
Use this when UPS type is SUA2200JB(made by APC) (074-81311-10).
(*7)
The exclusive cable is included (Software is not used).
(*8)
Use this when UPS type is SUA2200JB(made by APC) (074-81311-10).

M517-E383T 63
4.3 Wiring to DAR-8000 Power Transformer

4.3.1 Connecting Secondary Cable


In DAR-8000 Power Transformer, a cover is fixed with screws (4 parts per side, total 8
parts) as shown in Figure 4-10. Unscrew screws to remove the cover.

Figure 4-10 Removing Cover in DAR-8000 Power Transformer

64 M517-E383T
Connect the power of DAR-8000 Power Transformer as shown in Figure 4-11.

CN1

3
4
5

Figure 4-11 Wiring on Power Output Side

Wiring on power output side is shown in Figure 4-11:

3. CABLE, Power Cont PC (502-24413-05):


・ Connect to the CN1 terminal in DAR-8000 Power Transformer.

4. CABLE, AC DAR-TR (502-24415-55):


・ Connect according to the wire mark tube gage, and screw it.

5. EARTH CABLE, #10 (502-24416-01):


・ Connect the ring terminal to the earth terminal board in DAR-8000 Power
Transformer, and screw it.

*There are two CN1 terminals in DAR-8000 Power Transformer. Both CN1 terminals are
available.
(One of CN1 terminals will be used to connect with the cable of UD.)

・Terminal alignment at the wire mark tube gage.


 ROUT1
 ROUT2
 E
 LOUT1
 LOUT2
 LOUT1
 LOUT2
 E

M517-E383T 65
・The list below shows the destination and cable connected to the each terminal.
Terminal Destination P/N Cable
ROUT1 Monitor Cart 015-17607-25 CORD, SJT3X#14_105_BK/WH/GNYE
ROUT2
E
LOUT1 Remote 502-24966-20 AC POWER CABLE
LOUT2 Maintenance PC
LOUT1 Side Station 502-24966-20 AC POWER CABLE
Monitor for Side
LOUT2
Station
E
Table 4-10 Destination and Cable Connected to the Each Terminal

66 M517-E383T
Check that each cable with "P-0V" label and "P-200V" label is connected to proper terminal
in power supply terminal.

P-200V (B) (A)


P-0V

P-200V
P-0V
(B)
(A)

240 230 220 200 180 0

Figure 4-12 Power Supply Terminal

As shown in Figure 4-12:

Cable (A) with "P-0V" label:


・ Check that the cable (A) with "P-0V" label is connected to "0" label in power
supply terminal.

Cable (B) with"P-200V" label:


・ Connect the cable (B) with "P-200V" label to "200 / 220 / 230 / 240" label in
power supply terminal.

*The power voltage (200 / 220 / 230 / 240) is different according to region.

M517-E383T 67
4.3.2 Connecting Primary Cable

Connect the power cable and the earth cable for DAR-8000 Power Transformer.

Figure 4-13 Wiring on Power Input Side

Wiring on power input side is shown in Figure 4-13:

1. AC CABLE2 CCC (502-25082-10):


・ Connect a white cable or a light blue cable to the "N" terminal, a black cable
or a brown cable to the "L" terminal. The size of terminal at both ends of the
AC CABLE2 CCC (502-25082-10) is different. Please connect the terminal
at small end to the DAR-8000 Power Transformer side.

2. GROUNDING CABLE (541-28173-07):


・ Connect to the earth terminal board in DAR-8000 Power Transformer, and
screw it.

To avoid an accident, complete monitor wiring (section 4.4) before


connecting DAR-8000 Transbox to Distribution Board.

Confirm power distribution in section 4.12 "Confirmation", and then put the cover on
DAR-8000 Power Transformer.

68 M517-E383T
4.4 Wiring Monitor

4.4.1 How to connect the Monitor

This section describes how to connect the power cable and video cable of each monitor.
The kinds of cables required for the monitor in control room differ from the cables for the
in-room monitor. Refer to section 4.4.2 "Connecting Monitor in Control Room" and 4.4.3
"Connecting In-room Monitor (OPTION)". For the installation of the reference monitor, refer
to section 7.2.12 "REFERENCE MONITOR OPTION (502-24445)".

4.4.1.1 SMM1792L (CRT Monitor manufactured by Siemens)

Connect the power, G (Video), H (Sync), and V (Snyc) as shown in Figure 4-14:

Power H(Sync)

G(Video) V(Sync)

Figure 4-14 Connecting SMM1792L

M517-E383T 69
4.4.1.2 SMD18101 CS (LCD monitor manufactured by Siemens)
1. Unscrew the screws on the rear panel of LCD and remove the cover.
(see Figure 4-15.)
2. Connect the power, R (Video), BAS/G (Video), B (Video), H (Snyc)
and V (Snyc) as shown in Figure 4-15:
3. Set the switches according to Table 4-11.
4. Put the cover on the rear panel of LCD.

Screw Cover

R(Video) BAS/G(Video) B(Video) H(Sync) V(Sync)


Power

Figure 4-15 Connecting of SMD18101

Switch R G RGB/Mono B H
Setting 75Ω 75Ω MONO 75Ω 75Ω
Table 4-11 Setting Switch of SMD18101

70 M517-E383T
When “LCD CART (503-65156)” or “SMD18101 FOOT STAND
(511-43636-02)” is used, fix the LCD monitor to the stand by referring
section 4.4.4 “Installing the LCD on the LCD Stand” or manuals or
installation manuals attached to the LCD CART or FOOT STAND before the
wiring.

4.4.1.3 QB1791 (CRT Monitor manufactured by TECHNICAL ELECTRON)


Connect the power, G (Video), H (Sync) and V (Snyc) as shown in Figure 4-16:

VIDEO HS VS

Power G(Video) H(Sync) V(Sync)

Figure 4-16 Connection QB1791

M517-E383T 71
4.4.1.4 G11-S (LCD monitor manufactured by NANAO)
Connect the power, DVI as shown in Figure 4-17:

DVI Power

Figure 4-17 Connection G11-S

72 M517-E383T
4.4.1.5 SMD19102 CS (LCD monitor manufactured by NANAO)
Connect the power, DVI as shown in Figure 4-18:

DVI Power

Figure 4-18 Connection SMD19102 CS

M517-E383T 73
4.4.1.6 RX150 SC (LCD monitor manufactured by EIZO)
Connect the power, DVI as shown in Figure 4-19:

DVI POWER

Figure 4-19 Connection RX150 SC

74 M517-E383T
4.4.2 Connecting Monitor in Control Room
If you use the LCD monitor in Control Room, install the LCD monitor to the LCD stand by
referring to section 4.4.4 "Installing the LCD on the LCD Stand (LCD monitor manufactured
by Siemens)".
Connect the following cables according to the section 4.4.1.
The number enclosed [ ] is referred for the reference monitor.

12. [14] CABLE, KB-D315K (088-50905-12) (*1):


・ Connect to the power

13. [15] CABLE, KB-5BNC2K (088-50905-03):


・ Connect G (Video), H (Sync) and V (Snyc).

When you use the LCD monitor (G11-S) manufactured by NANAO, connect the cable
attached to the monitor to DVI.

(*1)
"071-60826-01 CORD SET, KP-1601AH+KS-31A* 2.4M" may be shipped instead of
"088-50905-12 CABLE, KB-D315K".

Connector Name R(Video) G (Video) B(Video) H (Sync) V (Sync)


Cable Color Red Green Blue Gray Black
Table 4-12 Color of Video Cable for monitor in control room

To connect reference monitor, it is necessary to connect in cabinet and


change setting. To connect in cabinet, please refer to section 4.8.4
“Connecting Video Cable (Option)”.
To change the setting, please refer to section 5.2.2 “Setting Display
Resolution” and “c) Set system option parameter” in section 6.3.1
“Setting System Configuration”.
.

M517-E383T 75
4.4.3 Connecting In-room Monitor (OPTION)
If you use the Monitor Cart for one LCD monitor, install the LCD monitor to the LCD stand
by referring to section 4.4.4 "Installing the LCD on the LCD Stand (LCD monitor
manufactured by Siemens)".
As shown in Figure 4-20 and Figure 4-21, connect the power cable and the earth cable,
which is connected to power supply box in monitor cart, to DAR-8000 Power Transformer.
Please refer to "M517-E421 Monitor Cart Installation Manual" about installation of monitor
cart.

Power Supply Box

6 7

Figure 4-20 Monitor Cart / Rear Face

6
7

Figure 4-21 Power Output Side in DAR-8000 Power Transformer

Wiring on power output side in DAR-8000 power transformer is shown as Figure 4-20 and
Figure 4-21:

76 M517-E383T
6. CORD, SJT3X #14_105_BK/WH/GNYE (015-17607-25):
・ Connect to ROUT1, ROUT2, and E terminal in DAR-8000 Power
Transformer, and screw it.

7. EARTH CABLE. #10 (502-24426-02):


・ Connect to the earth terminal board in DAR-8000 Power Transformer, and
screw it.
Connect in-room monitor as shown in Figure 4-22.
Reference Monitor
(Option) Monitor

10 8

Power Supply Box

11
Figure 4-22 Connecting Monitor Cart and 17" Monitor / Rear Face

Connect the in-room monitor as shown in Figure 4-22:

8. CORD SET, KP300C+KS16F 2SQ2.5MT (071-60815-04):


・ Connect monitor power cable to power connector in monitor cart.

9. CABLE ASSY, 5BNC/HD15P-20 (088-50528-01):


・ Connect R (Video) (*2), G (Video), B (Video) (*2), H (Sync) and V (Sync).
(*2) Only if the monitor has these connectors, the connection is needed.

When you use the LCD monitor (G11-S) manufactured by NANAO, connect the
cable AS31-09010009 (070-03621-02) to DVI via the adapter, AD-DV02
(088-50602-25).

Connector Name R(Video) G(Video) B(Video) H(Sync) V(Sync)


Cable Color Red Green Blue Yellow White
Table 4-13 Color of Video Cable for In-room Monitor

M517-E383T 77
4.4.4 Installing the LCD on the LCD Stand (LCD monitor manufactured by
Siemens)
Install the LCD on the LCD stand (511-46363-02) when using under the following
conditions.
 Using in the operation room.
 Using monitor for LCD1 in the examination room.

<Mounting the LCD Stand>

Remove the rear cover of


the stand.

78 M517-E383T
Fix the LCD to the stand with 4
screws.
(Two sockets below are available
after the cover is removed.)

The cable is connected to


Put the cover. the LCD through the cable
hole of the stand.

M517-E383T 79
4.4.5 Attaching Nameplate

Attaching the nameplate of "SHIMADZU" on the front panel of the monitor as shown in
Figure 4-23:

NAMEPLATE,EMBLEM & LOGO AN40 (037-70083-01):


・ Attach the nameplate to the position between the bottom of screen and the
lower outer frame of monitor, so that left side nameplate is an extension of
left screen.

NAMEPLATE,EMBLEM & LOGO AN40 (037-70083-01)


Figure 4-23 Position to attach Nameplate

80 M517-E383T
4.5 Wiring Original Type FPD

This section describes how to connect FPD and peripheral equipments.


Refer to "M506-E327 REMOTE-CONTROLLED DIAGNOSTIC TABLE ZS-100I /
ZS-100IR INSTALLATION MANUAL" about FPD installation. Refer to "M517-2167
COOLING ASSY WPC-10 INSTALLATION MANUAL" about installation, operation and
adjustment of Original type FPD Cooling Unit.

4.5.1 FPD System (Original Type FPD)


FPD system is composed of 4 units:
 17inch FPD
 Sub Cabinet
 PSU RACK 2
 PCU
Outline diagram of FPD system wiring and cable number is shown in Figure 4-24.
Connections of each unit are explained in detail in section 4.5 and after.
Section 4.5.4 Section 4.5.3 Section 4.5.2

CN5
29-a
CN3 27-a CN2
CONTROL 29-b CN3
CN2 27-a
TB1 27-c CN4
OUTPUT CN4
CN6
DC Main CN7
DC Sense Box 27-b CN5

32 30-a 28
30-b
J2 J3
J1
17 inch FPD
AC (N) (L) EXT.IN

PS CTRL Board CN1 26-a


HV Main PS
26-b
Distribution Board Single Phase

33-a 33-b 25
200/220/230/240V 50/60Hz

Section 4.5.3 and 4.11


PSU
Transformer
40
31
23
Section 4.5.5
FPD Cooling Unit
24
33-c

UPS Sub Cabinet


34-a 34-d
34-c

Section 4.8
PSU RACK 2 DAR-8000 Control Cabinet PCU
DAR-8000 PC Selector
37

Refer to “UD-DAR8000 Connection Kit SGIM


X-ray Diagnostic Table Installation Manual (M517- E397)”
Control Cabinet
39 38

X-ray High Voltage Generator Fluo-2002


Control Cabinet

M517-E383T 81
Figure 4-24 Outline Diagram of FPD System Wiring

 17inch FPD

FPD set on X-ray diagnostic table


Figure 4-25 17inch FPD

FPD is the precision apparatus and sensitive to temperature and vibration.


Please be very careful to handle FPD.

 Sub Cabinet

Heat Exchanger
The following equipments are in Sub
Cabinet:
High Voltage
Main PS  High voltage main PS
 DC sense Box
 FPD cooling unit
DC Sense Box  Heat exchanger

Refer to the document attached to the

FPD Cooling Unit X-ray tube for the Heat exchanger


installation.

Figure 4-26 Inside of Sub Cabinet

82 M517-E383T
PSU RACK 2

Insulation
Transformer UPS The following equipments are in
Sub Cabinet:
 UPS
 PS CTRL Board
 PSU Transformer
 DC Main
 Wave Tail Cutting Unit
PS CTRL Board (SGC-10)*
 Starter (SA-61)*

DC Main
(*) They are options of X-ray
high-voltage generator.

Figure 4-27 Inside of PSU RACK 2

 PCU

Front Panel Rear Panel

Figure 4-28 PCU

M517-E383T 83
4.5.2 Connecting FPD

4.5.2.1 Connecting 17inch FPD (Original type FPD)

Figure 4-29 FPD Rear Panel

Connect the cables to the rear panel of FPD as shown in Figure 4-30.

To PCU
To
HV Main PS 25
To DC
Sense Box
Black
Blue To DC Sense Box

27-b 27-c 27-a 27-a


28

CN8 CN5 CN7 CN6 CN4 CN3 CN2

Figure 4-30 Connection on FPD Rear Panel

84 M517-E383T
Connect the cables to the rear panel of FPD as shown in Figure 4-30:
27-a. DC SENSE CABLE, 17(511-71026-11) <D-sub 15 pin>
・ Connect to CN2 connector, and screw it.

27-a. DC SENSE CABLE, 17(511-71026-11) <D-sub 15 pin>


・ Connect to CN3 connector, and screw it.

27-b. DC SENSE CABLE, 17(511-71026-12) <Mini-sub 15 pin>


・ Connect to CN5 connector, and screw it.

25. FIBER CABLE (511-71015)


・ Connect the blue connector of Fiber Cable to CN6 connector.
・ Connect the black connector of Fiber Cable to CN7 connector.

27-c. DC SENSE CABLE, 17(511-71026-13) <D-sub 25 pin>


・ Connect to CN4 connector, and screw it.

28. HV CABLE (101-28852)


・ Connect to HV connector on the rear panel of FPD.

Insert the FIBER CABLE until it clicks and confirm that the connection is
fixed.

Insert the HV CABLE until it clicks and align the cut to prevent loose and
turn the connector.

M517-E383T 85
4.5.2.2 Connecting Water Cooling Hose

Refer to Section 4.11 "Connecting FPD and Water-Cooling Hose" about connection of
Water Cooling Hose.

Remove air bubble from the water-cooling hose and near the coolant
temperature to the set temperature of FPD Cooling Unit before
connecting FPD and FPD Cooling Unit with the water -cooling hose.
All wiring hove to be completed before this work. Ref er to section
4.11 “Connecting FPD and W ater-Cooling Hose” for steps of this
work.

After the wiring, cut the excess hose with 1 or 2 m left for work.

*NOTE
To FPD To FPD

*NOTE
Cut

NOTE:There two type of coupler, the male and the female.


Attach the same type of coupler as one before cutting the hose.

Remove the couplers from the cut hose and install them to the hose connected to FPD.
Refer to section 3 "Installation" in "M517-2167 FPD COOLING ASSY WPC-10
INSTALLATION MANUAL" for the coupler installation.

86 M517-E383T
4.5.3 Connecting in Sub Cabinet

4.5.3.1 Connecting DC Sense Box

Connect DC SENSE CABLE and DC MAIN CABLE to DC Sense Box as shown in Figure
4-31.

To FPD
29-b
27-c
To DC Main

To FPD CN4

27-a
11
CN2 10
9
To FPD
8
27-a 7 29-a
CN3 6
5 To DC Main
4
To FPD 3
2
27-b CN5
1

Figure 4-31 Connecting DC Sense Box

M517-E383T 87
Connect DC SENSE CABLE as shown in Figure 4-31:

27-c. DC SENSE CABLE, 17 (511-71026-13) <D-sub 25 pin>


・ Connect to CN4 connector, and screw it.

27-a. DC SENSE CABLE, 17 (511-71026-11) <D-sub 15 pin>


・ Connect to CN2 connector, and screw it.

27-a. DC SENSE CABLE, 17 (511-71026-11) <D-sub 15 pin>


・ Connect to CN3 connector, and screw it.

27-b. DC SENSE CABLE, 17 (511-71026-12) < Mini D-sub 15 pin >


・ Connect to CN5 connector, and screw it.

Connect DC MAIN CABLE as shown in Figure 4-31:

29-a. DC MAIN CABLE, 17 (511-71025-12) <Crimp contact>


・ Connect to the terminal block on DC Sense box, matching the number of
cables to those of the terminal block, and screw it.
29-b. DC MAIN CABLE, 17 (511-71025-11) <D-sub 37 pin>
・ Connect to D-sub 37 pin connector on DC Sense box and screw it.

88 M517-E383T
4.5.3.2 Connecting HV Main PS

Connect cables to HV Main PS as shown in Figure 4-32.

AC (N) AC (L)

White Black
EXT.IN Earth
To PS CTRL Board Green
in PSU RACK 2
30-a To FPD
28
To UPS
30-b
AC (N) (L)

Figure 4-32 Connecting HV Main PS

As shown in Figure 4-32:

30-a. HV PS CONTROL CABLE (511-74139-02)


・ Connect to EXT.IN terminal on HV Main PS, and screw it.

30-b. HV PS AC CABLE (511-74139-03)


・ Connect AC (N) connector to AC (N) terminal, and screw it.
・ Connect AC (L) connector to AC (L) terminal, and screw it.
・ Connect earth to the package of HV Main PS, and screw it attached to the
package.

28. HV CABLE (101-28852)


・ Connect to HV terminal of HV Main PS.

Insert the HV CABLE until it clicks and align the cut to prevent loose and
turn the connector.

M517-E383T 89
4.5.3.3 Connecting FPD Cooling Unit
Connect Water Cooling Hose to FPD Cooling Unit as shown in Figure 4-33.

Raised
To PSU Transformer To PS CTRL Cut dot
40
in PSU RACK 2
(How to release the coupler)
(1) Turn the removable part toward “a” to
align the cut with raised.
26 26
(2) Slide the removable part toward “b” to
release the coupler.

Figure 4-33 Connecting Water Cooling Hose to FPD Cooling Unit

If the coolant blows out, around wires and devices would get wet and
electrical leakage may occur. Set a tarpaulin to keep them from water
before connecting water cooling Hose to FPD Cooling Unit . When
releasing coupler, cover them with cloth.

As shown in Figure 4-33:


26. HOSE ASSY, WPC-10 (532-24696)
・ Close the coupler near the FPD.
・ Connect another coupler to cooling hose of FPD cooling unit.
40. Cooler Warning Cable (502-24346)
・ Connect to the connector of FPD cooling unit.

Insulation is fitted on one side of water -cooling hose. Connect this side of
hose to FPD cooling unit.

Refer to Section 3 "Installation" in "M517-2167 FPD COOLING ASSY WPC-10


INSTALLATION MANUAL" to fix the coupler and work for insulation.

90 M517-E383T
4.5.4 Connecting in PSU RACK 2

Make Sure the breaker of PSU RACK2 turns OFF before connection.

4.5.4.1 Connecting DC Main


Connect cables to DC Main as shown in Figure 4-34.

To DC Sense Box
To PS CTRL Board
29-b
32

F POWER CONTROL OUTPUT

TB1
FG R S

33-a

To UPS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

29-a
To DC Sense Box
Figure 4-34 Connecting DC Main

M517-E383T 91
Connect DC Main Unit as shown in Figure 4-34:
29-a. DC MAIN CABLE, 17 (511-71025-12) <Crimp contact>
・ Connect to the terminal block on DC Main, matching the number of cables to
those of the terminal block, and screw it.

29-b. DC MAIN CABLE, 17 (511-71025-11) <D-sub 37pin>


・ Connect to OUTPUT connector on DC Main, and screw it.

32. PS CTRL DC CABLE (101-28599)


・ Connect to CONTROL connector on DC Main, and screw it.

33-a. AC POWER CABLE (511-74150-01 Accessory of DC MAIN PS, 17)


・ Connect FG connector to FG connector on TB1, and screw it.
・ Connect R connector to R connector on TB1, and screw it.
・ Connect S connector to S connector on TB1, and screw it.

92 M517-E383T
4.5.4.2 Connecting Power Supply Control Board (PS CTRL Board)

Connect cables to Power Supply Control Board as shown in Figure 4-35.

To PCU To DC Main To HV Main PS To FPD Cooling Unit

34-c 32 30-a
40

J2 J3

J1
J8

CN1

33-b

To UPS

Figure 4-35 Connecting PS CTRL Board

M517-E383T 93
Connect cables to Power Supply Control Board as shown in Figure 4-35:
34-c. CABLE ASSY, 9S MA15 (511-15197-15)
・ Connect to J1 connector, and screw it.

32. PS CTRL DC CABLE (101-28599)


・ Connect to J2 connector, and screw it.

30-a. HV PS CONTROL CABLE (511-74139-02)


・ Connect to J3 connector, and screw it.

33-b. PS CTRL AC CABLE (101-28928)


・ Connect CN1 connector, and screw it.

40. Cooler Warning Cable (502-24346)


・ Connect to the J8 connector.

94 M517-E383T
4.5.4.3 Connecting Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

・In the case of UPS made by APC


Add the expansion board "INTERFACE, AP9607 (074-81311-31)" to the expansion slot at
the rear panel of UPS as shown in Figure 4-35.
There are 4 DIP switches on the expansion board "INTERFACE, AP9607 (074-81311-31)".
Set all DIP switches to OFF.

ON

OFF
Expansion Board

DIP Switch

Figure 4-36 Add the Expansion Board to UPS

M517-E383T 95
Connect cables to the rear panel of UPS as shown in Figure 4-36.

UPS model:SU2200J UPS model:SUA2200JB

Basic Monitoring Ports


To PCU
Basic Monitoring Ports (34-d)+(34-e)
To PCU
(34-d)+(34-e) To PCU
(34-a) To HV Main PS
OUTPUT C OUTPUT
100V 50/60Hz To PS CTRL
A B A 100V 50/60Hz (30-b)
Board
(33-a) (33-b)
To DC Main (30-b)
D
B D (34-a)
To HV Main PS (33-a) To PCU
Overcurrent Protection C
Overcurrent Protection
Reset Button Reset Button
To DC Main
(33-b)
INPUT INPUT
To PS CTRL 120V 50/60Hz 120V 50/60Hz
To PSU To PSU
Board
Transformer Transformer
(33-c) (33-c)

Figure 4-37 Connecting Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

UPS has over current protection. If more than one devices are
connected to one AC output, the detection circuit will detect the over
current and shut the power off. Connect the power cable as shown in
Figure 4-36.

96 M517-E383T
Connect cables to the rear panel of UPS as shown in Figure 4-36:

48. HV PS AC CABLE(502-40111-01)
・ Connect to OUTPUT connector (A in Figure 4-36).

34-a. CODESET, KP300CLS16FS (511-15134):


・ Connect to OUTPUT connector (C in Figure 4-36).

34-e. SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW1SJ (074-81311-15)


・ Use the cable attached.
・ Connect to the left connecter on the expansion board "Interface,
AP9607 (074-81311-31)" at the rear panel of UPS, and screw it.

34-d. CABLE A, 09-2A-15M-2D (511-15196-15)


・ Connect to (34-e) using two spacers "SBA-305 (037-38785-18)",
and screw it.

CABLE A, 09-2A-15M-2D

Spacer SBA-305

SOFTWARE,SSPCBEW1SJ
(cable attached)

Figure 4-38 Connection Cable to UPS

M517-E383T 97
A seal "940-0020D" is put on the connector of (34-e) "SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW1SJ
(074-81311-15)", which is connected to the expansion board "INTERFACE, AP9607
(074-81311-31)". Check this seal before the connection not to mistake this cable for
"INTERFACE, AP9824LJ (074-81311-33)", which is connected to D-sub connector of UPS.
They are similar in shape.
A seal "940-0024C" is put on the connector of "INTERFACE, AP9824LJ (074-81311-33)",
which is used to connect UPS and Maintenance PC. This cable is built in IC so that the
wrong connection may cause the damage to the cable or UPS.

940-0020D

SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW1SJ (074-81311-15) (Cable attached)

98 M517-E383T
・In the case of UPS made by OMRON
Add the expansion board "BOARD,SC07 (074-81330-51)" to the expansion slot at the rear
panel of UPS as shown in Figure 4-38.

expansion board

Figure 4-39 Add the Expansion Board to UPS

M517-E383T 99
Connect cables to the rear panel of UPS as shown in Figure 4-39.

To PS Ctrl To PCU
To PCU
(33-b) (34-a)
(34-d)+(34-e)

To DC MAIN(48)

To PSU Trans
(33-c)

Figure 4-40 Connecting Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

UPS has over current protection. If more than one devices are
connected to one AC output, the detection circuit will detect the over
current and shut the power off. Connect the power cable as shown in
Figure 4-39.

100 M517-E383T
Connect cables to the rear panel of UPS as shown in Figure 4-39:

48. HV PS AC CABLE(502-40111-01)
・ Connect to OUTPUT connector ((48) in Figure 4-39).

34-a. CODESET, KP300CLS16FS (511-15134):


・ Connect to OUTPUT connector ((34-a) in Figure 4-39).

34-e. CABLE, BUC26(074-81330-52)


・ Use the cable attached.
・ Connect to the left connecter on the expansion board "BOARD,
SC07(074-81330-51)" at the rear panel of UPS, and screw it.

34-d. CABLE A, 09-2A-15M-2D (511-15196-15)


・ Connect to (34-e) using two spacers "SBA-305(E) (037-38785-18)",
and screw it.

CABLE A, Spacer
09-2A-15M-2D SBA-305(E)

CABLE, BUC26

Figure 4-41 Connection Cable to UPS

M517-E383T 101
4.5.4.4 Connecting PSU Transformer

Connect cable of FPD Cooling Unit, power cable and earth cable as shown in Figure 4-42.

L100 L0 L100 L0
31-b

(L100) (L0)

31-a

Figure 4-42 Wiring on Output Terminal

Connect cables on output terminal as shown in Figure 4-42:


31-a. COOLER AC CABLE (532-24700-01):
・ Connect "L0" label connector to terminal with "L0" label in output terminal,
and screw it.
・ Connect "L100" label connector to terminal with "L100" label in output
terminal, and screw it.
・ Connect earth cable to ground terminal, and screw it.

31-b. EARTH CABLE, 11MT (532-24701-01):


・ Connect earth cable to ground terminal, and screw it

102 M517-E383T
.

Breaker of PSU RACK2


Black
Red

240
230
220
Red
200
180 Black
0

Figure 4-43 Checking for Wiring on Power Supply Terminal

As shown in Figure 4-43:


BLACK CABLE:
・ Check the BLACK CABLE is connected to terminal with "0" label in power
supply terminal.
・ Check the BLACK CABLE is connected to the lower-left connector on the
breaker of PSU RACK 2 as one faces the front panel (no connector) of the
breaker.

RED CABLE:
・ Check the RED CABLE is connected to terminal with "200 / 220 / 230 / 240"
* label in power supply terminal.
・ Check the RED CABLE is connected to the lower-right connector on the
breaker of PSU RACK 2 as one faces the front panel (no connector) of the
breaker.

*The power voltage is different according to region.

M517-E383T 103
Black
Breaker of PSU RACK2
Red

Red
Black

(24)
(L) (N) To Distribution Board
(23) GND
To Distribution Board
Single phase 200 / 220 / 230 / 240V*(50/60Hz)
*The power voltage is different according to region.
Figure 4-44 Wiring on Power Input Terminal

To avoid an accident, complete connecting PCU (refer to section 4.5.5


“Connecting PCU”) before connecting PSU transformer to Distribution
Board.

Connect cables in input terminal as shown in Figure 4-44:


23 AC CABLE2 CCC (502-25082-10):
・ Connect the white or sky blue cable to N terminal, and the black cable or the
brown cable to L terminal, and screw them. Connect the smaller terminal of
this cable to PSU transformer side.

24 EARTH CABLE (541-28173-07):


・ Connect to earth terminal board in PSU Transformer, and screw it.

104 M517-E383T
BLACK CABLE:
・ Check the BLACK CABLE is connected to terminal with "N/L0" label on
INPUT terminal board.
・ Check the BLACK CABLE is connected to the upper-left connector on the
breaker of PSU RACK 2 as one faces the front panel (no connector) of the
breaker.

RED CABLE:
・ Check the RED CABLE is connected to terminal with "L/L200" label on
INPUT terminal board.
・ Check the RED CABLE is connected to the upper-right connector on the
breaker of PSU RACK 2 as one faces the front panel (no connector) of the
breaker.

M517-E383T 105
4.5.5 Connecting PCU

4.5.5.1 Connecting PCU (Expansion Slot) and Units

Connect cables from other units to the rear panel of PCU as shown in Figure 4-45.

To FLUO-2002 Board in
X-ray High Voltage
Generator Control Cabinet

(Black) To PS CTRL Board


37 34-c in PSU RACK 2

(Blue)

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

To FPD To UPS
34-d
25 36
To DAR-8000 Control Cabinet

Figure 4-45 Connection PCU and Other Units

106 M517-E383T
Connect cables to the rear panel of PCU as shown in Figure 4-45:
34-d. CABLE ASSY, 09-2A-15M-2D (511-15196-15):
・ Connect to D-Sub connector of PCI slot 1, and screw it.

36. CCD EXTERNAL CABLE (511-15030-11):


・ Connect to the connector of PCI slot 3, and screw it.

25. FIBER CABLE (511-71015):


・ Connect blue connector to the connector of PCI slot 5.
・ Connect black connector to the connector of PCI slot 5.

34-c. CABLE, CA-9S MA15 (511-15197-15):


・ Connect to D-sub connector of PCI slot 7, and screw it.

37. IBS CABLE (502-22215-20):


・ Connect to the BNC connector of PCI slot 7.
When the PCU has three BNC connectors, connect to the center connector.
When the PCU has one BNC connector, connect to it.

To connect to X-ray High Voltage Generator Control Cabinet, refer to


“M517-E397 UD-DAR8000 Connection Kit Installation Manual”.

Insert the FIBER CABLE until it clicks and confirm that the connection is
fixed.

M517-E383T 107
4.5.5.2 Connecting PC Switch, Serial Cable and LAN to PCU

Connect PC switch, serial cable and LAN cable to the rear panel of PCU as shown in
Figure 4-46.

4 3 2 1

17
Rear panel of
PC switch.

35

To DAR-8000
Control Cabinet

To LAN (Connection for


Remote Maintenance)

Figure 4-46 Connecting PC Switch, Serial Cable and LAN to PCU

As shown in Figure 4-46:


17. KVM Cable (511-90311-01 Accessory of PC SWITCH) <1.2MT>:
・ Connect keyboard cable to keyboard connector on the rear panel of PCU.
・ Connect mouse cable to mouse connector on the rear panel of PCU.
・ Connect VGA cable to VGA output connector on the rear panel of PCU, and
screw it.
・ Connect keyboard cable to keyboard connector at "2" connector on the rear
panel of PC switch.
・ Connect mouse cable to mouse connector at "2" connector on the rear
panel of PC switch.
・ Connect VGA cable to VGA connector at "2" connector on the rear panel of
PC switch, and screw it.

35. COM CABLE (502-24312):


・ Connect to the COM1 connector of PCU, and screw it.

108 M517-E383T
LAN CABLE is connected as the remote maintenance option. Refer to
“M517-E429 DAR-8000 Remote Maintenance Installation Manual”

4.5.5.3 Mounting PCU Cover

Mount "COVER ASSY (503-65184)" attached to PCU as shown in Figure 4-47.

・ ・
・ ・

COVER ASSY

Figure 4-47 Mounting PCU Cover

The magnet is attached to “COVER ASSY (503-65184)” so that the


cover can be fixed to the metal part of PC.

M517-E383T 109
4.5.5.4 Connecting the Power Cable and Earth Cable to PCU

Connect the Power Cable and Earth Cable to the rear panel of PCU as shown in Figure
4-48:

・ ・
34-a
・ ・
To UPS

COVER ASSY

Figure 4-48 Connecting the Power Cable and Earth Cable to PCU

As shown in Figure 4-48:


34-a. CODESET, KP300CLS16FS (511-15134):
・ Connect to power connector on the rear panel of PCU.

110 M517-E383T
4.6 Wiring S-type FPD (for All Countries Except China)

This section describes how to connect FPD and peripheral equipments.


Refer to "M506-E327 REMOTE-CONTROLLED DIAGNOSTIC TABLE ZS-100I /
ZS-100IR INSTALLATION MANUAL" about FPD installation. Refer to "M517-2167
COOLING ASSY WPC-10 INSTALLATION MANUAL" about installation, operation and
adjustment of S-type FPD Cooling Unit.

4.6.1 FPD System (S-type FPD for All Countries Except China)
FPD system is composed of 5 units:
 17inch A FPD (S-type)
 FPD Sub Cabinet
 PSU RACK 4
 PCU
 FPD Cooling Unit, Box

The wiring relating to the UPS differs depending on the type of UPS
installed in the PSU RACK 4. The illustration is provided for each type.
Select either one according to the type of it.

M517-E383T 111
Outline diagram of FPD system wiring and cable number is shown in Figure 4-49.
Connections of each unit are explained in detail in section 4.6 and after.

【Section 4.6.3 and 4.11】 【Section 4.6.2】


(31) (26)
(40) (26)

FPD Cooling Unit, Box


(44)

【Section 4.6.4】 (47) 37pin

J8 PS CTRL HV Main PS
DC Main PS J3 AC100 CONTROL
HV OUT
17inch A FPD
AC100
HV PS MAIN COOL J2
J1 CN1
(43)

(48)
FPD Sub Cabinet 【Section 4.6.6】

【Section 4.6.5】
(45)

(46)

(34-a) (34-d)
Distribution Board Single Phase

UPS
200/220/230/240V 50/60Hz

(23)
【Section 4.8】
(24)
DAR-8000 Control Cabinet
PSU Transformer PSU RACK 4 DAR-8000 PC Selector (37)
PCU

【 Refer to “UD-DAR8000 Connection Kit Installation SGIM


X-ray Diagnostic Table Manual (M517- E397)”】
(39) (38)
Control Cabinet
X-ray High Voltage Generator Control Cabinet Fluo-2002

Figure 4-49 Outline Diagram of FPD System Wiring

 17inch A FPD

FPD set on X-ray diagnostic table


Figure 4-50 17inch A FPD (S-type)

112 M517-E383T
FPD is the precision apparatus and sensitive to temperature and
vibration. Please be very careful to handle FPD.

 Sub Cabinet

Heat Exchanger

The following equipments are in Sub


Cabinet:
 High Voltage Main PS
High Voltage
 PS CTRL Board
Main PS
 DC Main PS
 Heat Exchanger

PS CTRL
Refer to the document attached to the
Board
X-ray tube for the Heat exchanger
installation.
DC Power

Supply

Figure 4-51 Inside of Sub Cabinet

M517-E383T 113
 PSU RACK 4

PSU Transformer
The following equipments are in
PSU RACK 4:
 UPS
 PSU Transformer
 Wave Tail Cutting Unit
(SGC-10)*
 Starter (SA-61)*

(*) They are options of X-ray


high-voltage generator.

UPS

Figure 4-52 Inside of PSU RACK 4

 PCU
PCU3 PCU4

Front Panel Rear Panel

Front Panel Rear panel


Figure 4-53 PCU

114 M517-E383T
 FPD Cooling Unit, Box

Front Rear

Figure 4-54 FPD Cooling Unit, Box

M517-E383T 115
4.6.2 Connecting FPD

4.6.2.1 Connecting 17inch A FPD (S-type)

Figure 4-55 FPD Rear Panel (S-type)

Connect the cables to the rear panel of FPD as shown in Figure 4-56.

To HV Main PS
To PCU To DC Power Supply
44 43 47

Blue

(37pin)

Figure 4-56 Connection on FPD Rear Panel

116 M517-E383T
Connect the cables to the rear panel of FPD as shown in Figure 4-56:

43. FIBER CABLE,FRAD (511-70170-01)


・ Connect to connector on the FPD rear panel.

47. DC MAIN CABLE, K-17 (502-40181-01) <D-sub 37 pin>


・ Connect to 37pin connector on the rear panel of FPD, and screw it.

44. HV CABLE, K-17(502-40255)


・ Connect to connector on the rear panel of FPD.

Insert the FIBER CABLE until it clicks and confirm that the connection is
fixed.

Insert the HV CABLE of S-type FPD and align the red mark on both
sides and turn the connector of the cable 90 degrees .

M517-E383T 117
4.6.2.2 Connecting Water Cooling Hose

Refer to Section 4.11 "Connecting FPD and Water-Cooling Hose" about connection of
Water Cooling Hose.

Remove air bubble from the water-cooling hose and near the coolant
temperature to the set temperature of FPD Cooling Unit before
connecting FPD and FPD Cooling Unit with the water -cooling hose. All
wiring hove to be completed before this work. Refer to section 4.11
“Connecting FPD and Water-Cooling Hose” for steps of this work.

After the wiring, cut the excess hose with 1 or 2 m left for work.

*NOTE
To FPD To FPD

*NOTE
Cut

NOTE:There two type of coupler, the male and the female.


Attach the same type of coupler as one before cutting the hose.

Remove the couplers from the cut hose and install them to the hose connected to FPD.
Refer to section 3 "Installation" in "M517-2167 FPD COOLING ASSY WPC-10
INSTALLATION MANUAL" for the coupler installation.

118 M517-E383T
4.6.3 Connecting FPD Cooling Unit, Box

Remove the cover of FPD Cooling Unit, Box.


Connect Water Cooling Hose to FPD Cooling Unit, Box as shown in Figure 4-57.

Raised
To PSU Transformer To PS CTRL Cut dot
40
in PSU RACK 4
(How to release the coupler)
(1) Turn the removable part toward “a” to
align the cut with raised.
26 26
(2) Slide the removable part toward “b” to
release the coupler.

Figure 4-57 Connecting Water Cooling Hose to FPD Cooling Unit, Box

If the coolant blows out, around wires and devices would get wet and
electrical leakage may occur. Set a tarpaulin to keep them from water
before connecting water cooling Hose to FPD Cooling Unit , Box . When
releasing coupler, cover them with cloth.

As shown in Figure 4-57:

26. HOSE ASSY, WPC-10 (532-24696)


・ Close the coupler near the FPD.
・ Connect another coupler to cooling hose of FPD cooling unit.
40. Cooler Warning Cable (502-24346-01)
・ Connect to the connector of FPD cooling unit, Box

M517-E383T 119
Insulation is fitted on one side of water -cooling hose. Connect this side of
hose to FPD cooling unit, Box

Refer to Section 3 "Installation" in "M517-2167 FPD COOLING ASSY WPC-10


INSTALLATION MANUAL" to fix the coupler and work for insulation.

120 M517-E383T
4.6.4 Connecting in FPD Sub Cabinet

4.6.4.1 Connecting High Voltage (HV) Main PS

Connect cables to HV Main PS as shown in Figure 4-58.

To FPD
44

Figure 4-58 Connecting High Voltage Main PS

Connect High Voltage Main PS as shown in Figure 4-58:

44. HV CABLE, K-17 (502-40255)


・ Connect to HV terminal, and screw it.

Insert the HV CABLE of High Voltage Main PS until it clicks and align the
cut to prevent loose and turn the connector.
Check the cable for a firm connection.

M517-E383T 121
4.6.4.2 Connecting Power Supply Control Board (PS CTRL Board)

Connect cables to PS CTRL Board as shown in Figure 4-59.

To PCU To FPD Cooling Unit, Box

46 40

J1 J8

Figure 4-59 Connecting PS CTRL Board

As shown in Figure 4-59:

46. CABLE,CA-9S MA15 (511-15197-15)


・ Connect to J1 connector, and screw it.

40. Cooler Warning Cable (502-24346-01)


・ Connect to J8 connector.

122 M517-E383T
4.6.4.3 Connecting DC Main

Connect cables to DC Main as shown in Figure 4-60.

To FPD

47

MAIN
45

48
To UPS
To PSU RACK4

Figure 4-60 Connecting DC Main

As shown in Figure 4-60:

47. DC MAIN CABLE,K-17 (502-40181-01) <D-sub 37pin>


・ Connect to MAIN connector of DC power supply, and screw it.

48. HV PS AC CABLE (502-40111-01)


・ Connect the round terminal to the front terminal board of DC power supply,
and screw it.

45. EARTH CABLE, #10 (502-24426-05)


・ Screw to the right side of base plate of DC Main.
・ (With a sticker nearby.)

M517-E383T 123
4.6.5 Connecting in PSU RACK 4

Make Sure the breaker of PSU RACK4 turns OFF before connection.

4.6.5.1 Connecting Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

・In the case of UPS made by APC


Add the expansion board "INTERFACE, AP9607 (074-81311-31)" to the expansion slot at
the rear panel of UPS as shown in Figure 4-61.
There are 4 DIP switches on the expansion board "INTERFACE, AP9607 (074-81311-31)".
Set all DIP switches to OFF.

ON

OFF
Expansion Board

DIP Switch

Figure 4-61 Add the Expansion Board to UPS

124 M517-E383T
Connect cables to the rear panel of UPS as shown in Figure 4-62.

UPS model:SU2200J UPS model:SUA2200JB

Basic Monitoring Ports


To PCU
Basic Monitoring Ports (34-d)+(34-e)
e) To PCU
(34-a) OUTPUT
OUTPUT C 100V 50/60Hz
100V 50/60Hz
A A
a)
(30-b)
B D
C (34-a)
To HV Main PS
Overcurrent Protection 48 Overcurrent Protection To PCU
Reset Button Reset Button
To DC Main
b)
INPUT INPUT
120V 50/60Hz To PSU 120V 50/60Hz To PSU
Transformer Transformer
(33-c) (33-c)

Figure 4-62 Connecting Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

UPS has over current protection. If more than one devices are connected
to one AC output, the detection circuit will detect the over current and
shut the power off. Connect the power cable as shown in Figure 4-61.

M517-E383T 125
Connect cables to the rear panel of UPS as shown in Figure 4-62:

48. HV PS AC CABLE(502-40111-01)
・ Connect to OUTPUT connector (A in Figure 4-62).

34-a. CODESET, KP300CLS16FS (511-15134):


・ Connect to OUTPUT connector (C in Figure 4-62).

34-e. SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW1SJ (074-81311-15)


・ Use the cable attached.
・ Connect to the left connecter on the expansion board "Interface,
AP9607 (074-81311-31)" at the rear panel of UPS, and screw it.

34-d. CABLE A, 09-2A-15M-2D (511-15196-15)


・ Connect to (34-e) using two spacers "SBA-305 (037-38785-18)",
and screw it.

CABLE A, 09-2A-15M-2D

Spacer SBA-305

SOFTWARE,SSPCBEW1SJ
(cable attached)

Figure 4-63 Connection Cable to UPS

126 M517-E383T
A seal "940-0020D" is put on the connector of (34-e) "SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW1SJ
(074-81311-15)", which is connected to the expansion board "INTERFACE, AP9607
(074-81311-31)". Check this seal before the connection not to mistake this cable for
"INTERFACE, AP9824LJ (074-81311-33)", which is connected to D-sub connector of UPS.
They are similar in shape.
A seal "940-0024C" is put on the connector of "INTERFACE, AP9824LJ (074-81311-33)",
which is used to connect UPS and Maintenance PC. This cable is built in IC so that the
wrong connection may cause the damage to the cable or UPS.

940-0020D

SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW1SJ (074-81311-15) (Cable attached)

M517-E383T 127
・In the case of UPS made by OMRON
Connect cables to the rear panel of UPS as shown in Figure 4-64.

To PS Ctrl To PCU
(33-b) (34-a)

To DC MAIN(48)

To PSU Trans
(33-c)

Figure 4-64 Connecting Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

UPS has over current protection. If more than one devices are
connected to one AC output, the detection circuit will detect the over
current and shut the power off. Connect the power cable as shown in
Figure 4-64.

128 M517-E383T
Connect cables to the rear panel of UPS as shown in Figure 4-64:

48. HV PS AC CABLE(502-40111-01)
・ Connect to OUTPUT connector (A in Figure 4-64).

34-a. CODESET, KP300CLS16FS (511-15134):


・ Connect to OUTPUT connector (C in Figure 4-64).

M517-E383T 129
4.6.5.2 Connecting PSU Transformer

Connect cable of UPS, power cable and earth cable as shown in Figure 4-65.

L100 L0 L100 L0
31-b

(L100) (L0)

31-a

Figure 4-65 Wiring on Output Terminal

Connect cables on output terminal as shown in Figure 4-65:


31-a. COOLER AC CABLE (532-24700-01):
・ Connect "L0" label connector to terminal with "L0" label in output terminal,
and screw it.
・ Connect "L100" label connector to terminal with "L100" label in output
terminal, and screw it.
・ Connect earth cable to ground terminal, and screw it.

31-b. EARTH CABLE, 11MT (532-24701-01):


・ Connect earth cable to ground terminal, and screw it

130 M517-E383T
Breaker of PSU RACK 4
Black

Red

240
230
220
Red
200
180
0
Black

Figure 4-66 Checking for Wiring on Power Supply Terminal

As shown in Figure 4-66:


BLACK CABLE:
・ Check the BLACK CABLE is connected to terminal with "0" label in power
supply terminal.
・ Check the BLACK CABLE is connected to the lower-left connector on the
breaker of PSU RACK 4 as one faces the front panel (no connector) of the
breaker.

RED CABLE:
・ Check the RED CABLE is connected to terminal with "200 / 220 / 230 / 240"
* label in power supply terminal.
・ Check the RED CABLE is connected to the lower-right connector on the
breaker of PSU RACK 4 as one faces the front panel (no connector) of the
breaker.

*The power voltage is different according to region.

M517-E383T 131
Black

Breaker of PSU RACK4


Red

Red
Black

(24)
(L) (N) To Distribution Board
(23) GND
To Distribution Board
Single phase 200V(50/60Hz)
*The power voltage is different according to region.

Figure 4-67 Wiring on Power Input Terminal

To avoid an accident, complete connecting PCU (refer to section 4.6.6


“Connecting PCU”) before connecting PSU transformer to Distribution
Board.

Connect cables in input terminal as shown in Figure 4-67:


23. AC CABLE2 CCC (502-25082-10):
・ Connect the white or sky blue cable to N terminal, and the black cable or the
brown cable to L terminal, and screw them. Connect the smaller terminal of
this cable to PSU transformer side.

24. EARTH CABLE (541-28173-07):


・ Connect to earth terminal board in PSU Transformer, and screw it.

132 M517-E383T
BLACK CABLE:
・ Check the BLACK CABLE is connected to terminal with "N/L0" label on
INPUT terminal board.
・ Check the BLACK CABLE is connected to the upper-left connector on the
breaker of PSU RACK 4 as one faces the front panel (no connector) of the
breaker.

RED CABLE:
・ Check the RED CABLE is connected to terminal with "L/L200" label on
INPUT terminal board.
・ Check the RED CABLE is connected to the upper-right connector on the
breaker of PSU RACK 4 as one faces the front panel (no connector) of the
breaker.

M517-E383T 133
4.6.6 Connecting PCU

The connection around PCU is shown below using PCU3. For PUC4 connection, refer to
“M517-2575(PCU4 Installation Manual)”.

4.6.6.1 Connecting PCU (Expansion Slot) and Units

Connect cables from other units to the rear panel of PCU as shown in Figure 4-68.
PCU4 does not have the connection cable to UPS.

To FLUO-2002
Board in X-ray High
37 Voltage Generator
Control Cabinet

To PS CTRL Board in
FPD Sub Cabinet
46
(Blue)

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

To FPD To UPS
34-d
43 36
To DAR-8000 Control Cabinet

Figure 4-68 Connection PCU and Other Units

134 M517-E383T
Connect cables to the rear panel of PCU as shown in Figure 4-68:
34-d. CABLE ASSY, 09-2A-15M-2D (511-15196-15):
・ Connect to D-Sub connector of PCI slot 1, and screw it.

36. CCD EXTERNAL CABLE (511-15030-11):


・ Connect to the connector of PCI slot 3, and screw it.

43. FIBER CABLE, FRAD (511-70170-01):


・ Connect to the connector of PCI slot 5.

46. CABLE, CA-9S MA15 (511-15197-15):


・ Connect to D-sub connector of PCI slot 7, and screw it.

37. IBS CABLE (502-22215-20):


・ Connect to the BNC connector of PCI slot 7.
When the PCU has three BNC connectors, connect to the center connector.
When the PCU has one BNC connector, connect to it.

To connect to X-ray High Voltage Generator Control Cabinet, refer to


“M517-E397 UD-DAR8000 Connection Kit Installation Manual”.

Insert the FIBER CABLE until it clicks and confirm that the connection is
fixed.

M517-E383T 135
4.6.6.2 Connecting PC Switch, Serial Cable and LAN to PCU

Connect PC switch, serial cable and LAN cable to the rear panel of PCU as shown in
Figure 4-69.
For PUC4 connector, refer to “M517-2575(PCU4 Installation Manual)”.

4 3 2 1

17
Rear panel of
PC switch.

35

To DAR-8000
Control Cabinet

To LAN (Connection for


Remote Maintenance)

Figure 4-69 Connecting PC Switch, Serial Cable and LAN to PCU

As shown in Figure 4-69:


17. KVM Cable (511-90311-01 Accessory of PC SWITCH) <1.2MT>:
・ Connect keyboard cable to keyboard connector on the rear panel of PCU.
・ Connect mouse cable to mouse connector on the rear panel of PCU.
・ Connect VGA cable to VGA output connector on the rear panel of PCU, and
screw it.
・ Connect keyboard cable to keyboard connector at "2" connector on the rear
panel of PC switch.
・ Connect mouse cable to mouse connector at "2" connector on the rear
panel of PC switch.
・ Connect VGA cable to VGA connector at "2" connector on the rear panel of
PC switch, and screw it.

35. COM CABLE (502-24312):


・ Connect to the COM1 connector of PCU, and screw it.

136 M517-E383T
LAN CABLE is connected as the remote maintenance option. Refer to
“M517-E429 DAR-8000 Remote Maintenance Installation Manual”

4.6.6.3 Mounting PCU Cover

Mount "COVER ASSY (503-65184)" attached to PCU as shown in Figure 4-70.


PCU4 does not have cover.

・ ・
・ ・

COVER ASSY

Figure 4-70 Mounting PCU Cover

The magnet is attached to “COVER ASSY (503-65184)” so that the


cover can be fixed to the metal part of PC.

M517-E383T 137
4.6.6.4 Connecting the Power Cable

Connect the Power Cable and Earth Cable to the rear panel of PCU as shown in Figure
4-71:

・ ・
34-a
・ ・
To UPS

COVER ASSY

Figure 4-71 Connecting the Power Cable

As shown in Figure 4-71:


34-a. CODESET, KP300CLS16FS (511-15134):
・ Connect to power connector on the rear panel of PCU.

138 M517-E383T
4.7 Wiring S-type FPD (For China)

This section describes how to connect FPD and peripheral equipments.


Refer to "M506-E327 REMOTE-CONTROLLED DIAGNOSTIC TABLE ZS-100I /
ZS-100IR INSTALLATION MANUAL" about FPD installation. Refer to "M517-2167
COOLING ASSY WPC-10 INSTALLATION MANUAL" about installation, operation and
adjustment of S-type FPD Cooling Unit.

4.7.1 FPD System (S-type FPD for China)


FPD system is composed of 4 units:
 17inch A FPD (S-type)
 Sub Cabinet
 PSU RACK 2
 PCU
Outline diagram of FPD system wiring and cable number is shown in Figure 4-72.
Connections of each unit are explained in detail in section 4.7 and after.
Section 4.7.4 Section 4.7.3 Section 4.7.2

29-a
29-b CN5
CONTROL 27-c
CN4 37pin
TB1 27-b
OUTPUT

DC Main DC CONV Box

32 30-a 44
30-b
J2 J3
J1
AC (N) (L) EXT.IN
17 inch A FPD
PS CTRL Board CN1 26-a
HV Main PS
26-b
Distribution Board Single Phase

33-a 33-b 43
200/220/230/240V 50/60Hz

Section 4.7.3 and 4.11


PSU
Transformer
40
31
23
Section 4.7.5
FPD Cooling Unit
24
33-c

UPS Sub Cabinet


34-a 34-d
34-c

Section 4.8
PSU RACK 2 DAR-8000 Control Cabinet PCU
DAR-8000 PC Selector
37

Refer to “UD-DAR8000 Connection Kit SGIM


X-ray Diagnostic Table Installation Manual (M517- E397)”
Control Cabinet
39 38

X-ray High Voltage Generator Fluo-2002


Control Cabinet

M517-E383T 139
Figure 4-72 Outline Diagram of FPD System Wiring

 17inch A FPD

FPD set on X-ray diagnostic table


Figure 4-73 17inch A FPD (S-type)

FPD is the precision apparatus and sensitive to temperature and


vibration. Please be very careful to handle FPD.

 Sub Cabinet

Heat Exchanger
The following equipments are in Sub
Cabinet:
High Voltage
Main PS  High voltage main PS
 DC CONV Box
 FPD cooling unit
DC CONV Box  Heat exchanger

Refer to the document attached to the

FPD Cooling Unit X-ray tube for the Heat exchanger


installation.

Figure 4-74 Inside of Sub Cabinet

140 M517-E383T
PSU RACK 2

Insulation
Transformer UPS The following equipments are in
Sub Cabinet:
 UPS
 PS CTRL Board
 PSU Transformer
 DC Main
 Wave Tail Cutting Unit
PS CTRL Board (SGC-10)*
 Starter (SA-61)*

DC Main
(*) They are options of X-ray
high-voltage generator.

Figure 4-75 Inside of PSU RACK 2

 PCU
PCU3 PCU4

Front Panel Rear Panel

Front Panel Rear panel

Figure 4-76 PCU

M517-E383T 141
4.7.2 Connecting FPD

4.7.2.1 Connecting 17inch A FPD (S-type)

Figure 4-77 FPD Rear Panel (S-type)

Connect the cables to the rear panel of FPD as shown in Figure 4-78.

To DC CONV Box
To HV Main PS
To PCU
44 27-b 27-c
43
Blue

CN1 CN2
(15pin) (25pin)

CN3
(37pin)

(37pin)

Figure 4-78 Connection on FPD Rear Panel

142 M517-E383T
Connect the cables to the rear panel of FPD as shown in Figure 4-78:

27-b. DC SENSE CABLE, 17(511-71026-12) <Mini-sub 15 pin>


・ Connect to CN1 connector (Mini-sub 15 pin) of (49) DC CONV CABLE 1, 17
(502-40194).

43. FIBER CABLE, FRAD (511-70170-01)


・ Connect to connector on the FPD real panel.

27-c. DC SENSE CABLE, 17(511-71026-13) <D-sub 25 pin>


・ Connect to CN2 connector (D-sub 25 pin) of (49) DC CONV CABLE 1, 17
(502-40194).

44. HV CABLE, K-17 (502-40255)


・ Connect to HV connector on the rear panel of FPD.

49. DC CONV CABLE 1, 17 (502-40194) <D-sub 37 pin> with CN3 label


・ Connect to 37 pin connector on the rear panel of FPD and screw it.

Insert the FIBER CABLE until it clicks and confirm that the connection is
fixed.

Insert the HV CABLE until it clicks and align the cut to prevent loose and
turn the connector.

M517-E383T 143
4.7.2.2 Connecting Water Cooling Hose

Refer to Section 4.11 "Connecting FPD and Water-Cooling Hose" about connection of
Water Cooling Hose.

Remove air bubble from the water-cooling hose and near the coolant
temperature to the set temperature of FPD Cooling Unit before
connecting FPD and FPD Cooling Unit with the water -cooling hose.
All wiring hove to be completed before this work. Ref er to section
4.11 “Connecting FPD and W ater-Cooling Hose” for steps of this
work.

After the wiring, cut the excess hose with 1 or 2 m left for work.

*NOTE
To FPD To FPD

*NOTE
Cut

NOTE:There two type of coupler, the male and the female.


Attach the same type of coupler as one before cutting the hose.

Remove the couplers from the cut hose and install them to the hose connected to FPD.
Refer to section 3 "Installation" in "M517-2167 FPD COOLING ASSY WPC-10
INSTALLATION MANUAL" for the coupler installation.

144 M517-E383T
4.7.3 Connecting in Sub Cabinet

4.7.3.1 Connecting DC CONV Box

Connect DC SENSE CABLE and DC MAIN CABLE to DC CONV Box as shown in Figure
4-79.

D-sub
37pin
29-b
To DC Main
D-sub
15pin

To FPD
D-sub
27-b 15pin ⑪ 11

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪

10
⑨ 9
Mini D-sub ⑧ 8
15pin ⑦ 7
29-a
⑥ 6
⑤ 5 To DC Main
④ 4
To FPD ③ 3
D-sub ② 2
25pin
27-c ① 1

Figure 4-79 Connecting DC CONV Box

M517-E383T 145
Connect DC SENSE CABLE as shown in Figure 4-79:

27-c. DC SENSE CABLE, 17 (511-71026-13) <D-sub 25 pin>


・ Connect to D-sub 25 pin connector, and screw it.

27-b. DC SENSE CABLE, 17 (511-71026-12) < Mini D-sub 15 pin >


・ Connect to Mini D-sub 15 pin connector, and screw it.

Connect DC MAIN CABLE as shown in Figure 4-79:

29-a. DC MAIN CABLE, 17 (511-71025-12) <Crimp contact>


・ Connect to the terminal block on DC CONV box, matching the number of
cables to those of the terminal block, and screw it.
29-b. DC MAIN CABLE, 17 (511-71025-11) <D-sub 37 pin>
・ Connect to D-sub 37 pin connector on DC CONV box and screw it.

146 M517-E383T
4.7.3.2 Connecting HV Main PS

Connect cables to HV Main PS as shown in Figure 4-80.

AC (N) AC (L)

White Black
EXT.IN Earth
To PS CTRL Board Green
in PSU RACK 2
30-a To FPD
44
To UPS
30-b
AC (N) (L)

Figure 4-80 Connecting HV Main PS

As shown in Figure 4-80:

30-a. HV PS CONTROL CABLE (511-74139-02)


・ Connect to EXT.IN terminal on HV Main PS, and screw it.

30-b. HV PS AC CABLE (511-74139-03)


・ Connect AC (N) connector to AC (N) terminal, and screw it.
・ Connect AC (L) connector to AC (L) terminal, and screw it.
・ Connect earth to the package of HV Main PS, and screw it attached to the
package.

44. HV CABLE, K-17 (502-40255)


・ Connect to HV terminal of HV Main PS.

Insert the HV CABLE until it clicks and align the cut to prevent loose and
turn the connector.

M517-E383T 147
4.7.3.3 Connecting FPD Cooling Unit

Connect Water Cooling Hose to FPD Cooling Unit as shown in Figure 4-81.

Raised
To PSU Transformer To PS CTRL Cut dot
40
in PSU RACK 2
(How to release the coupler)
(1) Turn the removable part toward “a” to
align the cut with raised.
26 26
(2) Slide the removable part toward “b” to
release the coupler.

Figure 4-81 Connecting Water Cooling Hose to FPD Cooling Unit

If the coolant blows out, around wires and devices would get wet and
electrical leakage may occur. Set a tarpaulin to keep them from water
before connecting water cooling Hose to FPD Cooling Unit . When
releasing coupler, cover them with cloth.

148 M517-E383T
As shown in Figure 4-81:

26. HOSE ASSY, WPC-10 (532-24696)


・ Close the coupler near the FPD.
・ Connect another coupler to cooling hose of FPD cooling unit.
40. Cooler Warning Cable (502-24346)
・ Connect to the connector of FPD cooling unit.

Insulation is fitted on one side of water -cooling hose. Connect this side of
hose to FPD cooling unit.

Refer to Section 3 "Installation" in "M517-2167 FPD COOLING ASSY WPC-10


INSTALLATION MANUAL" to fix the coupler and work for insulation.

M517-E383T 149
4.7.4 Connecting in PSU RACK 2

Make Sure the breaker of PSU RACK2 turns OFF before connection.

4.7.4.1 Connecting DC Main


Connect cables to DC Main as shown in Figure 4-82.

To DC CONV Box
To PS CTRL Board
29-b
32

F POWER CONTROL OUTPUT

TB1
FG R S

33-a

To UPS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

29-a
To DC CONV Box
Figure 4-82 Connecting DC Main

150 M517-E383T
Connect DC Main Unit as shown in Figure 4-82:
29-a. DC MAIN CABLE, 17 (511-71025-12) <Crimp contact>
・ Connect to the terminal block on DC Main, matching the number of cables to
those of the terminal block, and screw it.

29-b. DC MAIN CABLE, 17 (511-71025-11) <D-sub 37pin>


・ Connect to OUTPUT connector on DC Main, and screw it.

32. PS CTRL DC CABLE (101-28599)


・ Connect to CONTROL connector on DC Main, and screw it.

33-a. AC POWER CABLE (511-74150-01 Accessory of DC MAIN PS, 17)


・ Connect FG connector to FG connector on TB1, and screw it.
・ Connect R connector to R connector on TB1, and screw it.
・ Connect S connector to S connector on TB1, and screw it.

M517-E383T 151
4.7.4.2 Connecting Power Supply Control Board (PS CTRL Board)

Connect cables to Power Supply Control Board as shown in Figure 4-83.

To PCU To DC Main To HV Main PS To FPD Cooling Unit

34-c 32 30-a
40

J2 J3

J1
J8

CN1

33-b

To UPS
Figure 4-83 Connecting PS CTRL Board

152 M517-E383T
Connect cables to Power Supply Control Board as shown in Figure 4-83:
34-c. CABLE ASSY, 9S MA15 (511-15197-15)
・ Connect to J1 connector, and screw it.

32. PS CTRL DC CABLE (101-28599)


・ Connect to J2 connector, and screw it.

30-a. HV PS CONTROL CABLE (511-74139-02)


・ Connect to J3 connector, and screw it.

33-b. PS CTRL AC CABLE (101-28928)


・ Connect CN1 connector, and screw it.

40. Cooler Warning Cable (502-24346)


・ Connect to the J8 connector.

M517-E383T 153
4.7.4.3 Connecting Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

・In the case of UPS made by APC


Add the expansion board "INTERFACE, AP9607 (074-81311-31)" to the expansion slot at
the rear panel of UPS as shown in Figure 4-84.
There are 4 DIP switches on the expansion board "INTERFACE, AP9607 (074-81311-31)".
Set all DIP switches to OFF.

ON

OFF
Expansion Board

DIP Switch

Figure 4-84 Add the Expansion Board to UPS

Connect cables to the rear panel of UPS as shown in Figure 4-85.

UPS model:SU2200J UPS model:SUA2200JB


Basic Monitoring Ports

To PCU
Basic Monitoring Ports (34-d)+(34-e)
To PCU
(34-d)+(34-e) To PCU
(34-a) To HV Main PS
OUTPUT C OUTPUT
100V 50/60Hz To PS CTRL
A B A 100V 50/60Hz (30-b)
Board
(33-a) (33-b)
To DC Main (30-b)
D
B D (34-a)
To HV Main PS (33-a) To PCU
Overcurrent Protection C
Overcurrent Protection
Reset Button Reset Button
To DC Main
(33-b)
INPUT INPUT
To PS CTRL 120V 50/60Hz 120V 50/60Hz
To PSU To PSU
Board
Transformer Transformer
(33-c) (33-c)

Figure 4-85 Connecting UPS

154 M517-E383T
UPS has over current protection. If more than one devices are
connected to one AC output, the detection circuit will detect the over
current and shut the power off. Connect the power cable as shown in
Figure 4-80.

Connect cables to the rear panel of UPS as shown in Figure 4-85:

33-a. AC POWER CABLE (511-74150-01 Accessory of DC MAIN PS, 17)


・ Connect to OUTPUT connector (A in Figure 4-85).

33-b PS CTRL AC CABLE (101-28928)


・ Connect to OUTPUT connector (B in Figure 4-85).

34-a. CODESET, KP300CLS16FS (511-15134)


・ Connect to OUTPUT connector (C in Figure 4-85).

30-b. HV PS AC CABLE (511-74139-03)


・ Connect to OUTPUT connector (D in Figure 4-85).

34-e. SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW1SJ (074-81311-15)


・ Use the cable attached.
・ Connect to the left connecter on the expansion board "Interface,
AP9607 (074-81311-31)" at the rear panel of UPS, and screw it.

34-d. CABLE A, 09-2A-15M-2D (511-15196-15)


・ Connect to (34-e) using two spacers "SBA-305 (037-38785-18)",
and screw it.

M517-E383T 155
CABLE A, 09-2A-15M-2D

Spacer SBA-305

SOFTWARE,SSPCBEW1SJ
(cable attached)

Figure 4-86 Connection Cable to UPS

156 M517-E383T
A seal "940-0020D" is put on the connector of (34-e) "SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW1SJ
(074-81311-15)", which is connected to the expansion board "INTERFACE, AP9607
(074-81311-31)". Check this seal before the connection not to mistake this cable for
"INTERFACE, AP9824LJ (074-81311-33)", which is connected to D-sub connector of UPS.
They are similar in shape.
A seal "940-0024C" is put on the connector of "INTERFACE, AP9824LJ (074-81311-33)",
which is used to connect UPS and Maintenance PC. This cable is built in IC so that the
wrong connection may cause the damage to the cable or UPS.

940-0020D

SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW1SJ (074-81311-15) (Cable attached)

M517-E383T 157
・In the case of UPS made by OMRON
Connect cables to the rear panel of UPS as shown in Figure 4-89.

To PS Ctrl To PCU
(33-b) (34-a)

To DC MAIN(48)

To PSU Trans
(33-c)

Figure 4-87 Connecting Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

UPS has over current protection. If more than one devices are
connected to one AC output, the detection circuit will detect the over
current and shut the power off. Connect the power cable as shown in
Figure 4-89.

158 M517-E383T
Connect cables to the rear panel of UPS as shown in Figure 4-89:

48. HV PS AC CABLE(502-40111-01)
・ Connect to OUTPUT connector ((48) in Figure 4-89).

34-a. CODESET, KP300CLS16FS (511-15134):


・ Connect to OUTPUT connector ((34-a) in Figure 4-89).

M517-E383T 159
4.7.4.4 Connecting PSU Transformer

Connect cable of FPD Cooling Unit, power cable and earth cable as shown in Figure 4-88.

L100 L0 L100 L0
31-b

(L100) (L0)

31-a

Figure 4-88 Wiring on Output Terminal

Connect cables on output terminal as shown in Figure 4-88:


31-a. COOLER AC CABLE (532-24700-01):
・ Connect "L0" label connector to terminal with "L0" label in output terminal,
and screw it.
・ Connect "L100" label connector to terminal with "L100" label in output
terminal, and screw it.
・ Connect earth cable to ground terminal, and screw it.

31-b. EARTH CABLE, 11MT (532-24701-01):


・ Connect earth cable to ground terminal, and screw it

160 M517-E383T
.

Breaker of PSU RACK2


Black
Red

240
230
220
Red
200
180 Black
0

Figure 4-89 Checking for Wiring on Power Supply Terminal

As shown in Figure 4-89:


BLACK CABLE:
・ Check the BLACK CABLE is connected to terminal with "0" label in power
supply terminal.
・ Check the BLACK CABLE is connected to the lower-left connector on the
breaker of PSU RACK 2 as one faces the front panel (no connector) of the
breaker.

RED CABLE:
・ Check the RED CABLE is connected to terminal with "200 / 220 / 230 / 240"
* label in power supply terminal.
・ Check the RED CABLE is connected to the lower-right connector on the
breaker of PSU RACK 2 as one faces the front panel (no connector) of the
breaker.

*The power voltage is different according to region.

M517-E383T 161
Black
Breaker of PSU RACK2
Red

Red
Black

(24)
(L) (N) To Distribution Board
(23) GND
To Distribution Board
Single phase 200 / 220 / 230 / 240V*(50/60Hz)
*The power voltage is different according to region.
Figure 4-90 Wiring on Power Input Terminal

To avoid an accident, complete connecting PCU (refer to section 4.7.5


“Connecting PCU”) before connecting PSU transformer to Distribution
Board.

Connect cables in input terminal as shown in Figure 4-90:


23 AC CABLE2 CCC (502-25082-10):
・ Connect the white or sky blue cable to N terminal, and the black cable or the
brown cable to L terminal, and screw them. Connect the smaller terminal of
this cable to PSU transformer side.

24 EARTH CABLE (541-28173-07):


・ Connect to earth terminal board in PSU Transformer, and screw it.

BLACK CABLE:

162 M517-E383T
・ Check the BLACK CABLE is connected to terminal with "N/L0" label on
INPUT terminal board.
・ Check the BLACK CABLE is connected to the upper-left connector on the
breaker of PSU RACK 2 as one faces the front panel (no connector) of the
breaker.

RED CABLE:
・ Check the RED CABLE is connected to terminal with "L/L200" label on
INPUT terminal board.
・ Check the RED CABLE is connected to the upper-right connector on the
breaker of PSU RACK 2 as one faces the front panel (no connector) of the
breaker.

M517-E383T 163
4.7.5 Connecting PCU
The connection around PCU is shown below using PCU3. For PUC4 connection, refer to
“M517-2575(PCU4 Installation Manual)”.

4.7.5.1 Connecting PCU (Expansion Slot) and Units

Connect cables from other units to the rear panel of PCU as shown in Figure 4-91.
PCU4 does not have the connection cable to UPS.

To FLUO-2002
Board in X-ray High
37 Voltage Generator
Control Cabinet

To PS CTRL Board in
PSU RACK 2
34-c

(Blue)

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

To UPS
To FPD 34-d
43 36
To DAR-8000 Control Cabinet

Figure 4-91 Connection PCU and Other Units

164 M517-E383T
Connect cables to the rear panel of PCU as shown in Figure 4-91:
34-d. CABLE ASSY, 09-2A-15M-2D (511-15196-15):
・ Connect to D-Sub connector of PCI slot 1, and screw it.

36. CCD EXTERNAL CABLE (511-15030-11):


・ Connect to the connector of PCI slot 3, and screw it.

43. FIBER CABLE, FRAD (511-70170-01):


・ Connect to the connector of PCI slot 5.

34-c. CABLE, CA-9S MA15 (511-15197-15):


・ Connect to D-sub connector of PCI slot 7, and screw it.

37. IBS CABLE (502-22215-20):


・ Connect to the BNC connector of PCI slot 7.
When the PCU has three BNC connectors, connect to the center connector.
When the PCU has one BNC connector, connect to it.

To connect to X-ray High Voltage Generator Control Cabinet, refer to


“M517-E397 UD-DAR8000 Connection Kit Installation Manual”.

Insert the FIBER CABLE until it clicks and confirm that the connection is
fixed.

M517-E383T 165
4.7.5.2 Connecting PC Switch, Serial Cable and LAN to PCU

Connect PC switch, serial cable and LAN cable to the rear panel of PCU as shown in
Figure 4-92.
For PUC4 connector, refer to “M517-2575(PCU4 Installation Manual)”.

4 3 2 1

17
Rear panel of
PC switch.

35

To DAR-8000
Control Cabinet

To LAN (Connection for


Remote Maintenance)

Figure 4-92 Connecting PC Switch, Serial Cable and LAN to PCU

As shown in Figure 4-92:


17. KVM Cable (511-90311-01 Accessory of PC SWITCH) <1.2MT>:
・ Connect keyboard cable to keyboard connector on the rear panel of PCU.
・ Connect mouse cable to mouse connector on the rear panel of PCU.
・ Connect VGA cable to VGA output connector on the rear panel of PCU, and
screw it.
・ Connect keyboard cable to keyboard connector at "2" connector on the rear
panel of PC switch.
・ Connect mouse cable to mouse connector at "2" connector on the rear
panel of PC switch.
・ Connect VGA cable to VGA connector at "2" connector on the rear panel of
PC switch, and screw it.

35. COM CABLE (502-24312):


・ Connect to the COM1 connector of PCU, and screw it.

166 M517-E383T
LAN CABLE is connected as the remote maintenance option. Refer to
“M517-E429 DAR-8000 Remote Maintenance Installation Manual”

4.7.5.3 Mounting PCU Cover

Mount "COVER ASSY (503-65184)" attached to PCU as shown in Figure 4-93.


PCU4 does not have cover.

・ ・
・ ・

COVER ASSY

Figure 4-93 Mounting PCU Cover

The magnet is attached to “COVER ASSY (503-65184)” so that the


cover can be fixed to the metal part of PC.

M517-E383T 167
4.7.5.4 Connecting the Power Cable and Earth Cable to PCU

Connect the Power Cable and Earth Cable to the rear panel of PCU as shown in Figure
4-94:

・ ・
34-a
・ ・
To UPS

COVER ASSY

Figure 4-94 Connecting the Power Cable and Earth Cable to PCU

As shown in Figure 4-94:


34-a. CODESET, KP300CLS16FS (511-15134):
・ Connect to power connector on the rear panel of PCU.

168 M517-E383T
4.8 Wiring DAR-8000 Control Cabinet

4.8.1 Removing Rear Panel


As shown steps below, remove the rear panel in DAR-8000 control cabinet.

1) As shown in Figure 4-95, remove the side cover in DAR-8000 control cabinet by
unscrewing 4 screws at the rear face of DAR-8000 control cabinet.

Screws
s

Figure 4-95 DAR-8000 Control Cabinet / Rear Face

2) As shown in Figure 4-96, pull out the side cover in the direction of an arrow A
holding up in the direction of an arrow B. The side cover is removed in the direction of
an arrow C.

Figure 4-96 Direction of Removing Side Cover

M517-E383T 169
3) As shown in Figure 4-97, remove the opposite side cover as well.

Figure 4-97 Removing Side Cover

4) As shown in Figure 4-98, unscrew 6 screws of the rear panel.

Figure 4-98 Rear Panel

170 M517-E383T
5) As shown in Figure 4-99, pull out the rear panel, so that rail of rear panel gets
hung up. Please do not pull out the rear panel completely.

Fixed by hook

Figure 4-99 Pulling out Rear Panel

Cable between rear panel and PC is still connected. Please be careful


to pull out the rear panel.

M517-E383T 171
4.8.2 Connecting Earth Cable

As shown in Figure 4-100, connect the earth cable.

5
Figure 4-100 Connecting Earth Cable

As shown in Figure 4-100:

5. EARTH CABLE, #10 (502-24426-01):


・ Connect to the earth terminal board in DAR-8000 control cabinet.

172 M517-E383T
4.8.3 Connecting CCD OUTSIDE CABLE
Connect CCD OUTSIDE CABLE as shown in Figure 4-101.

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

36
Figure 4-101 Connecting CCD OUTSIDE CABLE

36. CCD EXTERNAL CABLE (511-15030-11):


・ Connect to the connector of PCI slot 1 (PCU I/F Board) at the rear face of
PC chassis (indicated by circle on picture), and screw it.

The destination slot for the CCD External cable depends on the type
of DAR-8000 cabinet. Check the slot by referring Appendix H-1
“Difference in Expansion Slot”.

M517-E383T 173
4.8.4 Connecting Video Cable (Option)

When the video cable is connected here, the settings in section 5.2.2.2
“Setting Resolution for Two Monitors” are needed. If the settings are not
done, the mouse cursor will disappear from the first monitor, and the
operation will be impossible.

As shown in Figure 4-102 and Figure 4-103, to connect reference monitor (option),
connect between the rear face of PC chassis and inside of the rear panel with video cable.

VGA IN 1 VGA IN 2

20

Figure 4-102 Connecting Video Cable (Rear Panel Side)

As shown in Figure 4-102:


20. CABLE, KB-CHD1507K (088-50905-10):
・ Connect video cable to connecter with "VGA IN 2" label, and screw it.

The destination slot for the video cable depends on the type of
DAR-8000 cabinet. Check the slot by referring Appendix H-1
“Difference in Expansion Slot”.

174 M517-E383T
7
6
20 5
4
3
2
1

Figure 4-103 Connecting Video Cable (PC Chassis at Rear Face)

As shown in Figure 4-103:


20. CABLE, KB-CHD1507K (088-50905-10):
・ Connect video cable to analog VGA connector in AGP Slot 7 (D-Sub 15 pin
female (indicated by circle on picture)) at the rear face of PC chassis, and
screw it.

M517-E383T 175
4.8.5 Connecting Serial Cable

6
7

(35)

To PCU

Figure 4-104 Connecting Serial Cable

As shown in Figure 4-104:


35. COM CABLE (502-24312):
・ Connect to the left connector (COM3) of the expansion serial base on the
expansion slot 6 on the rear face of PC chassis, and screw it.

The destination slot for the serial cable depends on the type of
DAR-8000 cabinet. Check the slot by referring Appendix H-1
“Difference in Expansion Slot”.

176 M517-E383T
4.8.6 Connecting KVM Cable, USB Memory and LAN Cable

4.8.6.1 Splitting the KVM Cable

The keyboard and mouse are connected to PC switch using "16. KVM CABLE (1.8m)
(511-90311-01 Accessory of PC SWITCH)" attached to PC switch.
This cable does not reach to the keyboard / mouse connector inside of the PC cabinet and
video connector at the rear panel of the PC cabinet. Split this cable as shown in Figure
4-105 to reach to connectors before connection.

1.8M

female male

PC
0.6M Cabinet
加工

PC Switch side
Side

Figure 4-105 Splitting KVM Cable

1) Check the male connector of (16) KVM CABLE attached to PC switch. (The male
connecter goes to the cabinet.)
2) Split the cable from the male side in the direction of the black arrow in Figure 4-105.
Split 0.6 m from the male connector.

The male connector goes to the PC cabinet and the female connector
goes to PC Switch. Check the connector before splitting.

M517-E383T 177
Split slowly the connection part of the video cable and keyboard/mouse
cable. If you do not, the cable coating is cut and the electric wire will be
damaged.

4.8.6.2 Connecting KVM Cable, USB Memory and LAN Cable

To on-site LAN port


16 for DICOM

21 LAN Cable
22 USB EXTENSION CABLE

USB Memory

Figure 4-106 Connecting KVM Cable, USB Memory and LAN Cable

As shown in Figure 4-106:

16 KVM Cable (511-90311-01 Accessory of PC SWITCH) <1.8M>


・ Pass the cable through the cable hole on the rear panel and connect the
keyboard connector of PC side to the keyboard connector on the rear face of
PC chassis.
・ Pass the cable through the cable hole and connect the mouth connector of
PC side to the mouth connector on the rear face of PC chassis.

22 USB MEMORY WITH USB EXTENSION CABLE (511-78239-04 Accessory of


DAR-8000)

178 M517-E383T
・ Pass the cable through the cable hole on the rear panel and to the USB
connector on the rear face of PC chassis.
・ Connect the USB Memory to another terminal of the cable outside the
cabinet.

21 CABLE, LD-CT/BU10 (088-81104-15)


・ Pass the cable through the cable hole on the rear panel and connect to the
LAN connector of the expansion slot on the rear face of PC chassis.
・ Connect another terminal of the cable to an on-site LAN port for DICOM.

The LAN cable is for DICOM communication. Connect the LAN cable to
the LAN card added to Slot 4. The LAN connector of PC is for the
remote maintenance. The network settings in section 6 is described on
the basis that the LAN card added to Slot 4 is used for DICOM.

On-site HUB and Port are not included in DAR-8000 component.

The destination slot for the LAN cable depends on the type of
DAR-8000 cabinet. Check the slot by referring Appendix H-1
“Difference in Expansion Slot”.

M517-E383T 179
4.8.7 Connecting Scan Converter Cable (Option)
As shown in Figure 4-107, connect the scan converter cable.

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Figure 4-107 Connecting Scan Converter Cable

As shown in Figure 4-107:

Scan Converter Cable


・ Connect to connector of PCI slot 6 at the rear face of PC chassis. Connect
to the very right one (indicated by circle on picture) towards 3 rows of
coaxial connectors in PCI slot 6.

Scan converter cable and VTR are not included in DAR -8000f
components. Please prepare appropriate cable according to the
shape of connector.

To enable the scan converter function, please refer to “c) Set system
option parameter” in Section 6.3.1 “Setting System Configuration”.

180 M517-E383T
The image area output through the scan converter is 1024 × 960
pixels of 1024 X 1024 pixels displayed in the DAR-8000f monitor. The
part of the image, which is displayed in 32 lines at the top and
bottom, is cut.

The destination slot for the Scan Converter cable depends on the
type of DAR-8000 cabinet. Check the slot by referring Appendix H-1
“Difference in Expansion Slot”.

M517-E383T 181
4.8.8 Mounting Rear Panel
Mount the rear panel according to opposite step in section 4.8.1 "Removing Rear Panel".

182 M517-E383T
4.8.9 Connecting PC Switch
4.8.9.1 Connection for Type 1

When one monitor is used, the main monitor in the control room is switched to operate
DAR-8000f and PCU. Figure 4-108 shows the connection in this case.

MONITOR MONITOR

REF1 MAIN1

Rear panel of PC Switch REF2 MAIN2

4 3 2 1

16

Figure 4-108 Connecting PC Switch

As shown in Figure 4-108:

16 KVM Cable (511-90311-01 Accessory of PC SWITCH) <1.8M>


・ Connect the video connector of PC side to the connector with "MAIN1" label,
and screw it.
・ Connect the mouse connector of PC Switch side to the mouse connector at
"1" connector on the rear panel of PC Switch.
・ Connect the keyboard connector of PC Switch side to the keyboard
connector at "1" connector on the rear panel of PC Switch.
・ Connect the video connector of PC Switch side to the video connector at "1"
connector on the rear panel of PC Switch, and screw it.

M517-E383T 183
4.8.9.2 Connection for Type 2 and 3

When two monitors are used, the reference monitor in the control room is switched to
operate DAR-8000f and PCU. Figure 4-109 shows the connection in this case.

MONITOR MONITOR

REF1 MAIN1

Rear panel of PC Switch REF2 MAIN2

4 3 2 1

16

Figure 4-109 Connecting PC Switch

As show in Figure 4-109:

16 KVM Cable (511-90311-01 Accessory of PC SWITCH) <1.8M>


・ Connect the video connector of PC side to the connector with "REF1" label,
and screw it.
・ Connect the mouse connector of PC Switch side to the mouse connector at
"1" connector on the rear panel of PC Switch.
・ Connect the keyboard connector of PC Switch side to the keyboard
connector at "1" connector on the rear panel of PC Switch.
・ Connect the video connector of PC Switch side to the video connector at "1"
connector on the rear panel of PC Switch, and screw it.

184 M517-E383T
4.8.10 Connecting Monitor
4.8.10.1 Connection for Type 1

When one monitor is used, the main monitor in the control room is switched to operate
DAR-8000f and PCU. Figure 4-110 shows the connection in this case.

Main Monitor
In the Control Room

Rear panel of PC Switch 13

4 3 2 1 12

MONITOR MONITOR

REF1 MAIN1
16

REF2 MAIN2
9
To In-room
Main Monitor
(option)

Figure 4-110 Connection for One Monitor

M517-E383T 185
As shown in Figure 4-110:

For the connection of the main monitor in the control room:


12. CABLE, KB-D315K (088-50905-12)*:
・ Connect monitor power cable to power connector with "MONITOR" label on
rear panel.

13. CABLE, KB-5BNC2K (088-50905-03):


・ Connect the video cable to the video output connector on the rear panel of
PU switch, and screw it.
When you use the LCD monitor (G11-S) manufactured by NANAO, connect the
cable attached to the monitor to the video output connecter, and screw it.

For the connection of the in-room main monitor (option):


9. CABLE ASSY, 5BNC/HD15P-20 (088-50528-01):
・ Connect to the connector with "MAIN2" label on rear panel, and screw it.

* "071-60826-01 CORD SET, KP-1601AH+KS-31A* 2.4M" may be shipped


instead of "088-50905-12 CABLE, KB-D315K".

When you use the LCD monitor (G11-S) manufactured by NANAO, connect the
cable, AS31-09010009 (070-03621-02), to the connector with "MAIN2" label on
rear panel, and screw it.

186 M517-E383T
4.8.10.2 Connection for Type 2 and 3

When two monitors are used, the reference monitor in control room is switched to operate
DAR-8000f and PCU. Figure 4-111 shows the connection in this case.

Reference Monitor in
the Control Room.

Rear panel of PC Switch 15 14

4 3 2 1

12
MONITOR MONITOR

To Main
monitor in the
16 REF1 MAIN1
Control Room
Main Monitor
13
REF2 MAIN2
11 9

To In-room Reference To In-room


Monitor (OPTION) Main Monitor
(OPTION)

Figure 4-111 Connection for Two Monitors

M517-E383T 187
As shown in Figure 4-111:

For the connection of the main monitor in the control room:


12. CABLE, KB- D315K (088-50905-12)*:
・ Connect monitor power cable to power connector with "MONITOR" label on
rear panel.

13. CABLE, KB-5BNC2K (088-50905-03):


・ Connect the video cable to the connector with "MAIN1" label on the rear
panel, and screw it.

・ When you use the LCD monitor (G11-S) manufactured by NANAO, connect
the cable attached to the monitor to connector with "MAIN1" label on the
rear panel, and screw it.
.

For the connection of the in-room main monitor (option):


9. CABLE ASSY, 5BNC/HD15P-20 (088-50528-01):
・ Connect to the connector with "MAIN2" label on rear panel, and screw it.

・ When you use the LCD monitor manufactured by NANAO, connect the
cable, AS31-09010009 (070-03621-02), to the connector with "MAIN2" label
on rear panel, and screw it.

For the connection of the reference monitor in the control room:


14. CABLE, KB- D315K (088-50905-12)*:
・ Connect monitor power cable to power connector with "MONITOR" label on
rear panel.

15. CABLE, KB-5BNC2K (088-50905-03):


・ Connect to the video output connector on the rear panel of PC switch, and
screw it.

・ When you use the LCD monitor (G11-S) manufactured by NANAO, connect
the cable attached to the monitor to the video output connector on the rear
panel of PC switch, and screw it.

188 M517-E383T
For the connection of the in-room reference monitor:
11. CABLE ASSY, 5BNC/HD15P-20 (088-50528-01):
・ Connect the video cable of in-room monitor to the connector with "REF2"
label on the rear panel, and screw it.

* "071-60826-01 CORD SET, KP-1601AH+KS-31A* 2.4M" may be shipped


instead of "088-50905-12 CABLE, KB-D315K".

When you use the LCD monitor (G11-S) manufactured by NANAO, connect the
cable, AS31-09010009 (070-03621-02), to the connector with "REF2" label on
rear panel, and screw it.

M517-E383T 189
4.8.11 Connecting Mouse / Keyboard Cable

As shown in Figure 4-112, connect mouse cable and keyboard cable.

1 2 3 4

18 19

Keyboard Mouse

Figure 4-112 Connecting Mouse and Keyboard

As shown in Figure 4-112:

19. MOUSE CABLE (Attached to the DAR-8000 cabinet):


・ Connect to the mouse connector on the front panel of PC switch via
USB-PS/2 convert connector.

18. KEYBOARD, PD-KB200W/P (088-50650-02 or KEYBOARD, ACK-595-ROHS


(088-50925-01):
・ Connect to the keyboard connector on the front panel of PC switch.

190 M517-E383T
4.8.12 Connecting Power Cable
Connect the power cable as shown in Figure 4-113.

GEN POWER

3
4
Figure 4-113 Connecting Power Cable

As shown in Figure 4-113:

3. CABLE, Power Cont PC (502-24413-05)


・ Connect to the connector with "GEN" label.

4. CABLE, AC DAR-TR (502-24415-05)


・ Connect to the connector with "POWER" label.

M517-E383T 191
4.9 Connection UD150B-40 and ZS-100I

4.9.1 Connecting GRID Control Cable

Connect the GRID CONT CABLE as shown in Figure 4-114.

GRID CONT Board

SGIM Board

CN2 CN9
Shield clamp

39

Figure 4-114 Connecting GRID Control Cable

As shown in Figure 4-114:

39 GRID CONT CABLE (502-24127-20)


・ Connect the D-Sub connector side of this cable to the "CN2" on SGIM board,
and screw it. (SGIM board is in UD150B-40 cabinet.)

192 M517-E383T
・ Connect the flat connector side of this cable to the "CN9" on GRID CONT
board in ZS-100I Main Cabinet.

As shown in the below photo, the GRID CONT cable (502-24127-20) has
two types: with the sheath processing, and without the sheath processing.

Wth Sheath processing

Without Sheath processing

For the cable with the sheath processing (in the above photo), fix the
copper foiled portion of the sheath of the cable to the screw at the lower
right of "CN9" with the clamp, AL3 (P/N 072-60372-02), as shown in
Figure 4-114.

For the cable without the sheath processing (in the below photo), connect
the cable to "CN9", and the clamp is not used.

M517-E383T 193
4.9.2 Connecting Cable for Auto Calibration Cable

Connect the SGIM FS control cable as shown in Figure 4-115.

SGIM board CN7

The lower right part of


FLUO-2002 board

L100

SP1 F

Figure 4-115 Connecting SGIM FS Control Cable

As shown in Figure 4-115:

38 SGIM FS CONTROL CABLE (502-24701-02)


・ Connect to the "CN7" on SGIM board.
・ Connect to "L100", "F" and "SP1" terminal at the lower right part of
FLUO-2002 board, and screw it.

194 M517-E383T
4.9.3 Connecting the Injector Cable

Connect the Injector cable as shown in Figure 4-116.

X-ray High Volt age Generat or


Control Cabinet DAR I/F Substr ate

×1termin al
5pin 6pin

Figure 4-116 Connecting the Injector Cable

As shown in Figure 4-116

41 Injector Cable (502-25063)


・ Connect to the 5pin and 6pin on the ×1 terminal , and screw them.
・ Connect another terminal of the cable to the injector.
(For the connection of the injector side, refer to the manual of the injector.)

M517-E383T 195
4.9.4 Connecting the Dosimeter

Connect the area dosimeter as shown in Figure 4-117.

The area dosimeter is not option for DAR-8000f. Only M4 Area


Dosimeter manufactured by DIAMENTOR is supported.

SGIM board

Area Dosimeter

CN9

Connector Connector

RS232C
D-Sub 9pin Straight connection D-Sub 9pin
female female

Refer to Appendix B-27 "Setting for Connecting Dosimeter" for the setting of the area
dosimeter display.

Figure 4-117 Connecting the Area Dosimeter

196 M517-E383T
4.10 Wiring Intercom

Install the intercom system (XTV INTERPHONE) according to M501-E384 "XTV


INTERPHONE Installation Manual".

Connect the power cable to the ROUT1、ROUT2、E terminal in the power transformer as
shown in Figure 4-118, and screw them.

To intercom system

Figure 4-118 Connecting Intercom

M517-E383T 197
4.11 Connecting FPD and Water-Cooling Hose

Prior to connect FPD and FPD Cooling Unit with the water cooling hose, remove air bubble
in the water cooling hose and bring the coolant temperature as close as possible to the
preset temperature of FPD Cooling Unit.
To do this, circulate the coolant more than 30 minutes. Connect the FPD Cooling Unit and
the water cooling hose circularly as shown in Figure 4-119 and turn the FPD cooling unit
ON. Keep FPD cooling unit power on more than 30 minutes.

Check the FPD Cooling Unit and the water cooling hose are arranged circularly as shown
in Figure 4-119.

To PSU
Transformer

Insulation

Figure 4-119 Connecting Water Cooling Hose to FPD Cooling Unit

198 M517-E383T
4.11.1 Adjusting FPD Cooling Unit

Adjust FPD Cooling Unit according to "M517-2167 FPD COOLING ASSY WPC-10
INSTALLATION MANUAL".

Check the power as follow before turning FPD cooling unit ON.

1) Ensure that UPS is turned OFF.

Operating only FPD Cooling Unit, it is unnecessary to t urn other devices


ON.

2) Turn on breaker of Distribution Board and check that "200 / 220 / 230 / 240"* supplied
to the power supply terminal in PSU Transformer with tester.

3) Check that "100V" is supplied from the power output terminal in PSU Transformer with
tester.

To turn FPD Cooling Unit ON, turn on the breaker on the front panel of
FPD Cooling Unit. Please refer to section 1. “General” in “M517-2167 FPD
COOLING ASSY WPC-10 INSTALLATION MANUAL” for more details.

*The power voltage is different according to region.

M517-E383T 199
4.11.2 Connecting FPD and Water Cooling Hose

To connect FPD and he water cooling hose, follow steps below:

1) Turn OFF the breaker on the front panel of FPD Cooling Unit.

2) Turn OFF the breaker of Distribution Board.

Turn Off all breaker of Distribution Board to prevent electric leakage.


After turning breaker OFF, wait for a few minutes for discharge from
PSU Transformer and FPD Cooling Unit and then start connection.

200 M517-E383T
3) Connect FPD and water cooling hose as shown in Figure 4-120.

Original FPD S-type FPD

(26) (26)
(26) (26)

a
Raised Dot
Curt

(How to release the coupler)


To (1) Turn the removable part toward “a” to To
FPD Cooling FPD Cooling
Unit align the cut with raised dot. Unit
(2) Slide the removable part toward “b” to
release the coupler.

Figure 4-120 Connecting Water Cooling Hose

If the coolant blows out, around wires and devices would get wet and
electrical leakage may occur. Set a tarpaulin to keep them from water
before connecting water cooling Hose to FPD Cooling Unit . When
releasing coupler, cover them with cloth.

M517-E383T 201
As shown in Figure 4-120:

26. HOSE ASSY, WPC-10 (532-24696)


・ Release coupler and Connect to the water cooling hose of FPD.

Refer to Section 3 "Installation" in "M517-2167 FPD COOLING ASSY WPC-10


INSTALLATION MANUAL" to fix the coupler at FPD side and work for insulation.

Connecting FPD and water cooling hose must be promptly finished. If


much coolant leaks out from hose and bubbles enter the hose, coolant
temperature may be out of setting temperature. Repeat steps in section
4.11.1 “Adjusting FPD Cooling Unit” to reset coolant temperature.

202 M517-E383T
4.12 Confirmation

Check again all units and breaker is OFF. Then turn the breaker of each unit ON, following
steps below. Check the input voltage to PSU transformer and DAR-8000 transformer box
with tester and normal operation within rated voltage.

1) Turn breakers of all distribution board ON.

2) Turn the breaker in PSU RACK 2/4 ON.

3) Turn the breaker on FPD cooling unit ON to check the normal operation.

4) Turn UPS power ON and check the start of UPS charge and the normal operation.

Figure 4-121

5) Check PSU transformer in PSU RACK 2/4 supplies "100V" with tester.

6) Check DAR-8000 transformer box connected to DAR-8000 control cabinet is powered


with "200 / 220 / 230 / 240 V"* and supplies "100V" with tester.

No need to turn FPD cooling unit, UPS and DAR -8000 power transformer
OFF after confirming above. Because PCU and DAR-8000 control cabinet
will start up in section 5.1 “Startup DAR-8000f System and Settings (1)”
and section 5.2 “Startup DAR-8000f System and Settings (2)”.

*The power voltage is different according to region.

M517-E383T 203
4.13 Inverting the UPS polarity (for combination of BN-220T and
PCU3)

In case of using BN-220T(OMRON) and PCU3, you should invert the UPS polarity as
follows.

(1) Turn on the PSU RACK and press the UPS power switch.

(2) The following status will be shown. If the window panel is dark, press the enter key (lower
right button) and then the panel becomes bright.

204 M517-E383T
(3) Press enter key, and select the following item and press enter again.

(4) The following status will be shown. Select the following item and press enter again.

M517-E383T 205
(5) The following status will be shown. Select the following item and press enter again.

(6) The following status will be shown. Select the following item and press enter again.

206 M517-E383T
(7) Press [ESC] many times, then the following menu will be shown. Select the following item
and press enter.

(8) The following status will be shown. Select the following item and press enter again.

M517-E383T 207
(9) The following status will be shown. Select the following item and press enter again.

(10) The following status will be shown. Select “BU” and invert the setting (use enter,
UP/Down button). Next, do one more for “BL”. (The following screen is final condition of
status)

208 M517-E383T
(11) Press [ESC] many times and then the following menu will be shown.

M517-E383T 209
4.14 Connecting Side Station (Option)

4.14.1 Connecting for Type 1


Type 1 does not require the connection between devices.
For the connection for Side Station, refer to M517-E451 "Side Station Installation Manual".

4.14.2 Connecting for Type 2

Rear panel of Side Station

Rear panel of PC Switch

4 3 2 1

42

Analog Connector

Figure 4-122

42. KVM Cable (511-90311-01 Accessory of PC SWITCH) <1.8MT>:


・ Connect keyboard cable to keyboard connector on the rear panel of Side
Station.
・ Connect mouse cable to mouse connector on the rear panel of Side Station.
・ Connect VGA cable to VGA output connector on the analog terminal of Side
Station, and screw it.
・ Connect keyboard cable to keyboard connector at "3" connector on the rear
panel of PC switch.
・ Connect mouse cable to mouse connector at "3" connector on the rear

210 M517-E383T
panel of PC switch.
・ Connect VGA cable to VGA connector at "3" connector on the rear panel of
PC switch, and screw it.

For the connection of other cables connected to Side Station, refer to M517-E451 "Side
Station Installation Manual".

4.14.3 Connecting for Type 3


Type 3 does not require the connection between devices.
For the connection for Side Station, refer to M517-E451 "Side Station Installation Manual".

M517-E383T 211
This page is intentionally left blank.

212 M517-E383T
5 Settings

5.1 Startup DAR-8000f System and Settings (1)

5.1.1 Startup PCU

Start the DAR-8000 Control Cabinet prior to starting the PCU. If starting
the PCU prior to starting the DAR, depending on the version of Xcat, HV
and DC will be not turned on, and the PCU will fail to start up.

1) Turn on power switch at the front of PCU.

2) Switch the monitor display to the PCU display using PC Switch.

Refer to section 2.6 “PC Switch” in “M517-E060 DAR-8000f Operation


Manual” about PC Switch operation.

3) Set Xcat of PCU by referring to section 5.1.2 "Setting Xcat (software for PCU control)
and Temperature Monitor (software for monitoring temperature)". Then turn ON DC
main in PSU RACK 2 (or Sub Cabinet) and HV Main (HV) in Sub Cabinet by operating
Xcat.

M517-E383T 213
5.1.2 Setting Xcat (software for PCU control) and Temperature Monitor
(software for monitoring temperature)

Xcat is the software used to control PCU and take acquisition images of FPD.
Temperature Monitor is the software used to monitor and display the live temperature of
FPD and record the temperature at specified interval.
This section describes the basic settings of Xcat and recording interval of FPD
temperature.

5.1.2.1 Checking Settings with Xcat Config

Before starting Xcat, check FPD and other settings with Xcat Config.

1) Start "Xcat Config" from the start menu.

Figure 5-1 Xcat Config Start

214 M517-E383T
2) When the "XcatConfig" screen is displayed. Chack that settings in the table below has
been set correctly in the screen.

Figure 5-2 Xcat Config screen

(MAIN-17)
MAIN Panel MAIN-17
Cooler Type Water
Power Type HV-10S
Dew Control Disable

(MAIN-S17)
MAIN Panel MAIN-K17
Cooler Type Water
Power Type HV-20S
(or HV-10S)
Dew Control Disable

M517-E383T 215
5.1.2.2 Startup Xcat

Turn PCU ON and the system is automatically logged on with user "administrator" and
Xcat starts automatically. "Xcat" window is displayed.

Figure 5-3 Xcat window

If DC power of FPD is OFF when Xcat starts, mouse cursor will be hourglass
icon for 1 or 2 minutes.

Xcat also starts from the Start menu. Click [Start], point to [All Programs]-[Shimadzu
PCU Tools] - [Xcat].

Figure 5-4 Windows® Start Menu

216 M517-E383T
5.1.2.3 Startup Temperature Monitor

Turn PCU ON and the system is automatically logged on with user "administrator" and
Temperature Monitor starts automatically. "TempMonit" window is displayed.

Figure 5-5 Temp Monit window

Temperature Monitor also starts from the Start menu. Click [Start], point to [All Programs],
- [Shimadzu PCU Tools]-[Temperature Monitor].

Figure 5-6 Windows® Start Menu

M517-E383T 217
5.1.2.4 Read FPD Specific Information

1) On Tool menu of Xcat, click [Tool], and then click [All Load].

Figure 5-7 [Tool]-[All Load]

2) Click [FPD Specific Information] to select **.cb1 file in the CD-ROM.

218 M517-E383T
Figure 5-8 "All Load" window

3) Clear [Image Quality Information].


4) Click [OK] button.
5) When the "All Load Complete" dialog appears, click [OK] button.

Figure 5-9 "All Load Complete" dialog

6) Exit the Xcat.

In order to read the c099.sif data in the memory of PCU, exit and restart
the Xcat..

7) Click [Start], point to [All Programs]-[Shimadzu PCU Tools]-[Xcat].


Xcat will be started.

M517-E383T 219
5.1.2.5 Setting and Confirmation Options

1) On Tool menu of Xcat, click [Options], and then click each tab on "Options" window.

Figure 5-10 Options window

2) Set each items following list below.


Tab Name Setting item Settings
Capture Frame sync Ext
Panel blanking Ext
Calib Offset Check
Gain Check
Defect Check
Data line Check
Lag Check
Line noise Clear the check
Line noise 2 This setting cannot be
changed.
Data line (opt.) Check
UD This setting cannot be
changed.
Enable background calibration Check
EVOLVE Enable remote control via CCD-I/F Check
Enable remote control via RS232C Check

220 M517-E383T
Figure 5-11 Options Screen-"Capture" Tab/"Calib" Tab

Figure 5-12 "Evolve" Tab

M517-E383T 221
The EVOLVE tab of the New Xcat does not have “ Enable remote
control via CCD-I/F “ and “ Enable remote control via RS232C ” as shown
in Figure below .

3) Click [Apply] button and [OK] button.

Figure 5-13 Options window

Setting and confirmation options are complete.

222 M517-E383T
5.1.2.6 Startup DC Main Power and High Voltage Main Power Supply

To turn DC Main Power and High Voltage Main Power Supply ON using Xcat, follow steps
below.

DC Main power requires current for 24 hours. Do not turn DC Main


OFF except when absolutely necessary, such as inspection and
maintenance.

1) On Tool menu of Xcat, click [Power…], and "Power Control" window is displayed.

Figure 5-14 Power Control window

2) Clear [Synchronize with the host system] checkbox in "HV Power Control" area.

M517-E383T 223
Figure 5-15 Cancel "Synchronize with the host system"

3) Click [ON] button in "DC Power Control" area to turn ON DC Main in PSU RACK 2
(or Sub Cabinet). Check "Power" indicator lights up.

Figure 5-16 Turn ON DC Main

“Load” indicator warns electrical overload. “Load” indicator lights up in


case of electrical overload to DC Main or extremely high temperature of
DC Main. Click [OFF] button to turn DC Main OFF immediately. Stop
use of FPD and check DC Main.

4) Check "10kV" of "Next Voltage" in "HV Power Control" area.

224 M517-E383T
Figure 5-17 Select Voltage of HV Power

M517-E383T 225
5) Click [ON] button in "HV Power Control" area to turn ON HV Main PS in Sub Cabinet.
Check "Power" indicator lights up, and "10000" is displayed in "Current Voltage"
field.

Figure 5-18 Turn ON HV Main PS

“Disch” indicator warns discharge of HV Main PS. “Disch” indicator


lights up in case of over current from power output. Click [OFF] button
in “HV Power Control” area and “DC Power Control” area to turn
HV Main PS and DC Main OFF immediately. Over current may cause
FPD damage. Check FPD and HV Main PS.

“Temp” indicator warns high temperature of HV Main PS. “Temp”


indicator lights up in case of extremely high temperature of HV Main
PS. Click [OFF] button in “HV Power Control” area and “DC Power
Control” area to turn HV Main PS and DC Main OFF immediate ly.
Stop use of FPD and check HV Main PS.

Wait more 30 seconds after turning HV Main PS OFF and then turn
DC Main OFF.

226 M517-E383T
6) Check "Load" indicator in "DC Power Control" area, "Disch" and "Temp" indicator
in "HV Power Control" area are all OFF again.

Figure 5-19 Power Control window

When any indicator of “Load”, “Disch” and “Temp” lights up and


turned OFF HV Main PS and DC Main are, follow steps below.
1. Click [OFF] button in HV Power Control area at first.
2. Wait for 30 seconds.
3. Click [OFF] button in DC Power Control area.
Please make sure that “Power” indicators of HV Main PS and DC
Main are OFF before inspection.

M517-E383T 227
7) Check the temperature of FPD immediately after turning HV Main PS ON. Display
"TempMonit" window. "Current temperature (deg)" shows FPD temperature in
centigrade. Make sure "Current temperature (deg)" shows between 15 degrees to
35 degrees.

Figure 5-20 TempMonit window

Check the operation of the FPD cooling unit and the temperature of FPD
at every 5 minutes for 30 minutes after turning DC power ON.

228 M517-E383T
5.1.2.7 Setting Power Synchronization between HV Main PS with DAR-8000 Control
Cabinet

Set up power synchronization between HV Main PS and DAR-8000 Control Cabinet.

Installation and adjustment of all units including FPD must be complete


before setting power synchronization.

If the HV Main PS is powered with 24 hours, 17inch FPD will be


damaged. Please make sure to set up power synchronization to turn the
HV Main PS OFF after turning DAR-8000 control cabinet OFF.

1) On Tool menu of Xcat, click [Power], and "Power Control" window is displayed.

Figure 5-21 Power Control window

M517-E383T 229
When the “Power Control” screen is re-displayed, “5kv” of “Next
Voltage” in “HV Power Control” area will be selected according to
the specification.

2) Check "10kv" of "Next Voltage" and check also "Synchronize with the host
system".

Figure 5-22 Power Synchronize of HV Main PS

When “Synchronize with the host system” is checked, HV Main PS


simultaneously turns ON after DAR-8000 control cabinet turns ON.
HV Main PS simultaneously turns OFF 30 minutes after DAR-8000
control cabinet turns OFF.

3) Confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [OK] button.

230 M517-E383T
4) Check "Enable timer control" in "HV Power Control" area.

Figure 5-23 Setting Timer Control

When “Synchronize with the host system” is unchecked, “Enable


timer control” is grayed-out.

5) Enter time more than 30 minutes before starting calibration into "Turn on everyday
at".

Figure 5-24 Setting Time for Turning On

Set specified time after consultation with installation site.

M517-E383T 231
6) If DAR-8000 does not turn ON after HV Main PS turns ON, HV Main PS will
automatically turns OFF after "Standby time (min)" is passed from turning HV Main
PS ON.

Figure 5-25 Setting Standby Time

7) Click [Close] button to close "Power Control" window.

Figure 5-26 Power Control window

When you can not use Xcat menu after closing “Power Control”
window, please wait for 1 minutes.

To fix the settings, once close “Power Control” window.


.

232 M517-E383T
8) On Tool menu of Xcat, click [Power…], and "Power Control" window is displayed.

Figure 5-27 Power Control window

NOTE
If “Power Control” screen is re-displayed, “5kv” of “Next Voltage” in
“HV Power Control” will be selected according to specification

9) Check "10kV" of "Next Voltage" in "HV Power Control" area.

Figure 5-28 Selecting Next Voltage

10) Click [Close] button to close "Power Control" window.

M517-E383T 233
11) Exit Xcat.

Restart the Xcat to store settings of the power synchronization between HV Main PS
and DAR-8000 Control Cabinet. If using this system before restarting the Xcat, when
power loss occurs, HV does not synchronize with the system.

12) Click [Start], point to [All Programs]-[Shimadzu PCU Tools]-[Xcat].


Xcat will be started.

Setting Power Synchronization between HV Main PS with DAR-8000 Control Cabinet is


complete. Power synchronization is confirmed in section 9.10 "Checking Exit".

234 M517-E383T
5.1.2.8 Setting Interval for Writing FPD Temperature
1) Uncheck "Write to log file" in "TempMonit" window.

Figure 5-29 TempMonit window

2) Enter 300 in "Interval (sec)". FPD temperature is written to log file with every 5
minutes.
3) Check the "File path"
- PCU3
"C:/Documents and Settings/Administrator/Application Data/Shimadzu /TempMonit
/TempLog.txt"

- PCU4
"C:\Users\Administrator\AppData\Roaming\Shimadzu\TempMonit\TempLog.txt"

4) Check "Write to log file" in "TempMonit" window.

Figure 5-30 TempMonit window

Setting Interval for Writing FPD Temperature is complete.

M517-E383T 235
If the “TempMonit” window is closed, the temperature of FPD cannot be
recorded. Do not close the “TempMonit” window.

236 M517-E383T
5.1.2.9 Confirmation Xcat Operation and Trouble Shooting

Check the Xcat Operating State with Event Viewer of Windows®. When an error dialog is
displayed during Xcat operation or an error is recorded in the event log information of
Windows®, note the error dialog and contact to your Shimadzu service representative.

To confirm event log, follow steps below.

1) Click [Start] and [Control Panel] and double-click [Administrative Tools].

Figure 5-31 Control Panel window- Administrative Tools

M517-E383T 237
2) "Administrative Tools" window is displayed. Double-click [Event Viewer].

Figure 5-32 Administrative Tools window – Event Viewer

3) "Event Viewer" window is displayed. Select [Application] in area A. Event logs of


application are displayed in area B. The information with "PcuDaemon" in "Source"
is the event log recorded by X-cat.

A B

Figure 5-33 Event Viewer

238 M517-E383T
4) If "Error" is displayed in "Type" among the event log written by X-cat, double-click
[Error].

Figure 5-34 Event Viewer

5) "Event Properties" window is displayed. "Description" shows the error details.

Figure 5-35 Event Properties window

M517-E383T 239
As to the error of PC Daemon written by X-cat is, please take note on
the Description on Event Properties window and contact to your
Shimadzu service representative.

6) Click [Cancel] button to close "Event Properties" window.

Figure 5-36 Event Properties window

7) If there are more than one error written by X-cat, repeat step 4 to 6 to check the error
details and correct the error.

8) When confirmation on "Event Viewer" is completed, click [X] button to close "Event
Viewer".

9) Click [X] button to close "Administrative Tools" window and Click [X] button again to
close "Control Panel" window.

Event log confirmation is complete.

240 M517-E383T
5.1.3 Setting UPS of PCU
5.1.3.1 General
This section describes how to set the PCU, FPD control hardware, when PCU is connected
to the commercial UPS. This setting enables user to shut down FPD and PCU in safety in
the event of power loss.

The table below shows the connectable UPS.


Manufacturer AMERICAN POWER OMRON
CONVERSION
Model Number SUA2200JB BN220T
Shimadzu PPS 074-81311-10 074-81332-05
Number
Shimadzu Model POWER SUPPLY, SUA2200JB POWER SUPPLY,BN-220T
Name
Connecting Cable RS232C RS232C (PCU3 only)
Table 5-1 UPS

5.1.3.2 Settings of UPS


This section describes how to set the UPS. The procedure differs depending on the types
of the UPS. Select either method of APC (SUA2200JB) or OMRON (BN220T).

・ In the case of UPS(SUA2200JB) made by APC

Before setting, check the UPS in the PSU RACK 2 /4 is connected to PCU
with following 3 cables:
34-c/46 CABLE, CA-9S MA15 (511-15197-15)
34-d CABLE A, 09-2A-15M-2b (511-15196-15)
34-e SOFTWARE, SSPCBEW 1SJ (074-81311-15)
If the settings or connections are not done correctly, PCU will shut down
immediately after the system starts.
In this case, turn PCU on and then press [F8] key during the initial process
(W indows log is displayed) to starts Windows in safe mode. Change UPS
settings.

M517-E383T 241
1) Log on PCU as "Administrator". Click [Start]-[Control Panel], and then double-click
[Power Options].
2) [Power Options Properties] window is displayed. Open [Power Schemes] tab and
set each item as follows:
In "Power schemes" area, select [Always On].
In "Turn off monitor" list, select [Never].
In "Turn off hard disks" list, select [Never].
In "System standby" list, select [Never].

242 M517-E383T
3) Open [Hibernate] tab. Clear [Enable hibernation] check box.

The device driver prevents the system from entering sleep mode.

4) Open [UPS] tab and click [Select].

M517-E383T 243
5) "UPS Selection" window is displayed. Set each item as follows:
In "Select manufacturer" list, select [American Power Conversion].
In "Select model" list, select [Basic signaling to any APC UPS].
In "On port" list, select [COM2].
Click [Finish].

6) "UPS" tab is opened and click [Configure].

244 M517-E383T
7) "UPS Configuration" window is displayed.
In "Minutes on battery before critical alarm" box, type or select 5.
Click [Configure].

8) "UPS System Shutdown Program" window is displayed. Set each item as follows:
In "Run" field, enter following pass.
[%ProgramFiles%/Shimadzu/Shimadzu PCU Tools/etc/Shutdown.vbs]
[%ProgramFiles%] indicates the install folder of Shimadzu PCU Tool. The default
install folder is [C:\Program Files].
Do not select [Run only if logged on] check box.
Click [OK] button.

M517-E383T 245
9) "Set Password" window is displayed. Input "Shimadzu" into Password and click [OK].

10) "UPS Configuration" window is displayed. Click [OK] button.

11) [Power Options Properties] window is displayed. Click [OK] button.

246 M517-E383T
・In the case of UPS(BN220T) made by OMRON

The procedure below is applid to the PCU3 and is not required for PCU4 since the setting
for PCU4 has been completed at the factory shipment.

Before setting, check the UPS in the PSU RACK 2 /4 is connected to PCU
with following 3 cables:
34-c/46 CABLE, CA-9S MA15 (511-15197-15)
34-d CABLE A, 09-2A-15M-2b (511-15196-15)
34-e CABLE, BUC26 (074-81330-52)
If the settings or connections are not do ne correctly, PCU will shut down
immediately after the system starts.
In this case, turn PCU on and then press [F8] key during the initial
process (Windows log is displayed) to starts W indows in safe mode.
Change UPS settings.

M517-E383T 247
1) Log on PCU as "Administrator". Click [Start]-[Control Panel], and then double-click
[Power Options].
2) [Power Options Properties] window is displayed. Open [Power Schemes] tab and
set each item as follows:
In "Power schemes" area, select [Always On].
In "Turn off monitor" list, select [Never].
In "Turn off hard disks" list, select [Never].
In "System standby" list, select [Never].

3) Select "Hibernate" tab.


Clear [Enable hibernation] check box.

248 M517-E383T
The device driver prevents the system from entering sleep mode.

4) Select "UPS" tab.


Click [Select].

M517-E383T 249
5) [UPS Selection] window is displayed. Set each item as follows:
In "Select manufacturer" list, select [Generic].
In "Select model" list, select [Custom].
In "On port" list, select [COM2].
Click [Finish].

6) [UPS Interface Configuration On: COM2] window is displayed.


Select [Power Fail/On Battery] and [Low Battery].
In [Power Fail/On Battery] and [Low Battery] box, select [Positive].
Click [Finish].

250 M517-E383T
7) [Power Options Properties] window is displayed
Select [UPS] tab.
Click [Apply].

8) Click [Configure].

M517-E383T 251
9) [UPS Configuration] window is displayed.
Select "Enable all notifications".
Select "Minutes on battery before critical alarm".
Select "When the alarm occurs, run this program:".
In "Minutes on battery before critical alarm" box, type or select [4].
In "Next instruct the computer to:" box, select [Shut down]
Click [Configure].

10) "UPS System Shutdown Program" window is displayed.


Select "Task" tab.
Click [Browse…].

11) “Browse” window is displayed.


In “File of type” box, select [All Files (*.*)].
In “File name” box, select [C:\Program Files\Shimadzu\ Shimadzu PCU

252 M517-E383T
Tools\etc\Shutdown.vbs].
Click [Open].

12) "UPS System Shutdown Program" window is displayed.


Select [Task] tab.
In "Run" field, enter following pass.
[%ProgramFiles%/Shimadzu/Shimadzu PCU Tools/etc/Shutdown.vbs]
[%ProgramFiles%] indicates the install folder of Shimadzu PCU Tool. The default
install folder is [C:\Program Files].
Click [Set password…].

M517-E383T 253
13) “Set Password” window is displayed.
In “Password:” box, type [Shimadzu].
In “Confirm password:” box, type [Shimadzu].
Click [OK].

14) "UPS System Shutdown Program" window is displayed.


Select "Task" tab.
Do not select [Run only if logged on] check box.
Click [OK].

254 M517-E383T
15) "UPS Configuration" window is displayed.
Click [OK].

16) [Power Options Properties] window is displayed.


Click [OK].

5.1.4 Updating PCU


In order to determine whether the PCU update is needed or not, check the latest Revision
number described in "M517-E505 DAR-8000f Update Release Notice", and the version of
PCU described in the Appendix D of "M517-E415 DAR-8000 Series System Update
Manual". When the update is needed, update the PCU according to the PCU part in
"M517-E415 DAR-8000 Series System Update Manual".

M517-E383T 255
5.2 Startup DAR-8000f System and Settings (2)

Log on with "shimadzu" account, and check the settings of Windows®.


When switching a user account to log on, refer to Appendix A "Logon with User
non-operator". With "shimadzu" account, user name is "shimadzu" and password is
"Dar8k".

5.2.1 Startup DAR-8000f Control Cabinet

Turn on each device (see Figure 3-1 to Figure 3-3, and Figure 4-1 to Figure 4-9) to
startup DAR-8000f system.

1) Turn ON a breaker at the rear face of DAR-8000 control cabinet.

2) Turn ON a breaker of X-ray high-voltage generator control cabinet.

3) Power ON X-ray high-voltage generator console. DAR-8000 control cabinet will be


simultaneously ON.

If DAR-8000 control cabinet does not simultaneously turn ON, turn each
device OFF by following steps described in this book. Confirm the
connections refer to section 2.3 “Cable Connection” in “M517-E397
UD-DAR8000 Connection Kit Installation Manual ”.

4) Log on with "shimadzu" account. With a maintenance account, user name is


"shimadzu" and password is "Dar8k".

256 M517-E383T
5.2.2 Setting Display Resolution

To display images properly in DAR-8000f system, set the proper resolution of display.

5.2.2.1 Setting Resolution for One Monitor

1) Click [Start], point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel]. Double-click [Display].

Figure 5-37 Control Panel window

2) "Display Properties" window is displayed. Select [Settings] tab.

Figure 5-38 Display Properties window

M517-E383T 257
3) Select [Monitor 1] and set "Colors" and "Screen" area as below.

ITEM Value
Colors True Color (32 bit)
Screen area 1280 by 1024 pixels

Figure 5-39 Setting Monitor 1

4) Click [Apply] button.

Figure 5-40 Applying Settings

258 M517-E383T
5) Confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [OK] button to apply the new desktop settings.

Figure 5-41 Confirmation Dialog

6) Confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes] button to save the settings.

Figure 5-42 Confirmation Dialog

Click [Yes] button before reverting counter reaches 0 seconds. If the


reverting counter reaches 0 seconds, repeat settings from steps 3.

M517-E383T 259
7) "Display Properties" window is displayed. Click [OK] button.

Figure 5-43 Display Properties window

8) "Control Panel" window is displayed.

Figure 5-44 Control Panel window

Setting resolution for one monitor is complete.

No need to close “Control Panel”. Because the setting continues to


section 5.2.3 “Confirmation for Serial Port Setting ”.

260 M517-E383T
5.2.2.2 Setting Resolution for Two Monitors

1) Set resolution for monitor 1 by referring to section 5.2.2.1 "Setting Resolution for One
Monitor".
2) Select [monitor 2] and set "Colors" and "Screen" area as below.
ITEM Value
Colors True Color (32 bit)
Screen area 1280 by 1024 pixels

Figure 5-45 Setting Monitor 2

3) Check "Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor" and click [Apply] button.

Figure 5-46 Applying Settings

M517-E383T 261
4) Confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [OK] button to apply the new settings.

Figure 5-47 Confirmation Dialog

5) Confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes] button to save the settings.

Figure 5-48 Confirmation Dialog

Click [Yes] button before reverting counter reaches 0 seconds. If the


reverting counter reaches 0 seconds, repeat settings from steps 2.

262 M517-E383T
6) "Display Properties" window is displayed. Click [OK] button.

Figure 5-49 Display Properties window

7) "Control Panel" window is displayed.

Figure 5-50 Control Panel window

Setting resolution for two monitors is complete.

Install the ATI tool and adjust the screen position on the reference monitor by referring
Appendix F "Adjusting Monitor Display".

No need to close Control Panel. Because setting continues to section


5.2.3 “Confirmation for Serial Port Setting”.

M517-E383T 263
5.2.3 Confirmation for Serial Port Setting

Confirm the settings of serial port connected to PCU.

This section describes the setting in the case that the PCU is connected
to COM3. But the serial port connected to UPS depends on the type of
DAR-8000 cabinet. Check the serial port by referring Appendix H-3
“Serial Port Number and Connection” .

1) Click [Start], point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel]. Double-click [System].

Figure 5-51 Control Panel window

264 M517-E383T
2) "System Properties" window is displayed. Click [Hardware] tab and Click [Device
Manager] in "Device Manager" area.

Figure 5-52 System Properties window

3) "Device Manager" window is displayed. Double-click [Communication Port


(COM3)] in "Ports (COM & LPT)".

M517-E383T 265
Figure 5-53 Device Manager window

4) "Communication Port (COM3) Properties" window is displayed. Click [Settings] tab


and check the settings are same as below.

Bits per second 9600


Data bits 8
Parity None
Stop bits 1
Flow control None

Figure 5-54 Communication Port (COM3) Properties window

Click [Advanced…] button. "Advanced Settings for COM3" window is displayed. Check
"COM3" is selected in "COM Port Number". Click [OK] button.

266 M517-E383T
Figure 5-55 Advanced Setting for Com3 window

M517-E383T 267
5) "Communication Port (COM3) Properties" window is displayed. Click [OK] button.

Figure 5-56 Communication Port (COM3) Properties window

6) "Device Manager" window is displayed. Click [X] button to close "Device Manager"
window.

268 M517-E383T
5.2.4 Setting UPS

This section describes the setting in the case that the UPS is connected
to COM1. But the serial port connected to UPS depends on the type of
DAR-8000 cabinet. Check the serial port by referring Appendix H-3
“Serial Port Number and Connection” .

If the settings or connections are not done correctly, PCU will shut down
immediately after the system starts.
In this case, turn PCU on and then press [F8] key during the initial
process (Windows log is displayed) to starts Windows in safe mode.
Change UPS settings.

1) Turn DAR-8000 control cabinet ON. Logon with user "shimadzu" and password
"Dar8k".

2) Click [Start], point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].

M517-E383T 269
3) "Control Panel" window is displayed. Double-click [Power Options].

4) "Power Options Properties" window is displayed. Open [UPS] tab and click
[Select] button.

270 M517-E383T
5) "UPS Selection" window is displayed. Select [COM3] in "On port" area and then
click [Next>] button.

6) "UPS Interface Configuration On: COM3" window is displayed. In "UPS Signal


Polarity" area, check the items as following figure. Click [Finish] button.

M517-E383T 271
7) "Power Options Properties" window is displayed. Click [Apply] button to reflect the
settings and then click [OK] button.

8) "Control Panel" window is displayed. Double-click [System].

272 M517-E383T
9) "System Properties" window is displayed. Open [Hardware] tab and click [Device
Manager] button.

10) "Device Manager" window is displayed. In "Ports (COM & LPT)", click [PCI
Communications Port (COM3)] and then right-click. Right-click menu is displayed.
Click [Properties].

M517-E383T 273
11) "PCI Communications Port (COM3) Properties" window is displayed. Open
[Settings] tab and set items in "Default Communications parameters" as following
figure. Click [OK] button.

12) [System Properties] window is displayed. Click [OK] button.

274 M517-E383T
M517-E383T 275
13) UPS starts working and turn DAR-8000 control cabinet OFF. Switch the serial cable
connection from COM1 to COM3.

Setting UPS is complete.

NOTE
Refer to “M517-E429 DAR-8000 Remote Maintenance Installation
Manual” for the UPS in PSU RACK 2 or PSU RACK4.

276 M517-E383T
5.2.5 Updating DAR-8000
In order to determine whether the DAR-8000 update is needed or not, check the latest
Revision number described in "M517-E505 DAR-8000f Update Release Notice", and the
version of DAR-8000 described in "M517-E415 DAR-8000 Series System Update Manual".
When the update is needed, update the DAR-8000 according to the DAR part in
"M517-E415 DAR-8000 Series System Update Manual".

The version of all system components must be that stored in


“ 502-24448 DAR-8000 UPDATE CD” for correct operation.
When updating DAR-8000f, check version of all system components ,
including UD150B-40, ZS-100, PCU, and update them if necessary.

M517-E383T 277
5.2.6 Setting DCOM IP Address and Fluoroscopy Mode

5.2.6.1 Setting DCOM IP Address

Register DCOM with reference to Appendix B-19 "Registering DCOM".

5.2.6.2 Setting Fluoroscopy Mode

Set the fluoroscopy mode according to Table 5-2 and 5-3 "PCU Mode".
Refer to Appendix B-22 "Blanking Pulse Fluoroscopy" for the details of setting.

30fps 15fps 7.5fps 3.75fps Name


DC1 299 299 299 299 DoseN
DC2 299 299 299 299 DoseL
1 202 0 0 0 PULSE 30
2 0 203 0 0 PULSE 15
3 0 0 203 0 PULSE 7.5
4 0 0 0 203 PULSE 3.75
5 0 203 0 0 PULSE S15
Table 5-2 PCU Mode (NoneSURE)

30fps 15fps 7.5fps 3.75fps Name


DC1 299 299 299 299 DoseN
DC2 299 299 299 299 DoseL
3 202 0 0 0 PULSE 30
4 0 203 0 0 PULSE 15
5 0 0 203 0 PULSE 7.5
6 0 0 0 203 PULSE 3.75
7 0 203 0 0 PULSE S15
8 0 203 0 0 PULSE H15
Table 5-3 PCU Mode (SURE(Std))

278 M517-E383T
30fps 15fps 7.5fps 3.75fps Name
DC1 299 299 299 299 DoseN
DC2 299 299 299 299 DoseL
1 202 0 0 0 PULSE N30
2 0 201 0 0 PULSE N15
3 0 203 0 0 PULSE L15
4 0 0 205 0 PULSE L7.5
5 0 0 0 205 PULSE L3.75
6 0 203 0 0 PULSE S15
7 0 203 0 0 PULSE H15
8 0 0 203 0 PULSE H7.5
Table 5-4 PCU Mode (SURE(Bariatric))

M517-E383T 279
5.2.7 Omitting Offset Calibration
In the FPD calibration, since the Offset Calibration and the Gain Calibration have been
repeated for every mode, the lug with the Gain Calibration might affect the Offset
Calibration data.
In order to avoid this problem, separate the Offset Calibration from the FPD calibration.
In the normal operation, FPD calibration is only the Gain Calibration, and the Offset
Calibration works as a background calibration.
And, for image quality adjustment, the Offset Calibration is performed manually.

Perform setting for omitting the Offset Calibration from the FPD calibration.
1) Turn ON the power of the DAR-8000 Control Cabinet.
Log on with user "shimadzu" and password "Dar8k".

Follow either procedure according to the Revision.

Rev04.20.02 or before

2) Execute "C:\Program Files\Tools\Shimadzu\OmitOffsetCalib.vbs".

3) "Omit Offset Calibration" dialog appears. Click [YES].

280 M517-E383T
4) Setting is completed. Click [OK].

Rev04.20.03 or later
Perform the Deficit calibration at the beginning or the end of calibration processing to
increase the Deficit calibration accuracy. Moreover, the offset calibration can be omitted
from the usual calibration processing since it can be performed in the background.

2) Open "C:\Program Files\Shimadzu\Tools ".

3) Double-click "LastDeficitCalib.exe".

4) The "LastDeficitCalib" window is displayed.

5) Set whether the Deficit calibration is performed at the beginning of or the end of the
calibration processing. With "Order of Deficit Calibration", select "First" for the
beginning or "Last" for the end.

M517-E383T 281
6) Select the check box of "Omission of Offset Calibration" to omit the offset calibration
from the calibration processing.

7) The waiting time for window initialization can be specified in order not to display a
calibration image at the end of calibration. Increase a value not to display an image
after calibration.

8) Click [OK] after completing setting. Settings are saved and the setting tool is closed.
Click [Cancel] to discard settings and close the setting tool.

282 M517-E383T
5.3 Update the Firmware of SGIM

When the DAR-8000 is updated in section 5.2.5 "Updating DAR-8000",


updating the firmware of SGIM is not needed because it is included in
the DAR-8000 update.

After the setting of DAR-8000f is completed, it is necessary to update the firmware of SGIM
installed in UD150B-40. Please renew Firmware of SGIM according to the procedure that
has been described in section 3.1 "Update SGIM Firmware" of "M517-E397 (UD-DAR8000
Connective Kit Installation Manual)".

Please update only Firmware of the SGIM substrate when you install it.
(Please never update other Firmware and FPGA. )

It is updated in a suitable state for the revision installed in DAR-8000f


when the factory is shipped though Firmware and FPGA of ot her
substrates such as IAPDB can be updated in the service application.

The system doesn't start if failing in the update such as FPGA of IAPDB
by any chance.

M517-E383T 283
5.4 PCU Error Display

Set to display the error that occurs in PCU in the monitor of DAR-8000f. The error is
notified to DAR-8000 via MPC.
This error setting is composed of following two applications: the sending side on MPC and
the receiving side on DAR-8000f.
The following describes how to install the sending side application on MPC. Installing the
receiving side on DAR-8000f is not required because it is included in the standard update
when the system software is Rev03.60 or later.

1) Start MPC.

2) Display the task tray at the bottom of the window and check the icon.

3) When the icon is displayed, the PCU error display application has already
starts. In order to install it, stop the application.

4) Right-click the icon to display the menu. Click [Exit].

5) When the icon disappears, installing the application is possible.

284 M517-E383T
6) Insert the DAR-8000 system update CD to the CD drive of MPC.
After a while the following window is displayed.

Select "Open folder to view files using the Windows Explorer" and click [OK].
If the window is not displayed, open the CD with Windows Explorer.

7) The contents of the DAR-8000 system update CD are displayed.

Open the OtherDevices folder.

M517-E383T 285
8) The contents of the OtherDevices folder are displayed.

Open the MPC folder.

9) The contents of the MPC folder are displayed.

Double click the PCUErrSendInst.bat.

10) The installation is completed. Restart MPC. When the icon is displayed in the
task tray, the install is successful.

286 M517-E383T
5.5 Setting Software of UD150B-40
5.5.1 Upgrading S/W
Before uploading data, check whether the software version of the current B-40/L-40 is the
same as the version included in "DAR-8000 UPDATE CD".

1) Keep pressing [Setup] button on B-40/L-40 console more than 1 second until the

beep sound is chimed.

2) Press the corner of B-40/L-40 console screen in order of [1] [Lower Left], [2] [Upper
Right], [3] [Upper Left]. (Beep sound is chimed each time after pressing the corner.)

3 2

Program System

AEC Console

Exit
1

3) Service mode screen is displayed.

Service
Cabinet Version: X.XX
Console Version: X.XX

Setup Adjust

Exit

4) Software version is displayed in the top area of screen.

5) Compare the version displayed in the screen to the version in this book.

6) If the version in this book is bigger than that displayed in the screen, then update the
software with reference to section 3.10 "Software up grade" of "M501-E356
UD150B-40/L-40 Installation Manual". If not (the version displayed in the screen is

M517-E383T 287
bigger than that described in this book), follow the introduction described in the
UD-150B-40/L-40 Release Notice, etc.

288 M517-E383T
5.5.2 Uploading Settings
In the combination system of B-40/L-40 and DAR-8000, at the time of starting installation, it
is recommended to upload APR setting, various settings at site, and the standard data
adapted to the system in order to reduce the adjustment time. The upload procedure of the
data of B-40/L-40 is described here.

5.5.2.1 Preparing Data Upload

Uploading data will update the VOLUME data that has been adjusted at the factory. Check
and record the VOLUME data before upload according to the following procedures.

1) Keep pressing [Setup] button on B-40/L-40 console more than 1 second until the beep
sound is chimed.

2) Press the corner of B-40/L-40 console screen in order of [1] [Lower Left], [2] [Upper
Right], [3] [Upper Left]. (Beep sound is chimed each time after pressing the corner.)

3 2

Program System

AEC Console

Exit
1

3) Check that the following screen appears. (Service mode screen)

Service
Cabinet Version: X.XX
Console Version: X.XX

Setup Adjust

Exit

M517-E383T 289
4) Press Adjust on the Service mode screen. The following screen is displayed.
(Adjustment screen)

Adjust
FVR IRSF PHOTO GAIN

FVF IRSR VOLUME

PHV-F IRSDR GRAPH

PHV-R PHOTO kV NDD

PHV-DR PHOTO DIV


Exit

5) Press VOLUME in the Adjustment window. The following screen is displayed.

6) Record the data in the above screen into the following table.

VS_Volume
VN_Volume
Flash_Volume
TmA_Volume
TkV_Volume

290 M517-E383T
7) Press Next Page. The following screen is displayed.

8) Record the data in the above screen into the following table.

VP1_Volume
VP2_Volume
TFmA_Volume

9) Press Prev Page.

10) Press Exit. The screen opens and the message "Save data ?Yes/No/Cancel" appears.
Select No. The Adjustment screen of step (4) appears.

11) Press Exit to exit the Adjustment screen. The screen of step (3) appears.

12) Press Exit to exit the Service mode screen. The screen of step (2) appears.

13) Press Exit key to return to the usual screen.

M517-E383T 291
5.5.2.2 Uploading Data

Referring to "9.22 bkup command" of the section 9 "Setting of Terminal Communication" of


"M501-E356 UD150B-40/L-40 Installation Manual", upload (restore) the data of UD-CONT
and Console. The data to be uploaded is included in the following folders in the DAR-8000
update CD.
CD:\OtherDevices\UD\DefaultData

When an applicable system is not found, upload the data of the similar
system and make sure to edit the data.

-SONIALVISION SafireII/17
Perform the upload (restore) according to the following table.

X-ray SURE File name (UD-CONT) File name (Console)


tube
SURE(BA) B40_8K_Saf B40_8K_ Saf
_L_BA_E_UD_DATA _L_BA_E_CONS_DATA
0.7/1.2
SURE(Std) B40_8K_Saf B40_8K_Saf
_L_E_UD_DATA _L_E_CONS_DATA

292 M517-E383T
5.5.2.3 Post-processing of Data Upload

1) Again perform the calibration of the coordinate of the touch panel. Refer to the
UD150B-40/L-40 operation manual for the calibration procedure.

2) Input the VOLUME data recorded in section 5.5.2.1 "Preparing Data Upload".

Do not change the Flash_Volume since the uploaded setting is used.

2-1) Display the VOLUME screen according to the procedure of (1) to (5) in section
5.5.2.1 "Preparing Data Upload".

2-2) Input the data recorded in step (6) in section 5.5.2.1 "Preparing Data Upload"
according to the following procedure.

(1) Select a desired frame.


(2) Input a value by using the numeric keypad on the right.
(3) Press the frame again.
The value changes to the input value, and the display turns into light-blue.
(4) Repeat procedures (1) to (3).

M517-E383T 293
2-3) Press Next Page. The following screen appears.

2-4) Input the data recorded in the step (8) in section 5.5.2.1 "Preparing Data Upload".
The input procedure is the same as that of step 2-2).

2-5) Press Prev Page.

2-6) Press Exit. The screen opens and the message "Save data? Yes/No/Cancel"
appears. Select Yes. The Adjustment screen of the step (4) in section 5.5.2.1
"Preparing Data Upload" appears after saving data.

2-7) Press Exit to exit the Adjustment screen. The screen of step (3) in section 5.5.2.1
"Preparing Data Upload" appears.

2-8) Press Exit to exit the Service mode screen. The screen of step (2) in section
5.5.2.1 "Preparing Data Upload" appears.

2-9) Press Exit key to return to the usual screen.

294 M517-E383T
5.5.3 Checking Settings
Refer to section 4.5 "Confirming Each Default Setting in UD" of "M517-E435 DAR8000f
Image Quality Adjustment Manual" for the settings of UD150B-40.

M517-E383T 295
5.6 Setting ZS-100 S/W
5.6.1 Upgrading Software
Refer to section 3.4 "Updating the X-ray diagnostic table" of "M517-E505 DAR-8000f
Update Release Notice" for the software upgrade.

296 M517-E383T
6 Starting Service Application
Log on with "shimadzu" account, and start up service application. Configure the setting for
DAR-8000f by service application (see Figure 6-1).
Refer to section 6.3 "Setting on "Config" Screen" and after about various settings in service
application.

Figure 6-1 Service Application Main Screen

NOTE
When adding and changing option in DAR-8000f, it is necessary to
update site key before configuration. Update site key by referring
Appendix. B-6 “Updating Site key”.

M517-E383T 297
Before setting DICOM Send, DICOM Print, or DICOM Worklist, check the information listed
below with a representative in installation site and destination, and then enter the
information.

 Setting DAR-8000f
Item Name Setting Information
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
AE Title (Send) "DAR8k_StoreSCU" is set in shipping. (*1)

AE Title (Print) "DAR8k_PrintSCU" is set in shipping. (*1)

AE Title (Worklist) "DAR8k_MWMSCU" is set in shipping. (*1)

(*1)
If there are several DAR-8000f in the same installation site, put "1" at the end (ex:
"DAR8k_StoreSCU1") so that the value is set differently for each DAR-8000.

 Setting DICOM Send Destination


Item Name Setting Information
Name
IP Address
AE Title
Port Number

 Setting DICOM CD Export


Item Name Setting Information
Name

 Setting DICOM Print Destination


Item Name Setting Information
Name
IP Address
AE Title
Port Number
Film Orientation
Film Size

298 M517-E383T
 Setting DICOM Worklist Destination
Item Name Setting Information
Name
IP Address
AE Title
Port Number

 Setting DICOM MPPS


Item Name Setting Information
Name
IP Address
AE Title
Port Number

M517-E383T 299
6.1 Starting Service Application

1) Double-click [Service Application] shortcut on desktop. Service application is started


and "Service Application Main" screen (see Figure 6-2) is displayed.

See Section
6.3 and 6.4

See Section
6.2

Figure 6-2 Service Application Main Screen

300 M517-E383T
If following “ServiceApp” window is displayed when starting service
application, each device may not be correctly connected or DC
Power may not be set correctly on Power Control window of Xcat. If
so, turn OFF each device by following steps below and check each
device is correctly connected. Then start service application again by
following the steps for starting service application.

(i) If X-ray high-voltage generator console is not connected or is OFF.

Left “ServiceApp” window may be blacked out like right window due
to graphics processing.

(ii) If DC power is OFF.

Left “ServiceApp” window may be blacked out like right window due
to graphics processing.

Steps to Power OFF


When a breaker of distribution board is necessarily OFF to check each device is connected,
please follow steps below.

1) Click [OK] or [X] button on each "ServiceApp" window.

M517-E383T 301
2) Click [Exit] button to exit service application.

3) Open "Start" menu and click [Shut down…]. Select [Shut down] from the
confirmation dialog and click [OK] button. DAR-8000 control cabinet is turned OFF.

4) Turn OFF a breaker at the rear face of DAR-8000 control cabinet after DAR-8000
control cabinet is turned OFF.

5) Power OFF Xray high-voltage generator console.

6) Turn OFF a breaker of X-ray diagnostic table.

7) Turn OFF a breaker of X-ray high-voltage generator control cabinet.

8) Turn OFF a breaker of DAR-8000 Power Transformer.

9) Turn OFF a breaker of distribution board.

302 M517-E383T
6.2 Setting on "Utilities" Screen

Click [Utilities] button on "Service Application Main" screen (see Figure 6-2) to display
following screen. Use this window to set as follows.

See section
6.2.1

Figure 6-3 Utilities Screen

Name Settings
Notepad Start up notepad.
Date and Time Set date and time.
User Accounts Register and edit user.
Regional and Language Options Set region and language.
Display "Regional Options" window to select
"English (United States)" in "Your locale
(location)" field.
Time Set parameters about time.
Date Set parameters about date.
Keyboard Set parameters about keyboard.
Network Connections Set parameters about network.
System Properties Set system parameters in general.
Settings other than "Network Connections" are correctly done in shipping, so it is
unnecessary to change when installing.

M517-E383T 303
6.2.1 Setting on "Network Connections" Window

The setting in this section is needed only if DICOM Send, DICOM


Worklist or DICOM Print are used.

Use this screen to set for DAR-8000f network. Set by following steps below.

1) Click [Network Connections] on Utilities screen.

2) Following window is displayed. Select and right-click [Local Area Connection2].

3) Following menu is displayed. Select and right-click [Properties].

NOTE
“Local Area Connection” will be used for remote maintenance. Set
for DICOM Address to “Local Area Connection2”.

304 M517-E383T
4) "Local Area Connection Properties" window is displayed. Select [Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP)] in "Components checked are used by this connection" and click
[Properties] button.

M517-E383T 305
5) "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties" window is displayed. Check [Use the
following IP address].

6) Set each item as follows.


Name Setting
IP address Enter IP address (in this device) specified by
installation site.
Subnet mask Enter subnet mask specified by installation
site.
Default gateway Enter default gateway specified by installation
site.
Preferred DNS server Do not enter.
Alternate DNS server Do not enter.

7) Click [OK] button on "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties" window.

8) "Local Area Connection Properties" window is displayed. Click [OK] button.

9) Click [X] button to close "Network and Dial-up Connections" window.


Setting is complete.

306 M517-E383T
6.3 Setting on "Config" Screen

Click [Config] button on "Service Application Main" screen (See Figure 6-2) to display
"System Configuration" window as shown in Figure 6-4. Use this screen to set as
follows. Please refer to Appendix D "X-ray Diagnostic Table Initial Parameter Value List"
about settings and parameters.

Figure 6-4 System Configuration screen

Name Settings
System Configuration Set various system parameters.
Generator Lines Set interface to X-ray high-voltage generator.
Archive Devices Set destination of DICOM Send and DICOM CD
Export.
Printer Devices Set destination of DICOM Print.
Query/Retrieve Devices (This function is not currently supported.)
Worklist Devices Set destination of DICOM Worklist.
MPPS Devices Set destination of MPPS.
Patient Data Configuration Set enable / disable for patient information entry item.

M517-E383T 307
6.3.1 Setting System Configuration

Use this screen to set items listed below for system configuration.

a) Set information about installation site


b) Set system parameter
c) Set system option parameter
d) Set image processing parameter
e) Set monitor LUTs
f) Set DICOM parameter
g) Set FOV parameter
h) Set FPD Calibration

a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h)

308 M517-E383T
a) Set information about installation site

Click [Site Info] tab to set information for each installation site.

Figure 6-5 Site Info screen

Set each item as follows (Please refer to Appendix D "X-ray Diagnostic Table Initial
Parameter Value List").
Name Settings
Site Name Enter installation site name.
Site Address Enter installation site address.
Technical Support Phone Check blank is displayed.
Number
Manufacturer Name Check "Shimadzu Corp." is entered.
Manufacturer Address Check address is entered.
Manufacturer ID Check blank is displayed.
Model Name Check "RF Digital System" is selected.
If DSA is available in system, check "DSA
Digital System" is selected.
This setting cannot be changed.
System Serial Number Check Unit Serial Number on "Label, SiteKey"
on the PC side (in DAR-8000 control cabinet) is
entered.

M517-E383T 309
Click [Save] button save changes made. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes]
button.

To set continuously, display screen to be set.

310 M517-E383T
b) Set system parameter

Click [Interfaces] tab to set system parameters.

Figure 6-6 Interfaces Screen

Set each item as follows (Please refer to Appendix D "X-ray Diagnostic Table Initial
Parameter Value List").
Name Settings
Connect Table Name Select the connected X-ray diagnostic table.
Detector Type Check "17 Inch FPD" is selected.
Lens Type Check "Heliflex" is selected.
Iris Type Check "Tandem" is selected.
ABS Control Range Check "Custom" is selected.
Base System Frequency Check "30/60Hz" is checked.
Injector Control (With DSA option)
Select "Enabled".
(Without DSA option)
Check "Not available for this model" is selected.
Rad Expose On Failure Check "Do not acquire" is selected.
Rad Expose On Timeout Check "5 sec" is selected.

M517-E383T 311
Name Settings
Auto Transfer Image Type About the image acquired in SDA
(Subdivisional Acquisition)

When transferring only acquired images, select


"Acquired Images".

When transferring both acquired images and


combined images,
select "Acquired and Combined Images".

When transferring only combined images,


select "Combined Images".
Auto Storage Image Type About the image acquired in SDA
(Subdivisional Acquisition)
When storing only acquired images to a storage
medium, select "Acquired Images".
When storing both acquired images and
combined images to a storage medium, select
"Acquired and Combined Images".
When storing only combined images to a
storage medium, select "Combined Images".
Continuous Fluoro Check this item is checked.
Fluoro Pulse Rates Check "30pps", "15pps", "7.5pps", and
"3.75pps" are selected.
Cine Pulse Rates This item is Not Used.
Maximum Spot Acquisition Rate Select "15 FPS".
Spot Subtract Calibration (With DSA option)
Select "Independent".
(Without DSA option)
Check "Not available for this model" is selected.
Sonial Vision This item is available when "ZS-100I" is
selected in "Connect Table Name".
In shipping, this item is set as shown in Table
6-1.
MID Mode Select the display format in multi-format.
Toggle Selection Select either "Toggle b/w 1×1 and 4×4 Mode"
or "Toggle b/w 1×1 and 2×2 Mode".

312 M517-E383T
Name Settings
Joystick According to tilting amount (right and left), the
Threshold (1-30) threshold is set when switching function. (*1)
When the value is less than threshold, previous
/ next frame is displayed. When the value is
more than threshold, loop is played or loop is
played backward.
Button 1-16 Set each items shown in Table 6-2 and assign
the appropriate button function to each button
on Sonialvision console.
When changing button assignment, take the
original label and label each buttons on
Sonialvision console to correspond to the
function, which is changed.
(*1)
In "Connect Table Name: ZS-100I", threshold can be changed only immediately after
the type of the X-ray Diagnostic Table is changed. When set threshold is necessarily
changed, pre-write down parameter value set in all item before changing, because
all parameter value in Sonialvision console is restored to default due to changing
threshold. After changing threshold, set parameter value that is wrote down.
To change threshold, select other x-ray diagnostic table in "Connect Table Name"
and select "ZS-100I" again.

M517-E383T 313
Name Settings
RF DSA
MID Mode Toggle Selection Toggle b/w 1 x 1 and 4 x 4 Toggle b/w 1 x 1 and 4 x 4
Mode Mode
Joystick Threshold (1-30) 15 15
Button 1 None Landmarking
Button 2 Print Select Print Select
Button 3 Print Start * Print Start *
Button 4 None None
Button 5 Previous Frame Previous Frame
Button 6 None Roadmapping
Button 7 Fluoro Store Fluoro Store
Button 8 V-Reverse V-Reverse
Button 9 H-Reverse H-Reverse
Button 10 Next Frame Next Frame
Button 11 None Send to Ref
Button 12 None None
Button 13 None None
Button 14 MID MID
Button 15 Shot Save Shot Save
Button 16 None None
Table 6-1 Setting of Sonialvision Console in Shipping

* See below NOTE.

"Print Start" is used for switching a pulse fluoroscopy mode so that


"Print Start" will not be available.

314 M517-E383T
Item Button Function
None -- Do not assign.
Joystick Mode -- Unsupported.

MID Display image in multi-format.

V-Reverse Reverse the image input from imaging device


during fluoro / radiography top and bottom.
H-Reverse Reverse the image input from imaging device
during fluoro / radiography right and left.
Fluoro Store Store the still image after fluoro and the loop
image after fluoro loop.
Roadmapping Enter roadmapping mode.

Next Frame Display the next frame in currently displayed


image.
Previous Frame Display the previous frame in currently displayed
image.
ShotSave Perform ShotSave.

Photo File -- Unsupported.


Print Select Select the image to be printed.

Send to Ref Send the image displayed on main image area to


reference monitor.
Landmarking Create and display a live image of DSA by adding
mask image with a certain percentage.
Measurement -- Unsupported.
Table 6-2 Button Function

Click [Save] button to save changes made. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click
[Yes] button.

To set continuously, display screen to be set.

M517-E383T 315
c) Set system option parameter

Click [System Options] tab to set optional system parameters.

Figure 6-7 System Options Screen

Set each item as follows (Please refer to Appendix D "X-ray Diagnostic Table Initial
Parameter Value List").
Name Setting
Scan Converter When scan converter function is used, select
"NTSC" or "PAL". When scan converter function is
Not Used, select "Not Installed".
In shipping, "Not Installed" is selected.
Reference Image Display (With DSA option or Reference Monitor option)
Select "1-on-1 w/ Thumbnails".
(Without DSA option and Reference Monitor option)
Check "Not available for this model" is selected.
DICOM Storage Commit (With DICOM Storage Commit option)
Select "Enabled" is selected.
(Without DICOM Storage Commit option)
Check "Disabled" is selected.

316 M517-E383T
Name Setting
Modality Performed Proc. Step (With MPPS option)
Select "Enabled" is selected.
(Without MPPS option)
Check "Disabled" is selected.
Print Shotsave Limit Check "100" is selected.
Display/Print Physician Name Check "Performing Physician" is selected.
Detailed Patient List Reducing the display item of the patient list results
in the quick appearance of the patient list window.
Disabled(Optimized):
Select for quick appearance.
Enabled:
Select to display all items.
When "Disabled" is set, search with study date
cannot be used.
Digital Host Control Check "Not Installed" is selected.
Thumbnail Frame Check value is selected the second from left as
shown in Figure 6-7.
Patient list archive status Set whether to display the status of archive
(CD-R/DVD-R and network) on Patient List screen.
In shipping, "Storage Confirm" is selected.
Storage Commit:
Select to display that the commitment is done.
Storage Confirm:
Select to display archive is done.
Disabled:
Select not to display the status of archive.
Patient list print status Set whether to display the status of printing on
Patient List screen.
In shipping, "Enabled" is selected.
Enabled:
Select to display printing is done.
Disabled:
Select not to display the status of printing.
Patient Delete Operations Check "No Warning" is selected.

M517-E383T 317
Name Setting
MPPS DAP Accumulation (With MPPS option)
Select "Current Session".
(Without MPPS option)
This setting is dimmed.
Opacification delay This item is Not Used.
Scale Display Set whether to display the Scale on the image.
In shipping, “Enabled” is selected.
Enabled:
Select to display the Scale.
Disabled:
Select not to display the Scale.
Function Keys Check all items are "None".

Click [Save] button to save changes made. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes]
button.

To set continuously, display screen to be set.

318 M517-E383T
d) Set image processing parameter

Click [Image Processing] tab to set image processing parameters.

Figure 6-8 Image Processing Screen

Set each item as follows (Please refer to Appendix D "X-ray Diagnostic Table Initial
Parameter Value List" about setting).
Name Settings
Fluoro Brightness Check "2048" is entered.
Fluoro Contrast Check "4095" is entered.
Fluoro Edge Level Check "0" is entered.
Fluoro Integration Level Check "0" is entered.
Spot Brightness Check "2048" is entered.
Spot Contrast Check "4095" is entered.
Spot Edge Level Check "0" is entered.
Spot Polarity Check "1" is entered.
H-Reverse Select "ON".
V-Reverse Select "OFF".
Auto-shutter Tolerance Check "100" is entered.

M517-E383T 319
Click [Save] button to save changes made. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes]
button.

To set continuously, display screen to be set.

320 M517-E383T
e) Set monitor LUTs

Click [Monitor LUTs] tab to set monitor LUTs.

Figure 6-9 Monitor LUTs Screen

Set each item as follows (Please refer to Appendix D "X-ray Diagnostic Table Initial
Parameter Value List" about setting).

Name Settings
In-room Primary Check "Linear, 10-bits" is selected.
In-room Reference Check "Linear, 10-bits" is selected.

Click [Save] button to save changes made. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes]
button.

To set continuously, display screen to be set.

M517-E383T 321
f) Set DICOM parameter

Click [DICOM] tab to set DICOM parameters.

Figure 6-10 DICOM Screen

Set each item as follows (Please refer to Appendix D "X-ray Diagnostic Table Initial
Parameter Value List" about setting).

Name Settings
Station Name Check "LocalAE" is entered.
Send AE Title Check one of the following is entered.
"DAR8k_StoreSCU" (default value)
or
Send AE Title in DAR-8000f specified by
installation site (ex: "DAR8k_StoreSCU1").
Receive AE Title Check one of the following is entered.
"DAR8k_StoreSCP" (default value)
or
AE Title in DAR-8000f specified by installation
site (ex: "DAR8k_StoreSCP1").

322 M517-E383T
Name Settings
Print AE Title Check one of the following is entered.
"DAR8k_PrintSCU" (default value)
or
Print AE Title in DAR-8000f specified by
installation site (ex: "DAR8k_PrintSCU1").
Worklist AE Title Check one of the following is entered.
"DAR8k_MWMSCU" (default value)
or
Worklist AE Title in DAR-8000f specified by
installation site (ex: "DAR8k_MWMSCU1").
MPPS AE Title Check one of the following is entered.
"DAR8k_MPPSSCU" (default value)
or
MPPS AE Title in DAR-8000f specified by
installation site (ex: "DAR8k_ MPPSSCU 1").
Query/Retrieve AE Title (This function is not currently supported.).
Check one of the following is entered.
"DAR8k_QRSCU" (default value)
General Timeout Check "60" is entered.
Wait for Association Reply Check "60" is entered.
Network write timeout Check "60" is entered.
Network inactivity timeout Check "60" is entered.
Wait for Association Request Check "60" is entered.
Wait for Association Release Check "60" is entered.
Network connect timeout Check "60" is entered.

Click [Save] button to save changes made. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes]
button.

To set continuously, display screen to be set.

M517-E383T 323
g) Set FOV parameter

Click [FOV Configuration] tab to set FOV parameters.

Figure 6-11 FOV Configuration Screen

Set each item as follows.


Name Settings
FOV Mode Check "17 Inch FPD" is entered.
Pixel Size Check "150" is entered.
Normal FOV size [inch] Check "17" is entered
Mag1 FOV size [inch] Check "15" is entered.
Mag2 FOV size [inch] Check "12" is entered.
Mag3 FOV size [inch] Check "9" is entered.
Mag4 FOV size [inch] Check "6" is entered. *1
Normal FOV size (actual)[mm] Check "431.8" is entered.
Mag1 FOV size (actual)[mm] Check "381" is entered.
Mag2 FOV size (actual)[mm] Check "304.8" is entered.
Mag3 FOV size (actual)[mm] Check "228.6" is entered.
Mag4 FOV size (actual)[mm] Check "152.4" is entered.
*1 The adjustment of the Mag4 uses the 6 inch of the FOV size that is not exist.

324 M517-E383T
Click [Save] button to save changes made. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes]
button.

To set continuously, display screen to be set.

M517-E383T 325
h) Set FPD Calibration
Click [FPD Calibration] tab to set FPD Calibration parameter.

Figure 6-12 FPD Calibration Screen

Set each item as follows.


Name Settings
Deficit Exposure Time (sec) Check "1" is entered
Grid Moving Time (msec) Check "5000" is entered
PCU X-Ray Setup Mode 0 Check "60" is entered.
Mode 1 Check "60" is entered.
Mode 2 Check "60" is entered.
Mode 3 Check "60" is entered.
Check "51" is entered.*
Mode 4 Check "60" is entered.
Check "55" is entered.*
Mode 5 Check "60" is entered.
Mode 6 Check "60" is entered.
Mode 7 Check "60" is entered.
Mode 8 Check "0" is entered.
Mode 9 Check "0" is entered.
Mode 10 Check "0" is entered.

326 M517-E383T
Name Settings
Mode 11 Check "0" is entered.
Mode 12 Check "0" is entered.
Mode 13 Check "0" is entered.
Mode 14 Check "0" is entered.
Mode 15 Check "0" is entered.
Mode 16 Check "65" is entered.
Mode 17 Check "80" is entered.
Mode 18 Check "80" is entered.
Mode 19 Check "80" is entered.
Mode 20 Check "80" is entered.
Mode 21 Check "80" is entered.
Mode 22 Check "80" is entered.
Mode 23 Check "80" is entered.
Mode 24 Check "80" is entered.
Mode 25 Check "80" is entered.
Mode 26 Check "80" is entered.
Mode 27 Check "80" is entered.
Mode 28 Check "80" is entered.
Mode 29 Check "0" is entered.
Mode 30 Check "0" is entered.
Mode 31 Check "0" is entered.
* For the system with Original type FPD and HighCoverage/Bariatric installed, set "51" for
MODE 3 and "55" for MODE 4.
For other systems, set "60" for MODE 3 and 4.

Click [Save] button to save changes made. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes]
button.

To set continuously, display screen to be set.

M517-E383T 327
6.3.2 Setting Communication with X-ray high-voltage generator Control
Cabinet

Use this screen to set items listed below for communication with X-ray high-voltage
generator control cabinet.

a) Set input signal


b) Set analog inputs
c) Set analog outputs
d) Set digital outputs
e) Set relay outputs

a) b) c) d) e)

328 M517-E383T
a) Set input signal

Click [Two State Inputs] tab to set enable / disable each input signal.

Figure 6-13 Two State Inputs Screen

M517-E383T 329
Set each item as follows (Please refer to Appendix D "X-ray Diagnostic Table Initial
Parameter Value List" about setting).
Name Settings
Fluoro On Check "Enabled" is selected.
PFluoro On Check "Enabled" is selected.
PFluoro Select Check "Disabled" is selected.
Prep Rad Exp Check "Enabled" is selected.
Req Rad Exp Check "Enabled" is selected.
Rad Ready Check "Enabled" is selected.
Rad Exp On Check "Disabled" is selected.
Rad Type Spot Check "Enabled" is selected.
Single / Rapid Check "Disabled" is selected.
Store Image Check "Disabled" is selected.
FOV Mag 1 Check "Disabled" is selected.
FOV Mag 2 Check "Disabled" is selected.
FOV Mag 3 Check "Disabled" is selected.
Reverse-H Check "Disabled" is selected.
Reverse-V Check "Disabled" is selected.

Click [Save] button to save changes made. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes]
button.

To set continuously, display screen to be set.

330 M517-E383T
b) Set analog inputs
There is not item to be set on screen displayed by clicking [Analog Inputs] tab.

Figure 6-14 Analog Inputs Screen

M517-E383T 331
c) Set analog outputs
Click [Analog Outputs] tab to set analog outputs.

Figure 6-15 Analog Outputs Screen

Set each item as follows (Please refer to Appendix D "X-ray Diagnostic Table Initial
Parameter Value List").

Name Settings
ABS Control Check "Enabled" is selected.

Click [Save] button to save changes made. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes]
button.

To set continuously, display screen to be set.

332 M517-E383T
d) Set digital output
Click [Digital Outputs] tab to set digital output.

Figure 6-16 Digital Outputs Screen

Set each item as follows (Please refer to Appendix D "X-ray Diagnostic Table Initial
Parameter Value List" about setting).

Name Settings
Pulsed Fluoro Ref Check "Enabled" is selected.
Pulse Width Check "10ms Pulse" is selected.
Polarity Check "Active High" is selected.
Phase Delay Check "0" is entered.
Show Timing Diagram Display the timing chart graph.
There is no need to set.

Click [Apply] button, and [Save] button to save changes made. A confirmation dialog is
displayed. Click [Yes] button.

M517-E383T 333
To set continuously, display screen to be set.
e) Set relay outputs
Click [Relay Outputs] tab to set relay outputs.

Figure 6-17 Relay Outputs Screen

Set each item as follows (Please refer to Appendix D "X-ray Diagnostic Table Initial
Parameter Value List" about setting).
Name Settings
Fluoro Inhibit Check "Disabled" is selected.
Spot Expose Check "Enabled" is selected.
Subtract Enabled (With DSA option)
Check "Enabled" is selected.
(Without DSA option)
Check "Disabled" is selected.
Injector Sync Check "Enabled" is selected.
Click [Save] button to save changes made. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes]
button.

To set continuously, display screen to be set.

334 M517-E383T
6.3.3 Setting DICOM CD/DVD Export
Use this screen to set items listed below for destination of DICOM CD/DVD Export.

a) Add new destination


b) Change setting of registered destination
c) Delete registered destination

b) c)

a)
Figure 6-18 Archive Devices Screen

DICOM Send (option) can be set on this screen. If the system has
DICOM Send option, set DICOM Send by referring to section 6.4.2
“Setting DICOM Send Option” after updating site key by referring
6.4.1 “Updating Site Key”.

M517-E383T 335
The value in each field on the Archive Device Screen depends on the
settings.

a) Add new destination

1) Click [ADD DEVICE] button at the lower left of "Archive Devices" screen. Following
screen is displayed.

2) Set each item as follows.


Name Settings
Configuration Enter name specified by installation site (ex:
"CD-R"). This name is displayed in b) shown in
Figure 6-18 as registered destination.
Device Type Select "DICOM Media".

3) Click [Create] button.

This setting is already done in shipping.

336 M517-E383T
4) Following screen is displayed.

“Save” button

5) Set each item as follows.

Name Setting
Device Name Enter same name as entered in "Configuration" in step 2).
The entered name can be selected as destination of DICOM
CD/DVD Export in clinical application.
Drive ID Select "D".
Root Directory Check blank is displayed.
File Set ID Check blank is displayed.
Application Profile Check "GP (Genl Purpose) CDR" is selected.
Verify disc after burn Select "No".
Eject disc after write Select "No".

When “YES” is selected in “Eject disc after write”, export may not be
continuously done because CD-R/DVD-R media is ejected from drive
every time export is done.

M517-E383T 337
6) Click [Save] button to save new destination. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click
[Yes] button.

Only one DICOM Media destination can be registered. If more than one
DICOM Media destination is registered, a warning dialog is displayed.

Follow steps below.


1) Click [OK] button.
2) Leave only one media drive destination to be registere d. Remove all
but one media by following “c) Delete registered destination ” below.
3) Click [Save] button to save changes made. A confirmation dialog is
displayed. Click [Yes] button.

To set continuously, display screen to be set.

338 M517-E383T
b) Change setting of registered destination

1) Select destination to be changed. Setting of selected destination is displayed at the


right of screen.

2) Change setting
1) Select destination

2) Change the setting.

3) Click [Save] button to save changes made. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click
[Yes] button.

When changing “Device Name”, “Root Directory”, or “File Set ID” in


DICOM Media, it is possible to click [Save] button, which is indicated
by grayed-out, to save settings.
It is occurred because of display control problem in [Save] button,
however it is not effect on normal operations.

To set continuously, display screen to be set.

M517-E383T 339
c) Delete registered destination

1) Select the destination to be deleted.


2) Delete destination

1) Select destination

2) Click [Delete] button to display following screen.

3) Check the name is to be deleted. If so, click [Delete] button to complete deletion.

4) Click [Save] button to save changes made. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click
[Yes] button.

Deletion is complete.
To set continuously, display screen to be set.

340 M517-E383T
6.3.4 Setting Destination of DICOM Print
Use this screen to set items listed below for destination of DICOM Print.

a) Add new destination


b) Change setting of registered destination
c) Delete registered destination

b) c)

a)

Figure 6-19 Printer Devices Screen

M517-E383T 341
d) Add new destination

1) Click [ADD PRINTER] button at the lower left of "Printer Devices" screen. Following
screen is displayed.

2) Set each item as follows.


Name Setting
Configuration Enter name specified by installation site (ex:
"DICOM Printer"). This name is displayed in b)
shown in Figure 6-19 as registered destination.
Printer Type Select "DICOM". (*1)
(*1)
In this system, "DHC" and "Windows" cannot be used.

342 M517-E383T
3) Click [Create] button. Following window is displayed.

4) Set each item as follows.


Name Setting
Name Enter same name as entered in "Configuration" in
step 2).
The entered name can be selected as destination
of DICOM Print in clinical application.
IP Addr Enter IP address specified by installation site.
AE Title Enter AE title specified by installation site.
Port # Enter port number specified by installation site.
Local AE Title Check local AE title specified by installation site
(ex: "DAR8k_PrintSCU1") is entered.

M517-E383T 343
5) Click [Next>>] button to display following screen.
The information entered in step 2) and 4) is displayed.

“Save” button

6) Set each item as follows. The underlined setting is default.

Name Settings
Destination The selected destination is displayed. This item
cannot be changed.
Priority Set priority to output from DAR-8000 to printer.
Select from Low / Medium / High.
Film Orientation Set film output orientation.
Select Portrait / Landscape specified by
installation site.

344 M517-E383T
Name Settings
Film Size Set film size. The setting value is used as
default in clinical application, and can be
changed when printing in clinical application.
Select 8 in x 10 in / 10 in x 12 in / 10 in x 14 in /
11 in x 14 in / 14 in x 14 in / 14 in x 17 in / 24 cm
x 24 cm / 24 cm x 30 cm specified by installation
site.
AE Title Enter AE title specified by installation site.
IP Address Enter IP address specified by installation site.
Port Number Enter port number specified by installation site.
Magnification Type Set magnification type during print.
Select from None / Replicate / Bilinear.
Border Density Set the color around film.
Select from Black / White.
Empty Film Density Set the color around no image.
Select from Black / White.
Trim Set with or without separator line displayed
between each frame.
Select from No / Yes.
Polarity Set with or without invert negative/positive
during film output.
Select from Normal / Inverted.
Minimum Density Set minimum density during film output.
Select from 0~399(Min).
Maximum Density Set maximum density during film output.
Select from 0~399(Max).

For “Minimum Density” and “Maximum Density” setting, decide the


value with a representative of printer maker in image adjustment
when connecting to printer.

M517-E383T 345
7) Click [Save] button to save new destination. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click
[Yes] button. Setting is complete.

To set continuously, display screen to be set.

346 M517-E383T
e) Change setting for registered destination

1) Select destination to be changed. Setting of selected destination is displayed at the


right of screen.

1) Select destination

2) Change setting

2) Change setting.
When changing the setting of "Network Information", click [Update] button. Unless
clicking [Update] button, the change that is made may not be reflected.

3) Click [Save] button to save changes made. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click
[Yes] button. Setting is complete.

To set continuously, display screen to be set.

M517-E383T 347
f) Delete registered destination

1) Select destination to be deleted.

2) Click [Delete] button.

2) Delete destination

1) Select destination

3) Following screen is displayed. Check that name is to be deleted. If so, click [Delete]
button. Deletion will be complete.

4) Click [Save] button to save changes made. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click
[Yes] button.

Deletion is complete.
To set continuously, display screen to be set.

348 M517-E383T
6.3.5 Setting Patient Information Entry Item
Use this screen to set Used / Not Used for each patient information entry item.

Figure 6-20 Patient Data Configuration Screen

M517-E383T 349
Default is set as follows.

Item Setting Range (in shipping)


Patient Data
Patient Name Required (Required)
Patient ID Required (Required)
Date of Birth Required / Used / Not Used (Used)
Government ID Required / Used / Not Used (Not Used)
Study Count Used / Not Used (Used)
Series Count Used / Not Used (Used)
Image Count Used / Not Used (Used)
Occupation Required / Used / Not Used (Not Used)
Address Required / Used / Not Used (Not Used)
Country of Residence Required / Used / Not Used (Not Used)
Region of Residence Required / Used / Not Used (Not Used)
Telephone Number Required / Used / Not Used (Not Used)
Alt. Telephone Number Required / Used / Not Used (Not Used)
Study Data
Date Required (Required)
Time Required (Required)
Referring Physician Required / Used / Not Used (Used)
Performing Physician Required / Used / Not Used (Used)
Study ID Required (Required)
Accession Number Used / Not Used (Used)
Study Description Required / Used / Not Used (Used)
Patient Sex Required / Used / Not Used (Used)
Patient Age Required / Used / Not Used (Used)
Patient Height Required / Used / Not Used (Used)
Patient Weight Required / Used / Not Used (Used)
Series Count Used / Not Used (Used)
Image Count Used / Not Used (Used)
Series Data
Series Number Used (Used)
Laterality Required / Used / Not Used (Not Used)
Date Required (Required)
Time Required (Required)
Performing Physician Required / Used / Not Used (Used)

350 M517-E383T
Item Setting Range (in shipping)
Referring Physician Required / Used / Not Used (Used)
Description Required / Used / Not Used (Used)
Body Part Examined Required / Used / Not Used (Not Used)
Patient Position Required / Used / Not Used (Not Used)
Requested Procedure ID Required / Used / Not Used (Not Used)
Scheduled Procedure ID Required / Used / Not Used (Not Used)
Performed Procedure ID Required / Used / Not Used (Not Used)

According to setting value on this screen, each item is displayed as follows.

 Item set to "Required":


The corresponding item becomes enabled and "*" will be displayed.

 Item set to "Used":


The corresponding item becomes enabled.

 Item set to "Not Used":


The corresponding item becomes disabled.

Do not change item set as “Not Used” in shipping to “Used”.


If not necessary, do not change item that is not set as “Required” in
shipping to “Required”.

M517-E383T 351
6.4 Set DICOM Option

DAR-8000 provides following function as option. Check every available option on the label
on the side of DAR-8000 Control Cabinet and set these options. When option is added
after installation, set added option after updating site key by referring to section 6.4.1
"Updating Site Key".

 DICOM Send
 DICOM Worklist (MWM)
 MPPS

If the system has some options in shipping, the site key corresponding
to the option is already set. Updating Site Key is unnecessary.

6.4.1 Updating Site Key

To use DICOM option, the site key corresponding to the option needs to be set for
DAR-8000f system. Check the Site Key on "Label, SiteKey" and update the site key by
referring Appendix B-6 "Updating Site Key".

If several options are ordered at the same time, all options are
included to one “LABEL, SITEKEY” because only one “LABEL,
SITEKEY” is provided for one system.

352 M517-E383T
6.4.2 Setting DICOM Send Option
Use this screen to set items listed below for destination of DICOM Send.

a) Add new destination


b) Change setting of registered destination
c) Delete registered destination

b) c)

a)
Figure 6-21 Archive Devices Screen

DICOM CD Export can be set on this screen. Refer to Section 6. 3.3


“Setting DICOM CD Export”.

M517-E383T 353
6.4.2.1 Setting Destination

a) Add new destination

1) Click [ADD DEVICE] button at the lower left of Archive Devices screen. Following
screen is displayed.

2) Set each item as follows.


Name Settings
Configuration Enter name specified by installation site (ex:
"DICOM Server"). This name is displayed in b)
shown in Figure 6-21 as registered destination.
Device Type Select "DICOM Network".

3) Click [Create] button to display following window.

354 M517-E383T
4) Set each item as follows.
Name Settings
Name Enter same name as entered in
"Configuration" in step 2).
The entered name can be selected as
destination of DICOM Send in clinical
application.
IP Addr Enter IP address of destination specified by
installation site.
AE Title Enter AE title of destination specified by
installation site.
Port# Enter port number of destination specified by
installation site.
Enable Storage Commit Check this item is not checked.
Local AE Title Check local AE title specified by installation
site (ex: "DAR8k_StoreSCU1") is entered.
PPWS (means Side When the destination is Side Station, select
Station) the check box.

5) Click [Next>>] button to display following screen. Following screen is displayed.

The information entered in step 2) and 4) is


displayed here.

[Save]

M517-E383T 355
6) Click [Save] button to save new destination. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click
[Yes] button.

To set continuously, display screen to be set.

356 M517-E383T
b) Change setting of registered destination

1) Select destination to be changed. Setting of selected destination is displayed at the


right of screen.

1) Select destination 2) Change setting

2) Change the setting.

3) Follow steps below.

 When changing the setting of "Storage Commit Timeout" in DICOM Network

Click [Save] button to save changes made. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click
[Yes] button.

M517-E383T 357
When changing “Storage Commit Timeout” in DICOM Network, it is
possible to click [Save] button, which is indicated by grayed-out, to
save settings.
It is occurred because of the display control problem in [Save]
button, however it is not effect on normal operations.

To set continuously, display screen to be set.

 When changing the setting of "Network Information" in DICOM Network

Click [Update] button to save changes made.


To set continuously, display screen to be set.

The settings of “Network Information” are saved by clicking


[Update] button.

358 M517-E383T
c) Delete registered destination

1) Select the destination to be deleted.


2) Delete destination

1) Select destination

2) Click [Delete] button to display following screen.

3) Check the name is to be deleted. If so, click [Delete] button to complete deletion.

4) Click [Save] button to save changes made. A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click
[Yes] button.

Deletion is complete.
To set continuously, display screen to be set.

M517-E383T 359
6.4.2.2 Confirmation

Check DICOM send is correctly operated. Refer to section 9.5 "Checking DICOM Send
Option".

360 M517-E383T
6.4.3 Setting Destination of DICOM Worklist (MWM)
Use this screen to set items listed below for destination of DICOM Worklist.

a) Add new destination


b) Change setting of registered destination
c) Delete registered destination

NOTE
This screen is displayed by clicking [Worklist Devices].

M517-E383T 361
6.4.3.1 Setting Destination
a) Add new destination

1) Click [Worklist Devices] to display following window.

2) Set each item as follows.


Name Settings
Name Enter name specified by installation site.
The entered name can be selected as destination of
DICOM Worklist in clinical application.
IP Addr Enter IP address of destination specified by installation
site.
AE Title Enter AE title of destination specified by installation site.
Port # Enter port number of destination specified by installation
site.
Local AE Title Check local AE title specified by installation site (ex:
"DAR8k_MWMSCU") is entered.

3) Click [Next>>] button.


Setting is complete.
To set continuously, display screen to be set.

362 M517-E383T
b) Change setting of registered destination

1) Delete destination by referring to c) "Delete registered destination".

2) Add destination by referring to a) "Add new destination".


Setting is complete.

c) Delete registered destination

1) Click [Worklist Devices] to display following window.

2) Click [down-arrow] in "Name" field to display drop-down menu.

M517-E383T 363
3) Click [up-arrow] to scroll to top. Select destination to be deleted.

4) Click [Delete] button.

5) Following dialog is displayed. Click [OK] button.

364 M517-E383T
6) Click [Next>>] button.

Deletion is complete.
To set continuously, display screen to be set.

M517-E383T 365
6.4.3.2 Confirmation
Check DICOM Worklist (MWM) is correctly operated. Refer to section 9.8 "Checking
DICOM Worklist Option".

366 M517-E383T
6.4.4 Setting Destination of DICOM MPPS
Use this screen to set items listed below for destination of DICOM MPPS.

a) Register new destination


b) Change setting of registered destination
c) Delete registered destination

NOTE
This screen is displayed by clicking [MPPS Device].

M517-E383T 367
6.4.4.1 Setting Destination

a) Register new destination

1) Click [MPPS Devices] to display following window.

2) Set each item as follows.


Name Settings
Name Enter name specified by installation site.
IP Addr Enter IP address of destination specified by installation
site.
AE Title Enter AE title of destination specified by installation site.
Port # Enter port number of destination specified by installation
site.
Local AE Title Check local AE title specified by installation site (ex:
"DAR8k_MPPSSCU") is entered.
If the destination of MPPS and MWM are the same, enter
the same Local AE Title as it of MWM.

3) Click [Next>>] button.


Setting is complete.

Only one destination can be set for DICOM MPPS.

368 M517-E383T
b) Change setting of registered destination

1) Delete destination by referring to c) "Delete registered destination".

2) Add destination by referring to a) "Register new destination".


Setting is complete.

M517-E383T 369
c) Delete registered destination

1) Click [MPPS Devices] to display following window.

2) Click [Delete] button.

370 M517-E383T
3) Following dialog is displayed. Click [OK] button.

4) Click [Next>>] button.

Deletion is complete.
To set continuously, display screen to be set.

If the registered destination cannot be deleted, please try the deletion


process again.

M517-E383T 371
6.4.4.2 Confirmation
Check DICOM MPPS is correctly operated. Refer to section 9.9 "Checking DICOM MPPS".

372 M517-E383T
7 Work for Adding Option

7.1 Basic Component

Basic components of option are as follows.


・Device (Only for the option accompanied with device.)
・Operation Manual (Only for the option not described in the Operation Manual attached
to DAR-8000.)
・Option label
・Label, SiteKey (502-24436)

7.2 Install Option

This section shows the options and how to set them up.

7.2.1 PPWS OPTION ASSY (502-24407)

a) Connection
Refer to M517-E451 "Side Station Installation Manual".

b) Setting
1) Setting at DAR-8000f
Start the Service Application and click [Configuration] - [Archive Device].
Add the following new destination by referring 6.4.2 "Setting DICOM Send Option"
・Configuration: Side Station
・Device Type: DICOM Network
・Name: Side Station
・IP Addr: Enter IP address of Side Station specified by the installation site.
・AE Title: DRWS00
・Port#: 10080
・Enable Storage Commit : □(not selected)
・PPWS: ■(selected)

2) Setting at Side Station


Refer to M517-E451 "Side Station Installation Manual".

M517-E383T 373
7.2.2 TOMOGRAPHY OPTION (502-24706)

a) Connection
By Referring to the section 4.2.2 "UD150B-40/L-40" in "M506-E327
REMOTE-CONTROLLED DIAGNOSTIC TABLE ZS-100I /ZS-100IR INSTALLATION
MANUAL", connect wires for controlling the diagnostic table to perform Tomography.

b) Setting
1) Setting the Site Key
By referring to the section Appendix B-6 "Updating Site Key", update the SiteKey.
2) Radiography Condition Settings
Set the X-ray condition (Generator) and APR (DAR-8000f) of Tomography according to
"M517-E435 DAR8000f Image Quality Adjustment Manual".

374 M517-E383T
7.2.3 TOMOSYNTHESIS OPTION (502-24702)

When the system software of DAR-8000f is Revision 03.80.00 or later,


make sure to perform (b) for the use of the AIR calibration, and the
change in PCU mode.

a) Connection
By referring to the section 4.2.2 "UD150B-40/L-40" in "M506-E327
REMOTE-CONTROLLED DIAGNOSTIC TABLE ZS-100I /ZS-100IR INSTALLATION
MANUAL", connect wires for controlling the diagnostic table to perform Tomosynthesis.

b) Setting
1) Setting in Side Station
By referring to the section 4.2 "Registering the Software License Key" of "M517-E451
Side Station Installation Manual", register the license key from the Side Station License
Media (502-24714) attached to the system or the option.

When a plurality of license media exist, use the newest license media.
All the licenses needs to be registered with the newest license media
since the license is not added but it is rewritten.

2) Setting the Site Key


By referring to the section Appendix B-6 "Updating Site Key", update the SiteKey.
3) Registering DCOM
By referring to the section Appendix B-19 "Registering DCOM", register DCOM.
4) Setting Tomosynthesis
By referring to the section Appendix B-24 "Tomosynthesis", enable the Tomosynthesis.
5) Setting Air Calibration
By referring to the section Appendix B-23 "Air Calibration", enable the Air calibration.

M517-E383T 375
In the SONIALVISION SafireII system, the image quality improvement
by AIRCALIB method is provided as follows, depending on the shipping
period:
For the system shipped before July, 2009 : Option
For the system shipped in July, 2009 and later : Standard
Only when the option is ordered (the option label "AIRCALIB" is
attached), perform the setting to enable the Air Calibration.
When the Air Calibration is disabled, the calibration of Tomosynthesis is
included in the normal calibration.

6) Setting X-ray Conditions


Set the X-ray Condition (Generator) and APR (DAR-8000f) of the Tomosynthesis and
Air calibration according to "M517-E435 DAR8000f Image Quality Adjustment Manual".
(TOMOS and AIRCALIB are registered as default APR. When the option is not ordered,
delete APR for AIRCALIB.)

Set [TOMOS***] (any character string for ***) as an APR cell title for
Tomosynthesis. Make sure to enter "TOMOS" in capital.
Tomosynthesis will not performed correctly when the APR cell title
except [TOMOS***] is used.

Do not set [Tomography] as the acquisition mode in the acquisition item


of the APR cell for Tomosynthesis.
Tomography will not be performed correctly even in the case that
[Tomography] has been set.

376 M517-E383T
7) Perform Air Calibration
Perform the Air Calibration in all the FOV sizes.

In the SONIALVISION safireII system (already delivered), the image


quality improvement by the AIRCALIB method is provided as an option.
Only when the option is ordered (the option label "AIRCALIB" is
attached), perform the Air Calibration.

The FPD calibration cannot create calibration data for Tomosynthesis.


Make sure to perform the Air calibration in order to obtain correct
images.

M517-E383T 377
7.2.4 REMOTE MAINTE OPTION ASSY (502-24408)

a) Connection
Refer to M517-E429 "DAR-8000 Remote Maintenance Installation Manual".

b) Setting
Refer to M517-E429 "DAR-8000 Remote Maintenance Installation Manual".

7.2.5 DICOM PRINT OPTION (502-24417)

a) Connection
Refer to 4.8.6.2 "Connecting KVM Cable, USB Memory and LAN Cable".

b) Setting
Refer to 6.3.4 "Setting Destination of DICOM Print".

7.2.6 DICOM STORAGE OPTION (502-24418)

a) Connection
Refer to 4.8.6.2 "Connecting KVM Cable, USB Memory and LAN Cable".

b) Setting
Refer to 6.4.2 "Setting DICOM Send Option".

7.2.7 DICOM MEDIA STORAGE OPTION (502-24419)

a) Connection
No connection.

b) Setting
Refer to 6.3.3 "Setting DICOM CD/DVD Export".

378 M517-E383T
7.2.8 DICOM MWM OPTION (502-24421)

a) Connection
Refer to 4.8.6.2 "Connecting KVM Cable, USB Memory and LAN Cable".

b) Setting
Update the SiteKey. The "Worklist" tab appears on the Patient List as shown below.
Set items in 6.4.3 "Setting Destination of DICOM Worklist (MWM)".

7.2.9 DICOM MPPS OPTION (502-24422)

a) Connection
Refer to 4.8.6.2 "Connecting KVM Cable, USB Memory and LAN Cable".

b) Setting
Update the SiteKey and set items in 6.4.4 "Setting Destination of DICOM MPPS".

M517-E383T 379
7.2.10 PULSED FLUOROSCOPY OPTION (502-24424)

a) Connection
No connection.

b) Setting
Refer to b) "Set system parameter" in 6.3.1 "Setting System Configuration".
In Fluoro Pulse Rates, check "30pps", "15pps", "7.5pps", and "3.75pps".

7.2.11 SDA OPTION (502-24425)

a) Connection
No connection.

b) Setting
Refer to b) "Set system parameter" in 6.3.1 "Setting System Configuration".
Set "Auto Storage Image Type" to "Acquired and Combined Images".

380 M517-E383T
7.2.12 REFERENCE MONITOR OPTION (502-24445)

a) Connection

1) Connecting the video cable inside the cabinet


Refer to 4.8.4 "Connecting Video Cable (Option)".

2) Connecting Monitor in Control Room


If you use the LCD monitor in Control Room, install the LCD monitor to the LCD stand by
referring to section 4.4.4 "Installing the LCD on the LCD Stand (LCD monitor manufactured
by Siemens)".

Connect the following cables according to the section 4.4.1.


14. CABLE, KB-D315K (088-50905-12) (*1):
・ Connect to the power.

15. CABLE, KB-5BNC2K (088-50905-03):


・ Connect G (Video), H (Sync) and V (Snyc).

・ When you use the LCD monitor (G11-S) manufactured by NANAO, connect
the cable attached to the monitor to DVI.
(*1)
"071-60826-01 CORD SET, KP-1601AH+KS-31A* 2.4M" may be shipped
instead of "088-50905-12 CABLE, KB-D315K".

Connector Name R(Video) G (Video) B (Video) H (Sync) V (Sync)


Cable Color Red Green Blue Gray Black
Table 7-1 Color of Video Cable for monitor in control room

M517-E383T 381
3) Connecting In-room Monitor (OPTION)

If you use the Monitor Cart for one LCD monitor, install the LCD monitor to the LCD stand
by referring to section 4.4.4 "Installing the LCD on the LCD Stand (LCD monitor
manufactured by Siemens)".

Connect in-room monitor as shown in Figure 7-1.


Reference Monitor
(Option) Monitor

10 8

Power Supply Box

11

Figure 7-1 Connecting Monitor Cart and 17" Monitor / Rear Face

Connect the in-room monitor as shown in Figure 7-1:

10. CORD SET, KP300C+KS16F 2SQ2.5MT (071-60815-04):


・ Connect monitor power cable to power connector in monitor cart.

11. CABLE ASSY, 5BNC/HD15P-20 (088-50528-01):

・ Connect R (Video) (*2), G (Video), B (Video) (*2), H (Sync) and V


(Sync).

(*2)
Only if the monitor has these connectors, the connection is needed.
・ When you use the LCD monitor (G11-S) manufactured by NANAO, connect
the cable KB-CHD1520L (088-50905-18) to DVI via the adapter, AD-DV02
(088-50602-25).
Connector Name R(Video) G(Video) B(Video) H(Sync) V(Sync)
Cable Color Red Green Blue Yellow White
Table 7-2 Color of Video Cable for In-room Monitor

382 M517-E383T
4) Change the monitor settings
By referring to the section 5.2.2.2 "Setting Resolution for Two Monitors", change the
settings to use two monitors.

5) Change the application settings


By referring to the section c) "Setting System Configuration" in 6.3.1 "Setting System
Configuration", set "Reference Image Display" to "1-on-1 w/ Thumbnails".

6) Adjust the screen position


By referring to the section Appendix F "Adjusting Monitor Display", adjust the screen
position on the second monitor.

7.2.13 DSA OPTION (502-24429)

a) Connection
No connection

b) Setting
By referring to the section Appendix B-6 "Updating Site Key", update the SiteKey.
DSA can be selected in the APR (Radiography tab).

M517-E383T 383
7.2.14 RSM-DSA OPTION (502-24430)

a) Connection
No connection

b) Setting
By referring to the section Appendix B-6 "Updating Site Key", update the SiteKey.
RSM-DSA can be selected in the APR (Radiography tab).

384 M517-E383T
7.2.15 POST-SURE OPTION (502-27759)

a) Connection
No connection

b) Setting
1) Setting in Side Station
By referring to "4.2 Registering the Software License Key" of "M517-E451 Side Station
Installation Manual", register the license key from the Side Station License Media
(502-24714) attached to the system or the option.

When a plurality of license media exist, use the newest license media.
All the licenses needs to be registered with the newest license media
since the license is not added but it is rewritten.

2) Enabling the POST-SURE OPTION


By referring to the section Appendix B-25 "POST SURE", enable the POST SURE.

3) Setting the Radiography Conditions


By referring to "M517-E435 DAR8000f Image Quality Adjustment Manual", set APR
(DAR-8000) to which the POST SURE is applied.

M517-E383T 385
7.3 Put Option Label

Put an option label attached to each option on the side panel of DAR-8000f cabinet after
installing an option.

Side panel of DAR-8000f


Cabinet

Rear Front

Location for Option Label


50

30

* Put the Option Label on the location for option label, from bottom up.

386 M517-E383T
7.4 Replace Label, SiteKey

"Label, SiteKey" (502-24436) is attached to each option. On the "Label, SiteKey", the
SiteKey is written to enable an option. Replace the old "Label, SiteKey" with new one.
Inside the DAR-8000f Cabinet

PC Side Cover

Rear Front

Label, SiteKey

Even when several options are added at the same time, only one “LABEL,
SITEKEY”(502-24436) may be attached.

When several options are added at the same time, and several “LABEL,
SITEKEY”(502-24436) are attached, if written SiteKey is different from
each other, contact to your Shimadzu service representative .

M517-E383T 387
7.5 Updating SiteKey

Update SiteKey written on "Label, SiteKey (502-24436)" by referring Appendix B-6.

388 M517-E383T
7.6 Setting for changing the System from RF to DSA System

When DSA option is added, the following work is needed.

1. Checking the system configuration


2. Changing the settings for the service application
3. Changing the settings for the Sonialvision console

7.6.1 Checking the System Configuration

By referring a) "Set information about installation site" in the section 6.3.1 "Setting System
Configuration", click [Site Info] tab and check the "Model Name" is set to "DSA Digital
System".

If the "Model Name" is set to "RF Digital System", update the site key by referring section
7.5 "Updating SiteKey".

7.6.2 Changing the Settings for the Service Application

By referring to b) "Set system parameter" in section 6.3.1"Setting System Configuration",


click on [Interfaces] tab and change the following items to settings corresponding to DSA
option.

 "Injector Control"
 "Spot Subtract Calibration"
 "Reference Image Display"
 "Subtract Enabled"
 "Sonial Vision"

7.6.3 Changing the Settings for the Sonialvision Console

Change or add the label of buttons on the Sonialvision Console as "Sonial Vision" set in
the section 7.6.2 "Changing the Settings for the Service Application".

M517-E383T 389
7.7 Checking APR Settings

Check that APR adapted to the system specification is registered.


Refer to "M517-E435 DAR8000f Image Quality Adjustment Manual" for the APR settings.

390 M517-E383T
8 Setting Standard Operation Environment

In standard operation environment of DAR-8000f, auto start and auto logon / auto shut
down with user "operator" is set in application. Please follow each item below.

 To set auto start in application

Set that clinical application or service application is automatically started according to


each user below.
Please refer to Appendix B-3 "Setting Auto Start of Application".

User Name Password


operator orion

 To set auto logon with user "operator"

Set for auto logon with user "operator". (*1)


Please refer to Appendix B-4 "Setting Auto Logon with User "operator.

 To set auto shut down

(*1)
Set that OS is automatically shut down after exiting clinical application.
Please refer to Appendix B-5 "Setting Auto Shut down".

(*1)
Please perform this after log-on with user "shimadzu".

M517-E383T 391
This page is intentionally left blank.

392 M517-E383T
9 Confirmation
This section describes how to check operation from power-on to fluoroscopy, radiography,
and image replay after installation is complete.
After checking installation, wiring, and power in each unit, please check operations by
following the steps in this section.

9.1 Checking Start-up

Power ON the X-ray high-voltage generator (Refer to section 3 "System Basic Operation"
in "M517-E060 Digital Radiography System DAR-8000f Operation Manual").

 Are monitors (*1), peripherals and DAR-8000 control cabinet


automatically powered ON?
 Is it automatically logged on after Windows® is started?
If not, set up auto logon by referring to Appendix B-4 "Setting Auto
Logon with User "operator.
 Is "Initializing・・・" displayed in main monitor?
If not, set up by referring to Appendix B-3 "Setting Auto Start of
Application".
After that,
 Does "Initializing・・・" disappear?
 Is the initial screen of application displayed after "Initializing・・・"
disappears?

The following check is required when your system has the reference monitor option.

 Is GUI displayed on the reference monitor?


 If GUI is not displayed or the message, "Reference Monitor Not
Detected. Reference Display Features will be limited", is displayed,
set the item related to the Reference Monitor Option by referring
7.2.12 "REFERENCE MONITOR OPTION (502-24445)".

(*1)
The monitor configuration depends on options. All monitors have to be checked.

M517-E383T 393
9.2 Checking Operation

Select "Display Operation Manual" from right-click menu over Main Image area and select
"1. Summary of DAR-8000f". (Refer to section 3.5 "Displaying the Online Operation
Manual" and section 4 "Patient Files Operations" in "M517-E060 Digital Radiography
System DAR-8000f Operation Manual").

 Is "1. Summary of DAR-8000f" displayed?

Click [Patient List] on main screen.


 Is Patient List screen displayed over Main Image area?

9.3 Checking Fluoroscopy and Radiography

Create a new patient file. After patient file is opened as study, set the fluoro X-ray condition
as "DC" fluoroscopy on the APR fluoroscopy screen, and then step on foot switch (Refer to
section 6.2.1 "Live Fluoro Screen" and 6.6 "Radiography via Sonialvision Console" in
"M517-E060 Digital Radiography System DAR-8000f Operation Manual").

 Is fluoro image displayed?

Change the fluoro X-ray condition from continuous mode to pulse mode on APR
Fluoroscopy window (Only check through this section if there is pulse fluoro option).

 Is fluoro X-ray condition displayed in X-ray high-voltage generator


console changed to "Pulse"?

Step on foot switch.


 Is fluoro image displayed?

Switch a fluoroscopy mode with the generator or the Sonialvision console, and step on the
foot switch.
 Is a normal fluoroscopy image without horizontal line displayed in all
the fluoroscopy modes?
 Is a normal fluoroscopy image without horizontal line displayed in all
the FOV sizes?

394 M517-E383T
Press on hand switch to perform radiography several times.
 Is an acquired image displayed?
 Is the image acquired now registered to thumbnail?
 Can images be acquired in each acquisition mode?
 When you set the auto image transfer to Side Station in
tomosynthesis.
Are images sent to Side Station automatically?
Is the reconstruction of images complete?
 Is the set layer acquired repeatedly in tomography?

M517-E383T 395
9.4 Checking Image Processing

Select a patient created in section 9.3 "Checking Fluoroscopy and Radiography" on


"Patient List" screen and click [Review] button (Refer to section 7 "Reviewing /
Processing Images" in "M517-E060 Digital Radiography System DAR-8000f Operation
Manual").

 Is the radiography image acquired in section 9.3 "Checking


Fluoroscopy and Radiography" displayed?
 Is zoom display available?
 Is multi-format display available?
 Is annotation available?
 Can Window / Level be changed by mouse operation?
 Are the image of SPOT_O and SPOT_P generated on the Side
Station、when radiography with presets where POST-SURE
processing has been set is performed?
 Does the SPOT_O processing image differ from the SPOT_P
processing image? They use its own processing method.

396 M517-E383T
9.5 Checking DICOM Send Option

Only check through this section if DICOM Send function is correctly


configured.

Perform DICOM Send for image in a patient "TestPatterns" by following the steps in the
operation manual (Refer to section 5 "APR (Anatomical Program) Configuration" in
"M517-E060 Digital Radiography System DAR-8000f Operation Manual").

 Is DICOM Send job (ex: Job Type: "DICOM", Destination: "Simple" (*1))
added in "Active Jobs" on "Status" window?
 Is image correctly received in destination?

Perform radiography with Auto DICOM Storage ON in APR Radiography screen (Refer to
section 11.1.3 "Auto DICOM Send (Option)" and 5 "APR (Anatomical Program) Configuration"
in "M517-E060 Digital Radiography System DAR-8000f Operation Manual").

 Is DICOM Send job (ex: Job Type: "DICOM", Destination: "Simple" (*1))
added in "Active Jobs" on "Status" window?

(*1)
"Name" set in section 6.4.2 "Setting DICOM Send Option" is displayed.

M517-E383T 397
9.6 Checking DICOM CD/DVD Export

Only check through this section if DICOM CD/DVD Export function is


correctly configured.

Create a new patient and perform radiography several times. Perform DICOM CD/DVD
Export for images in the patient created now by following the steps in the operation manual
(Refer to section 11.1.1 "Export to DICOM CD/DVD" in "M517-E060 Digital Radiography
System DAR-8000f Operation Manual").

 Is the start of CD Export job displayed in "Export Status" on "Media


Export" window?
 Is it correctly exported to media?

Delete the patient created now from DAR-8000f. Eject the media and insert the media
again, and import images from the media.

 Is patient information exported now displayed on "Media Import"


window?
 Is it correctly imported from media?

In DAR-8000f, display image imported from media.

 Is image correctly displayed?


 Is the displayed image same as the image acquired?

Delete the patient created now from DAR-8000f. Eject the media and insert the media
again, and import images from the media.

 Is patient information exported now displayed on "Media Import"


screen?
 Is it correctly imported from media?

In DAR-8000f, display image imported from media.


 Is image correctly displayed?
 Is the displayed image same as the image acquired?
(*1)
"Device Name" set in section 6.3.3 "Setting DICOM CD/DVD Export" is displayed.

398 M517-E383T
9.7 Checking DICOM Print

Only check through this section if DICOM Print function is correctly


configured.

Perform DICOM Print for image in a patient "TestPatterns" by following the steps in the
operation manual.

 Is DICOM print job added to "Status" tab on "Status" window?


 Is the printed film output with specified film size and film format?
 Is the printed film same as the image displayed in Monitor?

Perform radiography with Auto-Print "ON" on "APR Radiography" window (Refer to


section 5 "APR (Anatomical Program) Configuration" in "M517-E060 Digital Radiography
System DAR-8000f Operation Manual").

 Is Auto-Print job (ex: Job Type: "Hardcopy", Destination: "DICOM


Printer" (*1)) added in "Active Jobs" on "Status" window?

(*1)
"Name" set in section 6.3.4 "Setting Destination of DICOM Print" is displayed.

M517-E383T 399
9.8 Checking DICOM Worklist Option

Only check through this section if DICOM Worklist function is correctly


configured.

Open "Patient List" window.

 Is "Worklist" tab displayed on the patient list window?

Click [Verify] on "Worklist" window.

 Is "Echo Success" displayed in the right area of "Verify"?

400 M517-E383T
9.9 Checking DICOM MPPS

Only check through this section if DICOM MPPS function is correctly


configured.

Execute a query on "Worklist" window and open the study of the queried patient.
Acquire the image, and close the study.
Click "Status" on the Standard Control panel to open "Status" window.
Click "Message" Tab.

 Is the log of the output log to MPPS displayed on the window?


 Is the current study situation complete on MPPS server?

M517-E383T 401
9.10 Checking Exit

Exit the application.

 Is application correctly exited?


 After exiting the application, is DAR-8000 powered OFF?
If not, set up by referring to AppendixB-5.
 After DAR-8000fs powered OFF, does "power" indicator lamp of DC
power on "Power Control" window of Xcat lights up?
 When 30 minutes has passed after DAR-8000fs powered OFF, is
"power" indicator lamp of High Voltage Main power supply (HV)
turned off on "Power Control" window of Xcat? If not, set up by
referring to section 5.1.2.7 "Setting Power Synchronization between
HV Main PS with DAR-8000 Control Cabinet".

402 M517-E383T
10 Image Adjustment
Please make adjustments in image quality by referring to "M517-E398 DAR-8000f Image
Quality Adjustment Manual". If necessary for operation in hospital, please set APR by
referring to "M517-E060 Digital Radiography System DAR-8000f Operation Manual".

M517-E383T 403
This page is intentionally left blank.

404 M517-E383T
11 Setting Backup
Installation is complete. Please back up the following settings.

- DAR-8000f configuration file


Refer to Appendix B-7 "Backup and Restore".

- UD150B-40 configuration file


Refer to "M501-E356 UD150B-40 Installation Manual".

- PCU configuration file


Refer to the attached sheet 1 of "M517-E415 DAR-8000 Series System Update Manual".

Record these backup files in a storage medium such as a CD-ROM and keep them.How to
Check the Test Pattern Output from PCU
To check the test pattern output from PCU, follow the path below.

Path: PCU → DAR-8000

To check the test pattern output from PCU, FPD must be installed
completely.

Cancel the settings in [Calib] of Xcat on PUC as follows.

After checking the test pattern image, restore the settings. Note the
checked items.

M517-E383T 405
1) On Tool menu of Xcat, click [Options], and then click [Calib] tab on "Options"
window.

406 M517-E383T
2) Clear all item in "Correction menu" area.

3) Click [Apply] and then [OK].

M517-E383T 407
Start up the test pattern generate program.
1) Click [Start]. Point to- [All Programs]-[Test_Image_Set_up], and then click
[Shortcut to Test_Image_Set_up.exe]. "Test_Image_Set_up.exe" starts.

2) "Test Image Set up Program" window is displayed.


Check [Image [A] [B] alternately] in "Test Image Output Control" area.

3) Acquire image and check that the following test pattern is displayed in the CRT monitor of
DAR-8000. Similar test pattern is also displayed when Fluoroscopy, SPOT and Serial
(Normal) Radiography is performed. The angle of gray scale display depends on the
radiography mode or field of view.

After checking the test pattern, make sure to restore the settings in the reverse sequence.

408 M517-E383T
12 How to Check the Power Control on PS CTRL Board
To check the DC power and HV power control, check the LED of PS CTRL board in PSU
RACK 2 or FPD Sub cabinet.

Make sure that all devices are turned OFF and no cable is connected to
the panel before the check of the Power Control.

12.1 How to Check the Power Control

・ Make sure that all devices are turned OFF.


・ Make sure that no cable is connected to the PS CTRL board.
・ Remove the J2 and J3 connectors.
・ Turn UPS ON and check the LED of POWER (D1) lights up.
・ Start up PCU.
・ In "Power Control" window of Xcat, click [ON] button in "DC Power Control" area to
turn DC power ON.
Check the LED of DC1 PON1 (D2) and DC1 PON2 (D3) light up in this order.
・ In "Power Control" window of Xcat, click [10kV] check box in "HV Power Control" area.
Check the LED of HV PON (D5) and HV 1A (D8) light up in this order.
・ Clear [10kV] check box in "HV Power Control" area.
・ In "Power Control" window of Xcat, click [OFF] button in "DC Power Control" area to
Turn DC power OFF.
・ Shut down PCU and Turn UPS OFF.

M517-E383T 409
This page is intentionally left blank.

410 M517-E383T
13 Overlay Edit Tool
DAR-8000f provides the overlay edit tool that used to edit the Patient Information displayed
on monitors and films. This section describes how to install this tool. Refer to the following
online manual about how to use it.

Online Manual:
C:\Program Files\shimadzu\Documents\EN\EFXS-0498(OverlayEditTool_OperationManual).pdf

(1) Log on as user "Shimadzu".


(2) Execute "C:\Program Files\Shimadzu\Tools\OLEditInstaller\OLESetup.bat" from
Windows Explore.

“OLESetup.bat” must be used for the installation.


“Setup.exe” found in the same folder as “OLESetup.exe” does not update the
configuration file “OverlayInfoEdit.ini”. Using the overlay edit tool before updating the
configuration file will destroy the system file, causing the application to fail.

(3) Click [OK] button.

M517-E383T 411
(4) Click PC icon on the upper left.

(5) Click [Continue].

(6) Click [OK] button.

(7) Confirm "C:\Program Files\Overlay Information Edit Tool\OverlayInfoEdit.ini" is


"2006/01/13 16:07 (at the date of 2006/10)".

Installing the overlay edit tool is complete.

412 M517-E383T
Appendix A Logon with User non- "operator"
In environment that installs DAR-8000f System S/W, boot or logon OS enables clinical
application to start-up through logon with user "operator" without entering password on
"Log On to Windows" screen.
This section describes how to log on with user non- "operator" on "Log On to Windows"
screen.

Steps in this section are applied to OS on DAR -8000 Control Cabinet.

Appendix A-1 User Logon after rebooting OS

Appendix A-1-1 Windows® 2000

1) When rebooting, "Windows® Start" screen is displayed.

Figure 1 Windows® Start Screen

M517-E383T 413
2) "Windows® Start" screen disappears and "Windows is starting up…" screen is
displayed. Press and hold down left "Shift" key until "Log On to Windows" screen is
displayed.

Figure 2 Windows is starting up...Screen

3) Check "Log On to Windows" screen is displayed, and then release left "Shift" key.

Figure 3 Log On to Windows Screen

414 M517-E383T
By holding right “Shift” key, the following screen is displayed.
FilterKeys feature is not used. Click [Cancel] button.

4) Enter User name and Password to log on.

M517-E383T 415
Appendix A-1-2 Windows® XP

1) When rebooting, "Windows® Start" screen is displayed. Press and hold down left
"Shift" key.

Figure 4 Windows® Start Screen

2) "Windows® Start" screen disappears and "To begin, click your user name" screen is
displayed. Then release left "Shift" key.

Figure 5 To begin, click your user name Screen

416 M517-E383T
3) Click "Ctrl", "Alt", and "Delete" keys at the same time. "Log On to Windows" screen
is displayed.

Figure 6 Log On to Windows Screen

By holding right “Shift” key, the following screen is displayed.


FilterKeys feature is not used. Click [Cancel] button.

4) Enter User name and Password to log on.

M517-E383T 417
Appendix A-2 User Logon after Logoff

Appendix A-2-1 Windows® 2000

1) Click [Shut Down…] from "Start" menu.

2) "Shut Down Windows" screen is displayed. Select "Log off xxxxxx" (xxxxx is user
name).

Figure 7 Shut Down Windows Screen

3) Press and hold down left "Shift" key. While holding, click [OK] button on "Shut Down
Windows" screen.

4) Check "Log On to Windows" screen is displayed, and then release left "Shift" key.

Figure 8 Log On to Windows Screen

418 M517-E383T
By holding right “Shift” key, the following screen is displayed.
FilterKeys feature is not used. Click [Cancel] button.

5) Enter User name and Password to log-on.

M517-E383T 419
Appendix A-2-2 Windows® XP

1) Click [Log Off] from "Start" menu.

2) "Log Off Windows" screen is displayed. Click left "Shift" key and select "Log off".

Figure 9 Log Off Windows Screen

3) "To begin, click your user name" is displayed. Then release left "Shift" key.

Figure 10 To begin, click your user name Screen

420 M517-E383T
4) Click "Ctrl", "Alt", and "Delete" keys at the same time. "Log On to Windows" screen
is displayed.

Figure 11 Log On to Windows Screen

By holding right “Shift” key, the following screen is displayed.


FilterKeys feature is not used. Click [Cancel] button.

5) Enter User name and Password to log-on.

M517-E383T 421
Appendix B Various Basic Settings
This section describes the setting for auto log on, auto start/shut down of application,
updating site key, and setting tool.

Steps in this section are applied to OS and application on DAR -8000


Control Cabinet.

The auto logon and auto start / shut down of application in


DAR-8000i is already set in shipping.

422 M517-E383T
Appendix B-1 Setting Tool (DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS)
The setting tool (DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS) is a maintenance tool enabling user to set
auto logon and auto start / shut down of application and to update site key efficiently.

In order to use the setting tool (DAR-8000UTILITY TOOLS), open a detailed screen
(Figure 9 to Figure 12) from the "DAR-8000UTILITY TOOLS Main Menu" window (Figure
6), and select a setting Item.

Figure 12 DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS Screen (Main Menu)

M517-E383T 423
Clicking [click] of a desired tool starts the process and minimizes "DAR-8000 UTILITY
TOOLS" screen. After processing is done, the minimized "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS"
screen is restored and the check box is selected.

[click] Button

Check Box

Figure 7 DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS Screen (Main Menu)

424 M517-E383T
Figure 8 to Figure 12 show a list and overview of the menu item of the setting tool
(DAR-8000UTILITY TOOLS).

1
2

3
4

Figure 8 DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS Screen (Main Menu)

M517-E383T 425
No Function Execution User (*1) Remarks
1 Display the System Setting window. "shimadzu"
"operator"
2 Display the Patient List Customize "shimadzu"
"operator"
setting window.
3 Display the Option setting screen. "shimadzu"
"operator"
4 Display the Maintenance setting "shimadzu"
"operator"
window.
Table 1 Summary of Menu Item (Main Menu)

(*1) Refer to Table 2 to 5 for actual execution user.

426 M517-E383T
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4

1-5
1-6
1-7

1-8

1-9

1-10
1-11

Figure 9 DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS Screen (System Setting)

M517-E383T 427
No Function Execution User (*4) Remarks
1-1 The clinical application or service "operator" Do not
application are automatically perform with
(*1)
started after user logon. user
"shimadzu".
(*2)

1-2 Cancel that the clinical application "shimadzu"


or service application are ("operator")
automatically started after user
logon. (*3)
1-3 Log on automatically with user "shimadzu" Cannot
"operator". perform with
user
"operator".
1-4 Log on automatically with user "shimadzu" Cannot
"shimadzu". (*3) perform with
user
"operator".
1-5 OS is automatically shutdown and "shimadzu"
DAR-8000 control cabinet is ("operator")
powered OFF after exiting clinical
application.
1-6 OS is not automatically shutdown "shimadzu"
after exiting clinical application. (*3) ("operator")

1-7 Enter new site key when "shimadzu"


changing option in DAR-8000f. ("operator")

1-8 Backup the various setting in "shimadzu"


®
DAR-8000f and Windows ("operator")
network (TCP/IP).
The backed-up data is overwritten
in C:\DIAG\Backup folder.
1-9 Restore the various setting in "shimadzu" Cannot
DAR-8000f and Windows® perform with
network (TCP/IP). user
Restore with data in "operator".
C:\DIAG\Backup folder.

428 M517-E383T
No Function Execution User (*4) Remarks
1-10 Take over the APR definition file "shimadzu" Make sure
at an upgrade. ("operator") to perform it
when
restoring
APR at an
upgrade of
any version.
1-11 Restore overlay definition files in "shimadzu"
a version update. ("operator")

Table 2 Summary of Menu Item (System Setting)

(*1)
According to specification, only clinical application is automatically started in logon with
user "operator". In logon with user "shimadzu", the service application and clinical
application are set in shipping not to be automatically started.
(*2)
In logon with user "shimadzu", the application is set in shipping not to be automatically
started, so do not start with user "shimadzu" (When starting, cancel it by following step
2 in Table 1 "Summary of Menu Item").
(*3)
To configure various setting efficiently, standard operation environment can be temporarily
changed. Please restore to standard operation environment as soon as the various basic
setting is done. Please refer to section 8 "Setting Standard Operation Environment".
(*4)
Please log on with underlined user. Above function can be used with user in parenthesis ( ),
but these user are not recommended for steps in this section.

M517-E383T 429
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7

2-8

Figure 10 DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS Screen (Patient List Customize)

430 M517-E383T
No Function Execution User (*4) Remarks
2-1 Set the window displayed last time to "shimadzu" This can be
the initial screen of the Patient List. used at the
(Except for the Media Import and the site that
Export window.) uses the
Worklist.
2-2 Set to display the Patient List "shimadzu"
automatically after study finishes.
2-3 Set the size of the character "shimadzu"
displayed on the Patient List window.
2-4 Set to search a patient in the Patient "shimadzu"
List window.
2-5 Add the study name of the Patient "shimadzu"
Information window, or the APR
selection function at starting a study.
2-6 Set to select a new study by default "shimadzu"
at re-starting a study for the same
patient again.
2-7 Edit the modality type for Worklist "shimadzu"
query.
2-8 Set to copy worklist information to "shimadzu"
the Study Description.
Table 3 Summary of Menu Item (Patient List Customize)

M517-E383T 431
3-1

3-2

3-3

3-4
3-5
3-6

3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10

Figure 11 DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS Screen (Option)

432 M517-E383T
No Function Execution User (*4) Remarks
3-1 The Auto DICOM Storage after "shimadzu" This cannot
radiography to the Side Station can be used with
be performed at a high speed by the
using a different method from the AutoFoward
usual DICOM Storage. Function of
SideStation.
3-2 Set the DCOM communication with "shimadzu"
PCU.
It is required for setting of the slot
scan radiography and Long
Tomosynthesis.
3-3 Enable the slot scan radiography. "shimadzu"

3-4 Enable the Long Tomosynthesis. "shimadzu"

3-5 Enable the Blanking pulse "shimadzu"


fluoroscopy.

3-6 Enable the Air Calibration. "shimadzu"

3-7 Enable the Tomosynthesis. "shimadzu"

3-8 Enable the POST-SURE option. "shimadzu" This can be


used only in
SONIAL
safire17 or
SONIAL
safireII.
3-9 Select whether image processing "shimadzu"
functions are included or not at the
DICOM Auto Storage.
3-10 Add dosimeter information to the "shimadzu"
overlay files in the case of using a
dosimeter.
Table 4 Summary of Menu Item (Option)

M517-E383T 433
4-1

Figure 12 DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS Screen (Maintenance)

No Function Execution User (*4) Remarks


4-1 Copy image database files to "shimadzu"
"C:\Diag" folder in some errors
occurrence.
Table 5 Summary of Menu Item (Maintenance)

434 M517-E383T
Appendix B-2 Starting Setting Tool (DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS)

The setting tool (DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS) can be started from following screen. Please
see below about how to start.
Start from desktop Start from Start menu

M517-E383T 435
Appendix B-3 Setting Auto Start of Application

Please follow this when clinical application and service application is not automatically
started in logon with user "operator".

User Name Password


operator orion

1) Log on with user to be set for auto start of clinical application or service application.

Auto logon and auto start / shut down of application have been set in
shipping.

2) Double-click [DAR8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.


3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen is displayed. Click [click]


button circled in figure below.

436 M517-E383T
5) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen is minimized and then
restored. Check the check box is selected.

6) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen.
7) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

The auto start of application is completely set (Please perform it with all users to be set for
auto start of application by referring to Table 1 "Summary of Menu Item").

M517-E383T 437
Appendix B-4 Setting Auto Logon with User "operator"

Follow this when the application is not automatically logged on with user "operator" or is
automatically logged on with user non-"operator" after powering ON DAR-8000 control
cabinet.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR 8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)"screen is displayed. Click [click]


button circled in figure below.

5) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen is minimized and then


restored. Check the check box is selected.

6) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen.
7) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.
The auto logon with user "operator" is completely set.

438 M517-E383T
Appendix B-5 Setting Auto Shut down

Follow this when OS is not automatically shut down and DAR-8000 control cabinet is not
powered OFF after exiting clinical application.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen is displayed. Click [click]


button circled in figure below.

5) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen is minimized and then


restored. Check the check box is selected.

6) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen.
7) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

The auto shut down is completely set.

M517-E383T 439
Appendix B-6 Updating Site Key

When adding and changing option in DAR-8000f, it is necessary to update site key. This
section describes how to update site key.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen is displayed. Click [click]


button circled in figure below.

5) A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes] button.

Figure 13 Confirmation Dialog for Updating Site Key

440 M517-E383T
6) The following window is displayed. Input site key specified from factory and click [OK]
button.

Figure 14 Site Key Input window

If the wrong site key is registered, DAR -8000 system may fail to start. If
the wrong site key is registered, register the correct site key again.

7) "Updated Site Key" dialog is displayed. Click [OK] button.

Figure 15 Updated Site Key window

M517-E383T 441
8) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen is minimized and then
restored. Check the check box is selected.

9) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen.
10) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

To configure variously basic setting efficiently, restore to standard


operation environment after following setting is done.

 Cancel auto start of application


 Auto logon with User “Shimadzu”
 Cancel auto shut down

To restore standard operation environm ent, refer to Appendix. B-3


“Setting Auto Start of Application” , B-4 “Setting Auto Logon with User
“operator” and B-5 “Setting Auto Shut down” .

442 M517-E383T
11) Only when DSA option is added, the following work is needed. When DSA is not
installed, skip this step.

11)-1. Double-click [Service Application] shortcut on desktop. "Service Application


Main Screen" will be displayed. Click [Config] button.
11)-2. Click [Interfaces] tab and set "Detector Type" to "17inch FPD". Even when
"17inch FPD" has already selected, reselect it from the drop down menu. Click
[Save] button.
11)-3. Then the confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes].
11)-4. Click [Exit] button to close "Config" screen.

12) Display "Start" menu, and click [Shut down…]. Select [Shut down] from the
confirmation dialog, and click [OK] button. DAR-8000 control cabinet will be powered
OFF.

When each unit is turned off to add some options, check the additional
unit is connected correctly and turns on each unit sequentially.

13) Power ON X-ray high-voltage generator console. By turning ON the X-ray high-voltage
generator, DAR-8000 control cabinet will turn ON simultaneously.

If DAR-8000 control cabinet will not turn ON simultaneously, turn each


device OFF according to steps to Power OFF in this book. Check the
connection of each device by referring section 2.3 “Cable Connection” in
“UD-DAR8000 Connection Kit Installation Manual (M517-E397)”.

M517-E383T 443
14) The system is automatically logged on with user "operator", "Initializing…" screen is
displayed, and the clinical application is started.

Figure 16 Clinical Application Main window

15) Check each device is correctly operated after changing option. Please refer from
section 9 "Confirmation".

Change the option label after some options are added and site key is
updated, following instruction of attaching option label. The option label
is attached on the side of DAR -8000 Control Cabinet.

Step to update site key is all.

444 M517-E383T
Appendix B-7 Backup and Restore

Follow this when backing up the various setting in DAR-8000f and Windows® network
(TCP/IP) and restoring the setting backed up.

 How to Backup

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen is displayed. Click [click]


button circled in figure below.

5) A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes] button.

6) Enter your name window is displayed. Enter operator full name with alphabet. Click
[OK] button (ex: Taro Shimadzu).

Figure 17 Enter Your Name window

M517-E383T 445
7) A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes] button.

8) After backed up, the following dialog is displayed. Click [OK] button.

Figure 18 Backed up window

9) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen is minimized and then


restored. Check the check box is selected.

10) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen.
11) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.
Backup is complete.

446 M517-E383T
 How to Restore

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) When restoring settings using the backup file saved in the USB memory, copy the file
(folder: "E:\Backup_yyyymmdd_hhmmss") in a USB memory to C:\Diag.

yyyymmdd Day at which the backup is created.


Example February 20, 2007: 20070220
hhmmss Time at which the backup is created.
Example 7:5:45 p.m.: 190545

Change the name ("\Backup_yyyymmdd_hhmmss") of the copied folder into


"\Backup."

When a folder with the name "Backup" exists before changing the name
of the folder, change the name of the existing "Backup" folder to
"Backup_old", and then change the folder name.

3) Double-click [DAR8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.


4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

5) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen is displayed. Click [click]


button circled in figure below.

6) A confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes] button.

M517-E383T 447
7) Enter your name window is displayed. Enter operator full name with alphabet. Click
[OK] button (ex: Taro Shimadzu).

Figure 19 Enter Your Name window

8) After restored, the following window is displayed. Click [OK] button.

Figure 20 Restored window

9) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen is minimized and then


restored. Check the check box is selected.

10) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen.
11) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.
Restore is complete.

Restoring a backup file of a different version may prevent correct


operation.

448 M517-E383T
Appendix B-8 Taking Over APR definition files

With this tool, users can take over the APR definition file in version update.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen is displayed. Click [click]


button circled in figure below.

5) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen is minimized and then


restored. Check the check box is selected.

6) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen.
7) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

Taking over the APR definition files is complete.

Make sure to use this to take over the APR definition file in any version
after restoring the file. If you fail to do this, the restoring will not be
completed correctly.

M517-E383T 449
Appendix B-9 Restoring Overlay Definition Files

With this tool, users can restore overlay definition files, which is created using DAR-8000
Utility Tools before this operation. A backup of the overlay Information must be created
using DAR-8000 Utility Tools before the upgrade.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen is displayed. Click [click]


button circled in figure below.

5) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen is minimized and then


restored. Check the check mark is displayed in check box.

6) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (System Setting)" screen.
7) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

Restoring overlay definition files is complete.

450 M517-E383T
Appendix B-10 Setting the Initial Screen of the Patient List

With this tool, users can set the window displayed last time as the initial screen of the
Patient List.
For example, in the case where the Worklist screen is displayed last time, when displaying
the Patient List next, the Worklist window will be displayed at first.

This tool can be used for the Patient List or Worklist window. W hen the
Media Import or the Export window is displayed last time, the initial
window will be the one displayed before this window.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)" screen is displayed. Click


[click] button circled in figure below.

M517-E383T 451
5) A setting window is displayed. Click [Yes] button.

6) When the setting is completed, the following window is displayed. Click [OK] button.

7) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)" screen is minimized and


then restored. Check the check mark is displayed in check box.

8) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)"
screen.
9) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

The setting is complete.

452 M517-E383T
Appendix B-11 Setting the Automatic Patient List Display

With this tool, users can set the automatically display of the Patient List after study finishes.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)" screen is displayed. Click


[click] button circled in figure below.

5) A setting window is displayed. Click [Yes] button.

6) When the setting is completed, the following window is displayed. Click [OK] button.

M517-E383T 453
7) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)" screen is minimized and
then restored. Check the check mark is displayed in check box.

8) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)"
screen.
9) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

The setting is complete.

454 M517-E383T
Appendix B-12 Setting the Font Size in the Patient List Window

With this tool, users can set the size and font of the character displayed in the Patient List
window.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)" screen is displayed. Click


[click] button circled in figure below.

M517-E383T 455
5) A setting window is displayed.

Figure 21 Setting widow for Font Size in the Patient List widow

6) Set the Font Name and Size from the drop down list and click [Update] button.

7) The setting is completed, click [Exit] button.

456 M517-E383T
8) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)" screen is minimized and
then restored. Check the check mark is displayed in check box.

9) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)"
screen.
10) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

The setting is complete.

M517-E383T 457
Appendix B-13 Setting Patient Search in the Patient List

With this tool, users can search a registered patient in the Patient List window.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)" screen is displayed. Click


[click] button circled in figure below.

5) A setting window is displayed. Click [Yes] button.

6) When the setting is completed, the following window is displayed. Click [OK] button.

458 M517-E383T
7) The "Search Condition" button is displayed on the Patient List window.

The search result will remain after system restart. Release conditions
after the search finishes.

M517-E383T 459
8) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)" screen is minimized and
then restored. Check the check mark is displayed in check box.

9) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)"
screen.
10) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

The setting is complete.

460 M517-E383T
Appendix B-14 Setting APR Selection Before the Study

With this tool, users can register APR as the study name in the Patient Information window,
and select the registered APR before starting a study.
1) Log on with user "shimadzu".
2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)" screen is displayed. Click


[click] button circled in figure below.

5) A setting window is displayed.

Figure 22 Confirmation window for APR Setting at Registering Study

6) Select [The APR selection is enabled in "Study Description"], and click [Update]
button.
7) When the setting is completed, click [EXIT] button.

This cannot be used with the function of the "APR selection on starting the
study".
8) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)" screen is minimized and
then restored. Check the check mark is displayed in check box.

M517-E383T 461
9) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)"
screen.
10) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

The setting is complete.

462 M517-E383T
Appendix B-15 Setting New Study at Re-starting the Study

With this tool, users can set a new study by default at re-starting a study for the same
patient again.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)" screen is displayed. Click


[click] button circled in figure below.

5) A setting window is displayed. Click [Yes] button.

6) When the setting is completed, the following window is displayed. Click [OK] button.

M517-E383T 463
7) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)" screen is minimized and
then restored. Check the check mark is displayed in check box.

8) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)"
screen.
9) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

The setting is complete.


.

464 M517-E383T
Appendix B-16 Editing "Modalities" Value for Worklist Query

With this tool, users can set the modality type for Worklist query.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is restored. Click on [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)" screen is restored. Click on


[click] button circled in figure below.

5) "Worklist Registry setting Tool" window is displayed.

Figure 23 Worklist Registry Setting Tool window

6) Set a value of "Number of Items" (classification set number).


Example) When RF, XA, and CR are set, input 3 into "Number of Items".

M517-E383T 465
7) "Item" edits the modality type. The standard RF and XA cannot be edited.
Example) When RF, XA, and CR are set, input CR into "Item 003".

8) When the check box of "Selected" is selected, selected items have been selected at
the initial state.
Example) When only CR is selected, select only the check box of CR.

9) Click [Update].

10) Click [Exit].

11) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)" screen is restored. Check
the check box is selected.

12) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)"
screen.
13) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

Setting the modality type is complete.

466 M517-E383T
Appendix B-17 Registering the Work List Information to the Study
Description

With this tool, users can register the Work List Information to the Study Description.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)" screen is displayed. Click


[click] button circled in figure below.

5) A setting window is displayed.

Figure 24 Worklist Procedure Setting window

M517-E383T 467
6) Select the Study Description tag to be registered and click [Update].
7) Click [Exit] to close the dialog.

8) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)" screen is minimized and


then restored. Check the check mark is displayed in check box.

9) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Patient List Customize)"
screen.
10) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

The setting is complete.

468 M517-E383T
Appendix B-18 Fast Image Transfer

With this tool, users can perform Auto DICOM Storage to the Side Station at a high speed
by using a different method from the usual DICOM Storage.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button


circled in figure below.

5) A setting window is displayed. Click [Yes] button.

Figure 25 Fast Transfer Setting window

6) When the setting is completed, the following window is displayed. Click [OK] button.

Figure 26 Completion of Fast Transfer Setting window

M517-E383T 469
7) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is minimized and then restored. Check
the check mark is displayed in check box.

8) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen.


9) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

The setting is complete.

470 M517-E383T
Appendix B-19 Registering DCOM

With this tool, users can register DCOM that is required for following option radiography:

Slot scan radiography


Long Tomosynthesis
Blanking pulse fluoroscopy
Tomosynthesis
Air Calibration

DCOM setting is also needed in the PCU. Perform the setting by referring to
Exhibit 1/2.7 "Additional procedure when using DCOM" in "M517-E415
DAR-8000 Series System Update Manual".

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button


circled in figure below.

5) A setting window is displayed. Click [Yes] button.

Figure 27 Register PCUDcomServer window

M517-E383T 471
6) "Component Services" window is displayed. Check the DCOM registered. Click
"Console Root" - "Component Services" - "Computers" - "My computer" - "DCOM
Config".

Figure 28 Component Services window

7) Registration will be succeeded with "PcuDcomServer" in the "DCOM Config". Click [X]
button to close "Component Services" window.

Figure 29 Component Services window

472 M517-E383T
8) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is minimized and then restored. Check
the check mark is displayed in check box.

9) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen.


10) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

The setting is complete.

M517-E383T 473
Appendix B-20 Slot Scan

With this tool, users can enable the Slot Scan radiography.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button


circled in figure below.

474 M517-E383T
5) A setting window is displayed.

Figure 30 Option Scan and DCOM IP Address Registry Tool window

Do not select “Air Calibration for Low Exposure“ check box in Figure 30
“Option Scan and DCOM IP Address Registry Tool” window.

M517-E383T 475
6) Input the IP address of the DCOM server into "IP Address", and click [DCOM Check].
DCOM connection will be checked.

Example) Input 192.168.100.11 and click [DCOM Check].


When the communication is established with the DCOM server normally,
the following message will appear.

When the IP address is wrong, the following message will appear.

When DCOM is not registered into the service of OS, the following message will
appear.

When the communication is not established with the DCOM server, the option
radiography does not work normally.

476 M517-E383T
7) Select the check box of the Sot Scan radiography (SLOT) in the Option Scan.

8) Click [Update].
9) Click [Exit] to close the window.
10) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is minimized and then restored. Check
the check mark is displayed in check box.
11)

12) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen.
13) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

The setting is complete.


Refer to "M517-E507 (Slot Radiography Option Installation Manual)" for settings after this.

M517-E383T 477
Appendix B-21 Long Tomosynthesis
With this tool, users can enable the Long Tomosynthesis.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button


circled in figure below.

478 M517-E383T
5) A setting window is displayed.

Figure 31 Option Scan and DCOM IP Address Registry Tool window

Do not select “Air Calibration for Low Exposure“ check box in Figure 31
“Option Scan and DCOM IP Address Registry Tool” window.

M517-E383T 479
6) Input the IP address of the DCOM server into "IP Address", and click [DCOM Check].
DCOM connection will be checked.

Example) Input 192.168.100.11 and click [DCOM Check].


When the communication is established with the DCOM server normally, the following
message will appear.

When the IP address is wrong, the following message will appear.

When DCOM is not registered into the service of OS, the following message will
appear.

When the communication is not established with the DCOM server, the option
radiography does not work normally.

480 M517-E383T
7) Select the check box of the Long Tomosynthesis in the Option Scan.

8) Click [Update].
9) Click [Exit] to close the window.
10) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is restored. Check the check mark is
displayed in check box.

11) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen.
12) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

The setting is complete.

M517-E383T 481
Appendix B-22 Blanking Pulse Fluoroscopy

With this tool, users can enable the Blanking Pulse Fluoroscopy

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button


circled in figure below.

482 M517-E383T
5) A setting window is displayed.

Figure 32 Option Scan and DCOM IP Address Registry Tool window

Do not select “Air Calibration for Low Exposure“ check box in Figure 32
“Option Scan and DCOM IP Address Registry Tool” window.

M517-E383T 483
6) Input the IP address of the DCOM server into "IP Address", and click [DCOM Check].
DCOM connection will be checked.

Example) Input 192.168.100.11 and click [DCOM Check].


When the communication is established with the DCOM server normally,
the following message will appear.

When the IP address is wrong, the following message will appear.

When DCOM is not registered into the service of OS, the following message will
appear.

When the communication is not established with the DCOM server, the option
radiography does not work normally.

484 M517-E383T
7) Select the check box of the Blanking Pulse Fluoroscopy in the Option Scan.

8) Set the table of the fluoroscopy mode.

The column and row of the table indicates fluoroscopy mode and rate respectively.
0, 200-211, and 299 can be inputted.
0: No setting. At the time of radiography, the cell is skipped until an effective value
is found in a row (rate).
200 to 211: Change to a fluoroscopy mode that has been set to each number.
299: Cancel a fluoroscopy mode.

The number whose background is pink (gray in the book) is a default rate for each
fluoroscopy mode.
When a fluoroscopy mode is switched, a default rate is used as its first rate.
Double clicking a cell sets it to a default.

M517-E383T 485
9) The table value of the fluoroscopy mode can be set using the combo box.

A combo box provides the following modes.


- [Current]: Latest saved mode
- [None SURE]: Without SURE option
- [SURE (Basic)]: With SURE option (Std)
- [SURE (Basic 15H)]:No Use
- [SURE (High Coverage)]: With SURE option (Bariatric)

10) Click [Update].


11) Click [Exit] to close the window.
12) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is restored. Check the check mark is
displayed in check box.

13) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen.
14) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

The setting is complete.

486 M517-E383T
Appendix B-23 Air Calibration

With this tool, users can enable the Air Calibration.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button


circled in figure below.

M517-E383T 487
5) A setting window is displayed.

Figure 33 Option Scan and DCOM IP Address Registry Tool window

Do not select “Air Calibration for Low Exposure“ check box in Figure 33
“Option Scan and DCOM IP Address Registry Tool” window.

488 M517-E383T
6) Input the IP address of the DCOM server into "IP Address", and click [DCOM Check].
DCOM connection will be checked.

Example) Input 192.168.100.11 and click [DCOM Check].


When the communication is established with the DCOM server normally, the following
message will appear.

When the IP address is wrong, the following message will appear.

When DCOM is not registered into the service of OS, the following message will
appear.

When the communication is not established with the DCOM server, the option
radiography does not work normally.

M517-E383T 489
7) Select the check box of the Air Calibration in the Option Scan.

8) Click [Update].
9) Click [Exit] to close the window.
10) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is restored. Check the check mark is
displayed in check box.
11)

12) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen.
13) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

The setting is complete.

490 M517-E383T
Appendix B-24 Tomosynthesis

With this tool, users can enable the Tomosynthesis.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button


circled in figure below.

M517-E383T 491
5) A setting window is displayed.

Figure 34 Option Scan and DCOM IP Address Registry Tool window

Do not select “Air Calibration for Low Exposure“ check box in Figure 34
“Option Scan and DCOM IP Address Registry Tool” window.

492 M517-E383T
6) Input the IP address of the DCOM server into "IP Address", and click [DCOM Check].
DCOM connection will be checked.

Example) Input 192.168.100.11 and click [DCOM Check].


When the communication is established with the DCOM server normally, the following
message will appear.

M517-E383T 493
When the IP address is wrong, the following message will appear.

When DCOM is not registered into the service of OS, the following message will
appear.

When the communication is not established with the DCOM server, the option
radiography does not work normally.

7) Select the check box of the Tomosynthesis in the Option Scan.

8) Click [Update].
9) Click [Exit] to close the window.

494 M517-E383T
10) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is restored. Check the check mark is
displayed in check box.

11) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen.
12) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

The setting is complete.

M517-E383T 495
Appendix B-25 POST SURE

With this function, user can enable the POST SURE.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button


circled in figure below.

5) A setting window is displayed. Click [Yes] button.

6) When the setting is completed, the following window is displayed. Click [OK] button.

496 M517-E383T
7) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is minimized and then restored. Check
the check box is selected.

8) Click on [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen.


9) Click on [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

Enabling the POST SURE is complete.

M517-E383T 497
Appendix B-26 Configure Processed/Unprocessed for DICOM Auto
Storage

With this function, user can select to include the image with image processing functions,
such as Edge, Window, Level or not when sending the image in Auto DICOM Storage.
If a customer requests to change the default setting, settings can be changed following the
procedure below.
This setting will be reflected not only in setting of the Auto DICOM Storage but in the
default setting of the Manual DICOM Storage and the data exporting to CD-R / DVD.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button circled
in figure below.

498 M517-E383T
5) A setting window is displayed.

Figure 35 DCOM Setting window

6) Select [Unprocessed] to send an unprocessed image, or [Processed] to send a


processed image, and click [Update].

7) Click [Exit] to close the dialog.

8) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is minimized and then restored. Check
the check box is selected.

9) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen.


10) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.
The setting is complete.

M517-E383T 499
Appendix B-27 Setting for Connecting Dosimeter

With this tool, users can add the dosimeter information to overlay files in the case of using
a dosimeter.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button


circled in figure below.

5) A setting window is displayed. Click [Yes] button.

6) When the setting is completed, the following window is displayed. Click [OK] button.

500 M517-E383T
7) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen is minimized and then restored. Check
the check box is selected.

8) Click on [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Option)" screen.


9) Click on [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

Changing to overlay files with dosimeter information is complete.

M517-E383T 501
Appendix B-28 Copying Image DB files to C:\DIAG folder

With this tool, users can copy the image database file in some errors occurrence. DB file is
copied in "C:\Diag" folder. Copy this file to CD-R or other media to back up it. For more
details of the procedure, refer to the direction of the Quality Assurance Department of
Shimadzu Corporation.

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".


2) Double-click [DAR-8000 TOOLS] shortcut on desktop.
3) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button
circled in figure below.

4) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Maintenance)" screen is displayed. Click [click] button


circled in figure below.

502 M517-E383T
5) The following window is displayed and the image database is automatically copied.

6) Click [Enter] to close this window.

7) "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Maintenance)" screen is restored. Check the check


box is selected.

8) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Maintenance)" screen.


9) Click [X] button to close "DAR-8000 UTILITY TOOLS (Main Menu)" screen.

Copying the image database file is complete.

M517-E383T 503
Appendix C Confirming the Version of Each System

This section will describe how to confirm the version of each system.

Appendix C-1 Confirming the System Revision in DAR-8000f System

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".

2) Click "DISPLAY DAR8000 Rev" shortcut on desktop.

Figure 36 DISPLAY DAR8000 Rev Shortcut

3) "DAR-8000 Revision" window is displayed. Check the system revision number. Click
[OK] button.

Figure 37 DAR-8000f Revision Screen

504 M517-E383T
Appendix C-2 Confirming the Version of FPD

1) Double-click [FPD_Version] shortcut on desktop of PCU, with the Control cabinet


turned ON. (To read the version of MAIN 17 board, turn the Control cabinet ON.)
2) Click [READ] button to read "FPD H/W Version". Check each version by referring
figure below.

Figure 38 FPD H/W Version window

3) Click [EXIT] button to close "FPD H/W Version" window. If this window is opened, the
image will not be displayed.

M517-E383T 505
Appendix C-3 Confirming the Version of Hardware of DAR-8000f

1) Open the Clinical Application in DAR-8000f.

2) Click [Status] button on the Standard Control Panel.

Figure 39 Standard Control Panel

3) Status window is displayed. Click [Hardware Versions] tab.

Figure 40 Status window

506 M517-E383T
4) "Hardware Versions" window is displayed.

Figure 41 Hardware Versions window

Each version is displayed.

5) To close this window, click [Exit] button.

M517-E383T 507
Appendix D X-ray Diagnostic Table Initial Parameter
Value List

The Initial parameter value in shipping is as follows.

Model ZS-100I(FPD)
TYPE RF DSA
Interfaces
Connect Table Name ZS-100I
Detector Type 17 Inch FPD
Lens Type Heliflex
Iris Type Tandem
ABS Control Range Custom
Base System Frequency 30 / 60Hz
Injector Control Not available for this model Enabled
Rad Expose On Failure Do not acquire
Rad Expose On Timeout 5 sec
Auto Transfer Image Type Combined Images
Auto Storage Image Type Acquired and Combined Images
Continuous Fluoro On
Fluoro Pulse Rates 30pps, 15pps, 7.5pps, 3.75pps が On
Cine Pulse Rates (Unused)
Maximum Spot Acquisition 15FPS
Rate
Spot Subtract Calibration Not available for this model Independent

508 M517-E383T
Model ZS-100I(FPD)
TYPE RF DSA
Sonial Vision
MID Mode Toggle Selection Toggle b / w 1×1 and 4×4 Toggle b / w 1×1 and 4×4
Mode Mode
Joystick Threshold (1-30) 15 15
Button 1 None Landmarking
Button 2 Print Select Print Select
Button 3 Print Start Print Start
Button 4 None None
Button 5 Previous Frame Previous Frame
Button 6 None Roadmapping
Button 7 Fluoro Store Fluoro Store
Button 8 V-Reverse V-Reverse
Button 9 H-Reverse H-Reverse
Button 10 Next Frame Next Frame
Button 11 None Send to Ref
Button 12 None None
Button 13 None None
Button 14 MID MID
Button 15 Shot Save Shot Save
Button 16 None None
System Options
Scan Converter Not Installed
Reference Image Display Not available for this 1-on-1 w / Thumbnails
model
DICOM Storage Commit Disabled
Modality Performed Proc. Step Disabled
Print Shotsave Limit 100
Display / Print Physician Name Performing Physician
Digital Host Control Not Installed
Thumbnail Frame Set the second from the left
Patient list archive status Disabled
Patient list print status Disabled
Patient Delete Operations No Warning
MPPS DAP Accumulation (With MPPS option)Select" Current Session"(Without
MPPS option)Unused
Opacification delay (Unused)
Function Keys All are "None".

M517-E383T 509
Model ZS-100I(FPD)
TYPE RF DSA
Image Processing
Fluoro Brightness 2048
Fluoro Contrast 4095
Fluoro Edge Level 0
Fluoro Integration Level 0
Spot Brightness 2048
Spot Contrast 4095
Spot Edge Level 0
Spot Polarity 1
H-Reverse On
V-Reverse Off
Auto-shutter Tolerance 100
Monitor LUTs
In-room Primary Linear, 10-bits
In-room Reference Linear, 10-bits
DICOM
Station Name LocalAE
Send AE Title DAR8k_StoreSCU
Receive AE Title DAR8k_StoreSCP
Print AE Title DAR8k_PrintSCU
Worklist AE Title DAR8k_MWMSCU
MPPS AE Title DAR8k_MPPSSCU
Query / Retrieve AE Title DAR8k_QRSCU
General Timeout 60
Wait for Association Reply 60
Network write timeout 60
Network inactivity timeout 60
Wait for Association Request 60
Wait for Association Release 60
Network connect timeout 60

510 M517-E383T
Model ZS-100I(FPD)
TYPE RF DSA
FOV Configuration
FOV Mode 17 Inch FPD
Pixel Size 150
Normal FOV size [inch] 17
Mag1 FOV size [inch] 15
Mag2 FOV size [inch] 12
Mag3 FOV size [inch] 9
Mag4 FOV size [inch] 6
Normal FOV size (actual)[mm] 431.8
Mag1 FOV size (actual)[mm] 381
Mag2 FOV size (actual)[mm] 304.8
Mag3 FOV size (actual)[mm] 228.6
Mag4 FOV size (actual)[mm] 152.4

M517-E383T 511
Model ZS-100I(FPD)
TYPE RF DSA
FPD Calibration
Deficit Exposure Time (sec) 1
Grid Moving Time (msec) 5000
PCU X-Ray Setup Mode 0 60
Mode 1 60
Mode 2 60
Mode 3 60
50 (Only for the Original type FPD
system with SURE(Bariatric))
Mode 4 60
51 (Only for the Original type FPD
system with SURE(Bariatric))
Mode 5 60
Mode 6 60
Mode 7 60
Mode 8 0
Mode 9 0
Mode 10 0
Mode 11 0
Mode 12 0
Mode 13 0
Mode 14 0
Mode 15 0
Mode 16 65
Mode 17 80
Mode 18 80
Mode 19 80
Mode 20 80
Mode 21 80
Mode 22 80
Mode 23 80
Mode 24 80
Mode 25 80
Mode 26 80
Mode 27 80
Mode 28 80
Mode 29 0
Mode 30 0
Mode 31 0

512 M517-E383T
Model ZS-100I(FPD)
TYPE RF DSA
Two State Inputs
Fluoro On Enabled
PFluoro On Enabled
PFluoro Select Disabled
Prep Rad Exp Enabled
Req Rad Exp Enabled
Rad Ready Enabled
Rad Exp On Disabled
Rad Type Spot Enabled
Single / Rapid Disabled
Store Image Disabled
FOV Mag 1 Disabled
FOV Mag 2 Disabled
FOV Mag 3 Disabled
Reverse-H Disabled
Reverse-V Disabled
Analog Outputs
ABS Control Enabled
Digital Outputs
Pulsed Fluoro Ref Enabled
Pulse Width 10ms Pulse
Polarity Active High
Phase Delay 0
Relay Outputs
Fluoro Inhibit Disabled
Spot Expose Enabled
Subtract Enabled Disabled Enabled
Injector Sync Enabled

M517-E383T 513
Appendix E How to restore the system from the Backup
CD/DVD

To restore the system on the HDD from the backup CD/DVD, follow steps below.

1. Backing up the image data


2. Backing up the settings
3. Copying HDD images to HDD from the backup CD/DVD (Ghost)
4. Restoring the settings
5. Checking the operation

514 M517-E383T
Appendix E-1 Backing up the image data

Restoring the system from CD/DVD will delete all image data saved in this system.
Make sure to save all image data to CD-R/DVD-R or DICOM server.

Please refer to M517-E059 "Digital Radiography System DAR-8000f Operation Manual"


M517-E060 "Digital Radiography System DAR-8000f Operation Manual" about procedures
for saving images.

M517-E383T 515
Appendix E-2 Backing up the settings

Restoring the system from CD/DVD will delete the settings changed after shipping.
Make sure to save these settings to USB flash memory.

1) Turn DAR-8000 control cabinet ON.

2) Logon with user "shimadzu" and password "Dar8k".

3) Click [Service Application] shortcut on desktop.

4) "Service Application Main Screen" will be displayed. Click [Config] button.

516 M517-E383T
5) "System Configuration" window is displayed. Click [Backup] button.

6) The confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes] button.

7) "Backup Configuration" window is displayed. Click [Save] button.


Save following four files with its default name.

SysConfig_Backup_<Date>-<Time>.xml
LUTs_Backup_<Date>-<Time>.xml
APRConfig_Backup_<Date>-<Time>.xml
UserConfig_Backup_<Date>-<Time>.xml

* <Date>:Date when it is saved.


<Time>:Time when it is saved.

Please note these files’ name for restoring the system.

M517-E383T 517
8) "System Configuration" window is displayed. Click [Exit] button.

518 M517-E383T
9) "Service Application Main Screen" will be displayed. Click [Calib] button.

10) "Calibration" window is displayed. Click [Backup] button.

M517-E383T 519
11) The confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes].

12) "Save Calibration Settings" window is displayed. Click [Save] button.


CalSettings_<Date>-<Time>.xml

* <Date>:Date when it is saved.


<Time>:Time when it is saved.
Please note this file name for restoring the system.

520 M517-E383T
13) "Calibration" window is displayed. Click [Exit] button.

14) "Service Application Main Screen" will be displayed. Click [Exit] button to exit
Service Application.

15) Back up the settings by following steps in Appendix B-7 "Backup and Restore".

M517-E383T 521
Appendix E-3 Copying HDD image to HDD from the Backup CD/DVD (Ghost)

To restore the system, copy HDD image to HDD from the backup CD/DVD. Copying it will
delete all files saved in HDD.
Make sure to save these files according to steps in Appendix E-1 "Backing up the image
data" and Appendix E-2 "Backing up the settings" before restoring the system.

There are two procedures to copy it. According to the window displayed after the PC starts
up, follow either procedure.

Procedure 1

1) Turn DAR-8000 control cabinet ON.

2) Insert "Backup Disc 1/2" in CD/DVD drive before the PC starts up.

3) The menu of command prompt is displayed. Select [2.Restore].

4) The confirmation message is displayed. Enter [Y].

5) "Ghost" will start the restore.

6) During the restore, "Span Volume [1] Done (1660)" window is displayed. Exchange
the CD/DVD for "Backup Disc 2/2" according to the direction of "Ghost", and click
[OK].

7) After the restore is complete, the command prompt is displayed.

8) Eject the CD/DVD from the drive.

9) Turn OFF the power switch of PC.

522 M517-E383T
Procedure 2

1) Turn DAR-8000 control cabinet ON.

2) Insert "Backup Disc 1/2" in CD/DVD drive before the PC starts up.

3) "About Norton Ghost" window is displayed. Click [OK] button.

4) Click [Local]-[Disk]-[From Image].

5) "Image file name to restore from" window is displayed. In "Look in_", select the
drive whose name starts with "@CD-R...", and select the Image file.

6) Click [Open].

7) "Select local destination drive by clicking on the drive number" window is


displayed. Select the HDD (disk partition) for installation and click [OK].

8) "Destination Drive Details" window is displayed. On the restore, user can change
the size of disk partition as "New Size". Input full size of HDD and click [OK].

M517-E383T 523
9) "Question" window is displayed. Click [Yes] to execute the restore.

10) During the restore, "Span Volume [1] Done (1660)" window is displayed. Exchange
the CD/DVD for "Backup Disc 2/2" according to the direction of "Ghost", and click
[OK].

11) "Clone Complete (1912)" window is displayed. Click [Continue].

12) Click [Quit].

13) "Quit Norton Ghost (1953)" window is displayed. Click [Yes].

14) The command prompt is displayed.

15) Eject the CD/DVD from the drive.

16) Turn OFF the power switch of PC.

524 M517-E383T
Appendix E-4 Update

It returns to the state when shipping it when the system is restored from backup CD or DVD.
It is necessary to execute all Update executed from the delivery to this system restoration
to return it to revision immediately before the system is restored. Please execute all Update
in the release order following "M517-E415 (DAR-8000 series system update manual)".

M517-E383T 525
Appendix E-5 Restoring the settings

Restore the settings saved in USB flash memory to the restored HDD.

1) Turn DAR-8000 control cabinet ON.

2) Logon with user "shimadzu" and password "Dar8k".

3) Restore the settings by following steps in Appendix B-7 "Backup and Restore".

4) Double-click [Service Application] shortcut on desktop.

526 M517-E383T
5) "Service Application Main Screen" will be displayed. Click [Config] button.

6) "System Configuration" window is displayed. Click [Restore] button.

7) The confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes] button.

M517-E383T 527
8) "Open" window is displayed. Select the files saved in backup procedure. Click [Open]
button.

Select following four files.


SysConfig_Backup_<Date>-<Time>.xml
LUTs_Backup_<Date>-<Time>.xml
APRConfig_Backup_<Date>-<Time>.xml
UserConfig_Backup_<Date>-<Time>.xml

9) "System Configuration" window is displayed. Click [Exit] button.

528 M517-E383T
10) "Service Application Main Screen" will be displayed. Click [Exit] button to exit the
Service Application.

11) Click [Start] - [Shut down]. The confirmation dialog is displayed. Click - [Shut down]
- [OK]. DAR-8000 control cabinet is turned OFF.

M517-E383T 529
Appendix E-6 Checking Operation

Turn DAR-8000 control cabinet ON and check operations.

530 M517-E383T
Appendix F Adjusting Monitor Display

When both the Side Station and the DAR-8000 share the reference
monitor, adjust the position of reference monitor.

If necessary, adjust the screen position on the monitor.

M517-E383T 531
Appendix F-1 ATI Graphics Board
 Installing ATI Tool
1) Log on with user "shimadzu".

2) Insert the Update CD in CD/DVD drive and open Windows Explore.

3) Click [ATI]-[CPanel]-[Setup.exe].

4) "ATI Control Panel Setup" starts. Click [Next] button.

532 M517-E383T
5) "License Agreement" window is displayed. Click [Yes] button.

6) "Choose Destination Location" window is displayed. Click [Next] button.

M517-E383T 533
7) Click [Finish] button to close "ATI Control Panel Setup" window.

8) Restart the PC. Installing ATI tool is complete.

534 M517-E383T
 Adjusting the ATI Tool

1) Log on with user "shimadzu".

2) Open "DeskTop Help" window and clear "Show window at start up".
Close this window.

3) Right click anywhere on the screen to open the menu. Select [Properties] on the
menu.

M517-E383T 535
4) "Display Properties" window is displayed. Click [Settings] tab.

5) Click [Advanced]-[OK] button.

536 M517-E383T
6) Click [Displays] tab.

7) Select the desired monitor to be adjusted on the figure below.


[Monitor] button :Reference Monitor
[FPD] button :Main Monitor(Via IAPDB)

M517-E383T 537
8) "Monitor Properties" window is displayed. Click [Adjustments] tab.

9) Adjust the screen using "Screen Position" button and "Screen Size" button.
When the adjustment is complete, click [OK] button.

538 M517-E383T
Appendix G Exchanging the Cabinet
This section describes how to exchange the DAR-8000f cabinet.

To exchange the cabinet, follow steps below.


* Call the cabinet used prior to the exchange "Old cabinet" and the cabinet to be used after
the exchange "New cabinet".

1. Backing up the settings in the Old cabinet


2. Exchanging the cabinet
3. Restoring the settings to the New cabinet
4. Confirming the operation
5. Confirming the DSA Mode

The procedure described here is intended for the case where the revision
of DAR-8000 system software in the "Old cabinet" is the same as that in
the "New cabinet".
When the revision differs, you have to perform various settings manually
according to a new installation procedure, instead of "G-3. Restoring the
settings to the New cabinet".
In case where the OS is different between cabinets, for example,
Windows ® 2000 and Windows ® XP, "G-3. Restoring the settings to the New
cabinet" is not available, even though the revision of system software is
the same.

M517-E383T 539
Appendix G-1 Backing up the Settings in the Old Cabinet

To retain the settings before and after the exchange, back up the settings in the Old
cabinet.
The settings backed up are used in Appendix G-3.

1) Turn on DAR-8000f and start it by following Appendix A.


2) Log on as user "shimadzu". Password is "Dar8k".
3) Start "DAR-8000 Tools" and back up the settings in a USB memory. Refer to Appendix
B-7 for the details on backup.

USB memory must be used for the backup because the backed up settings
is necessarily used to another cabinet.

4) Shut down DAR-8000f.

If necessary, back up the image data in Old cabinet to CD/DVD to see


them after exchange the cabinet.
Backing up the image data requires the large amout of time and many
CD/DVD media. Allow plenty of time to back up them before exchanging
the cabinet.

540 M517-E383T
Appendix G-2 Exchanging the Cabinet

To exchange the cabinet, follow steps below.

Prior to the exchange work, turn off the breaker of DAR -8000 Power
Transformer.

1) Disconnect all cable connected to the Old cabinet.

Only the cables connected to other device are need to be disconnected.


But when the Old cabinet is DAR-8000f (RF system) and has the reference
monitor option, the video cable for reference monitor i s not attached to the
New cabinet. Disconnect the video cable for reference monitor inside the
cabinet.

2) Exchange the Old cabinet for New one.


3) Connect all cables to the New cabinet by following section 4 "Wiring".

After the work, turn on the breaker of DAR-8000 Power Transformer.

When connecting cables is complete, note down the information on "Label,


Sitekey" attached to the PC side panel inside the New cabinet.

M517-E383T 541
Appendix G-3 Restoring the Settings to the New Cabinet

The procedure described here is intended for the case where the revision of
DAR-8000 system software in the "Old cabinet" is the same as that in the
"New cabinet".
When the revision differs, you have to perform various settings manually
according to a new installation procedure, instead of steps from 1) to 10) in
this section.
In case where the OS is different between cabinets, for example, Windows ®
2000 and Windows ® XP, "G-3. Restoring the settings to the New cabinet" is
not available, even though the revision of system software is the same.

Restore the settings backed up in Appendix G-1 to the New cabinet.


Follow steps below.

1) Remove the USB flash memory connected to the Old cabinet and exchange it for the
USB memory connected to the New cabinet.
2) Turn on DAR-8000f and start it by following Appendix A.
3) Log on as user "shimadzu".
4) Back up the default settings in the News cabinet by following Appendix E-2.
5) Start Windows Explore.
6) Copy the settings in the Old cabinet stored in USB memory (folder:
"E:\Backup_yyyymmdd_hhmmss") to the New cabinet (C:\Diag).
Yyyymmdd Date for backing up the settings
Example "Feb. 20 in 2007" is displayed as "20070220".
Hhmmss Time for backing up the settings
Example PM.7:05:45 is displayed as "190545".

7) Change the name of the folder copied to the New cabinet in step 6 to "\Backup" from
("\Backup_yyyymmd_hhmmss").

542 M517-E383T
When the “Backup” folder has existed, change the name of this existing
folder to “Backup_old” before proceeding step 7.

8) Restore the settings to the New cabinet by following Appendix B-7

9) Shut down DAR-8000f.

DAR-8000f must be turned off by shutdown, not restart because some


settings are updated when the DAR-8000f is powered

10) Turn On DAR-8000f, and start it by following Appendix A.

11) Log on as user "shimadzu".

12) Start the Service application. (Refer to section 6.1)

13) Start "Configuration". (Refer to section 6.2)

14) Set S/N of the New cabinet to Serial number field by following section 6.3.1 a).

How to check the S/N of the New cabinet


You will finde the S/N printed on the "Label, Sitekey" on attached to the
PC side cover. Remove the left cober of DAR-8000f cabinet to find the
“Label, Sitekey”.

15) Save the changes and exit the Service application.

M517-E383T 543
Appendix G-4 Confirmation

By following section 4.12, confirming the operation after the cabinet exchange.

Appendix G-5 Confirming the DSA Mode

When the system is upgraded to the Multi (DSA) system from the RF system, check the
system is switched to the Multi system.

1) Turn on DAR-8000f and start it by following the steps in Appendix A. Log on as user
"shimadzu".
2) Start the Service application. (Refer to section 6.1)
3) Start "Configuration". (Refer to 6.3)
4) By referring to section 6.3.1a), click on [System Configuration]-[Site Info] tab.
Check on [DSA Digital System] is entered in "Model Name" field.
5) Exit the Service application.
6) Start the clinical application.
7) Click on [Permanent Edit]. "APR Cell Edit" window opens. Click on an APR cell and
[Edit].
8) Click on [Radiography] tab and [Acquisition item].
9) Check the DSA can be displayed and selected in "Mode" field in "Acquisition" area.
10) Click on [Cancel] in "APR Radiography" window and click on [Cancel] in "APR Cell
Edit" window to close it.
11) Exit the clinical application and shut down the DAR-8000f.

544 M517-E383T
Appendix H H/W Difference

Some components in DAR-8000 cabinet depend on the shipment time, however


DAR-8000 cabinet is uniform in appearance. This section will describe the difference
related to installation.

1) Difference in PC
Some components including Mother Board are difference in kind and number. The table
below shows the kind of the Mother Board and corresponding components in each model.
Details of each model are described later.

Components\ Model 1 Model 2 Model 3 Model 4 Model 5


Model No.
M/B Intel RICOH Intel Intel Portwell
D865G FB9-L2S-21 G965 G965 G965
Expansion Absence Absence/Presence Presence Absence Absence
LAN
Expansion Absence/presence Absence/Presence Presence Absence Presence
Serial
Expansion Pattern A Pattern B Pattern C Pattern D Pattern E
Board order
Optical Drive CD/DVD CD/DVD DVD DVD DVD
(*1)

Components\ Model 6
Model No.
M/B Intel
HD632-H81C
Expansion Absence
LAN
Expansion presence
Serial
Expansion Pattern F
Board order
Optical Drive CD/DVD
(*1)

(*1)
CD: Support CD-R, not support DVD-R.
DVD: Support CD-R and DVD-R.

M517-E383T 545
2) Difference in IAPDB

There are two type of IAPDB. It depends on the shipment time.

 511-46367-03 IAPDB,726-396-G4
 511-46367-02 IAPDB,723-187-G2

546 M517-E383T
Appendix H-1 Difference in Expansion Slot

Expansion board inserted into the expansion slot depends on the model.

Expansion Slot
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Pattern
A B C D E F
7 VGA Bracket (*1) VGA VGA VGA VGA
VIB VGA Bracket Bracket (not in use) (not in use)
6 (*1) (*1)
LAN
Bracket VIB VIB VIB Bracket Bracket
5 (*1) (*1) (*1)
Slot No.

4 LAN LAN IAPDB IAPDB IAPDB VIB

IAPDB IAPDB LAN (not in use) VIB LVDS I/F


3
PCU I/F
(*2)
(not in use) (not in use) Serial (*2) Serial Bracket Serial (*3) IAPDB
2
Serial Serial Serial
LVDS I/F LVDS I/F LVDS I/F LVDS I/F LVDS I/F Serial (*3)
1
PCU I/F PCU I/F PCU I/F PCU I/F PCU I/F

1*) Bracket equipped with the connector that is connected to the rear panel for the power
synchronization between HV Main PS and DAR-8000 Control Cabinet.
2*) Connector (COM1) on the standard serial port of the Mother board (M/B)
3*) Connector (COM3) on the standard serial port of the Mother board (M/B)

Explanatory note
Upper row:DAR-8000i

Lower row:DAR-8000f

M517-E383T 547
Appendix H-2 LAN Port Number and Connection
DAR-8000 has two LAN port at maximum. Connection destination depends on the number
of LAN port as shown below. Check the destination prior to the connection.

Number of LAN Port


1 1+1(Ext) 2
LAN Port of M/B DICOM Remote DICOM
Maintenance Remote
Maintenance
LAN Port on the DICOM
expansion slot

When adding the Remote Maintenance Option to the system with one LAN
port, install the expansion LAN card by following Appendix F.

548 M517-E383T
Appendix H-3 Serial Port Number and Connection
Serial Port Number and layout depend on the DAR-8000 cabinet as shown below.

* Expansion slot layout is not illustrated because it depends on the model.

Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5

COM 1 COM 1 COM 1

COM 3 COM 4 COM 3 COM 4 COM 1 COM 3


Left Side Right Side Left Side Right Side

Check the serial port and destination in table below prior to the connection.
Destination DAR-8000i DAR-8000f Remarks
Type 1 COM1 UPS Only for
DAR-8000i
Type 2 COM1 UPS UPS
COM3 (not in use) PCU
COM4 (not in use) (not in use)
Type 3 COM3 UPS PCU
COM4 (not in use) UPS
Type 4 COM1 UPS Only for
DAR-8000i
Type 5 COM1 UPS UPS
COM3 (not in use) PCU

M517-E383T 549
Appendix H-4 Difference in IAPDB

There are two type of IAPDB board that is responsible for the main process including
image processing.

Name
IAPDB IAPDB_MF
P/N 511-46367-03 511-46367-02
Name IAPDB,726-396-G4 IAPDB,723-187-G2
System II System FPD System
II System (*1)
Supported Rev Rev.01.00.00 and later Rev.03.00.00 and later
Number of 4 3
(*2)
FPGA
Functional Tomography and -
restriction Tomosynthesis are not used.

(*1)
To use IAPDB_MF, S/W must be Rev.03.00.00 and later, however, IAPDB_MF will be
soon installed to II system and service parts will be also soon switched to those of
IAPDB_MF.

(*2)
To check the type of IAPDB, check the number of it displayed in the list in Appendix C-3.
IAPDB :FPGA0~FPGA3 are present.
IAPDB_MF :FPGA0~FPGA2 are present.

550 M517-E383T
Appendix I Tool for Displaying of Cross-cursor

The method to display the cross-cursor on the monitor is shown for the adjustment of X-ray
axis.

1) Start the tool from the following screen.


2) Double-click the shortcut "ImageCenter" on the DeskTop or click the "Image Center"
from the start menu.

From DeskTop From start menu

M517-E383T 551
3) Show the following screen.

Cross cursor

4) When finishing, double-click the cross-cursor or click the "ImageCenterWnd" of the


toolbar.

552 M517-E383T
Appendix J Countermeasure for FPD Error

When a FPD-related error occurs, the error dialog is displayed in the Main Image area as
below. Take a measure corresponding the displayed message, as shown in the following
table.
When a plurality of errors occurs simultaneously, all the error codes are displayed. For
example, "E0102" is displayed when E01 and E02 occur simultaneously.

Error Description Measure

E01 When "E01xx" of the error code is

(HV/DC OFF) displayed, check [xx], or check the log of

PCU after restarting Xcat to investigate

the cause of shutdown. Take the measure

of [xx] or one of the following:

Since FPD control power has been (1) Cooler warning: E02

shutdown, FPD cannot be used. (2) HV discharge: E04

(3) Sensor temp.: E06

(4) Sensor temp. malfunc: E10

E04 Replace FPD.

(Discharge) Also replace HV power, when the error is

detected in HV power.

M517-E383T 553
E02 FPD Cooling Unit encountered the Check the optical fiber, DC cable, and DC

(Problem in FPD problem, and HV/DC will be power supply.

cooling unit) shutdown and FPD will be Replace FPD when it does not recover.

unavailable, if this problem is kept

for more than 30 minutes.

E10 Thermal sensor inside FPD Turn OFF the UD power.

(Thermal sensor encountered the problem, failing in Replace FPD when it does not recover.

error in FPD) humidity control. Continuous use will

damage FPD.

E06 Temperature is out of proper Check the temperature log in the

(Thermal error) condition. FPD will be damaged, if examination room. When temperature has

this problem is kept. been out of the environmental condition

range, request an improvement of users.

E03 Thermal error is detected in HV. Check HV power.

(Thermal error in FPD will be damaged, if this Replace HV power when it does not

HV) problem is kept. recover.

E05 Overload in DC has been detected. Check DC power. Replace DC power

(Overload of DC) FPD will be damaged, if this when it does not recover.

problem is kept.

E52 Thermal/humidity sensor do not Replace battery in the sensor.

(Battery running operate, failing in temperature

out in control. Continuous use will damage

thermal/humidity FPD.

sensor)

554 M517-E383T

You might also like